JP2022060439A5 - - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines , a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball wins a prize based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting hole . In addition to the predetermined starting opening, there is known a winning opening in which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. Among these conventional gaming machines, for example, there is a game machine designed to improve interest by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins according to the type of the prize winning opening .

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter, a first state in which the game ball can enter , and the first state. a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than a second state ; and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on the result , and the ball is shot in the specific direction. a first ball-entering means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, a first position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter the first ball-entering means; a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means than at the first position ; A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means is provided, and a specific process that is not performed when a game ball enters the second ball entering means is performed, whereby the first ball entering means is performed. and means for increasing the degree of advantage when a game ball enters the ball entering means , wherein the second ball entering means is operated while the variable means is changed to the first position. It is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down in the direction of the variable means is more easily guided than a game ball flowing down in the direction of the variable means while the variable means is changed to the second position. The variable means is changed to the first position while the variable ball-entering means is changed to the second state during execution of the variable game, and the variable ball-entering means is changed to the first position. It is a configuration that can be varied to the second position while being varied to the state .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , a game ball launched in a specific direction is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter, and a game ball more than the first state. A second state in which it is difficult to enter a ball is variable, a variable entry means that can be changed, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a specific determination result obtained by determination by the determination means . and variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on, and the game ball launched in the specific direction is a first ball entering means provided at a position where a ball can be entered; a first position where a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter the first ball entering means; a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means ; By performing a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means and a specific process that is not performed when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, the game is played by the first ball entering means. and means for increasing the degree of advantage when a ball enters the ball , wherein the second ball-entering means moves toward the variable means while the variable means is being varied to the first position. The variable means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means is more likely to be guided than the game ball that has flowed down with the variable means in the second position, and the variable The means is changed to the first position while the variable ball-entering means is changed to the second state during execution of the variable game, and the variable ball-entering means is changed to the first state. It is a configuration that can be varied to the second position while it is on.

As a result , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen on which a right-handed navigation is displayed, and (b) is a diagram exemplified by a display screen on which a right-handed warning image is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a big win, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a ball enters a large-value winning hole during a big win. (a), (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen with which the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (a) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of a ball that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is closed; It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of a ball|ball. It is a diagram showing the upstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board. It is a diagram showing the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the first specific winning opening is opened, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the second specific winning opening is opened. (a) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the first specific winning hole is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the first specific winning hole is open. (a) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the second specific winning hole is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the second specific winning hole is open. (a) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of a ball entering the second variable winning device with the variable probability ball entrance closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the direction in which the variable probability ball entrance is opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which entered the inside of the 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state where it is. (a) is a diagram showing changes over time between the state of the second specific winning port and the state of the flow path in the second variable winning device in the 12th round of the jackpot A; It is a figure which shows the time-measurement change with the state of the 2nd specific prize-winning hole in the th round, and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable prize-winning device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is a figure and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd winning random number counter C4 and the winning in a normal design. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing ending processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing error notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning notification process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing normal notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is closed, and (b) is a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is open. FIG. 4 is an illustrative diagram; It is a front view of the storage device in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram exemplifying a case where a ball that has flowed into the storage device is guided to a large value winning opening when the storage valve is closed in the second embodiment; It is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball|bowl which flowed into the storage apparatus is guided to the small value prize winning opening when the storage valve is closed in 2 embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the advancing direction of a ball that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is open in the second embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment. be. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing storage control processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing warning processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing storage time notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing cancellation notification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen during a big hit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram showing the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board in the modification of the first embodiment. (a) is a plan view of the storage device and the second variable winning device in a state in which a slide member of a modified example of the first embodiment protrudes forward in a front view, and (b) is a modified example of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a plan view of the storage device and the second variable prize winning device in a state where the slide member of the example is buried on the back side in front view; It is a figure which shows the defined content of the 1st hit classification selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation|movement setting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a modified example of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning opening closing processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the modified example of the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the hit time notification process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the traveling direction of balls that flow into the storage device in a state where the balls stored in the storage device are arranged disadvantageously for the player in a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the traveling direction of balls that flow into the storage device in a state where the balls stored in the storage device are arranged in an advantageous manner for the player in a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a suggestive display image displayed on the display screen in a modified example of the second embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing cancellation suggestion display processing executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a storage state command process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area|region of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area|region of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area|region of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table in the third embodiment be. (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the variation pattern selection table in the third embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time-saving (probability variable) medium jackpot table in the third embodiment, ( c) is a diagram showing the contents of the regulations of the time saving (probability variable) middle out table in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the rules of the unlocked scenario setting table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the rules of the unlocked scenario setting table (normal) according to the third embodiment. c) is a diagram showing the contents of regulations of an open scenario setting table (probability variation) in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within a main controller in a third embodiment; FIG. (a) and (b) are the figures which illustrated the display screen of the 3rd design display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the regulation content of the expectation degree display selection table in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the opening action of the jackpot A in the normal game state in the third embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the opening action of the jackpot A in the variable probability game state in the third embodiment. be. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing open scenario setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal winning a prize processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. 13 is a flow chart showing ending processing 3 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning process 3 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing error notification processing 3 executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing storage state determination processing executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows display processing during time saving performed by MPU of an audio lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area|region of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the first per type selection table in the fourth embodiment be. (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the rules of the second open scenario setting table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the rules of the second open scenario setting table (normal) in the fourth embodiment. and (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the second open scenario setting table (probability variable) in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the opening action of the jackpot B in the normal game state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the opening action of the jackpot B in the variable probability game state in the fourth embodiment. be. (a) and (b) are the figures which illustrated the display screen of the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect|presentation process performed by MPU of the sound ramp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right side area|region of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table in the fifth embodiment. be. (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the rules of the third open scenario setting table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the diagram showing the contents of the rules of the third open scenario setting table (normal) in the fifth embodiment. and (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the third open scenario setting table (probability variable) in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM in a main controller in a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the regulation contents of a pseudo effect count setting table in the fifth embodiment. . It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when winning the jackpot in the fifth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when winning the jackpot in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of pseudo|simulation production|presentation in 5th Embodiment. (a) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd design display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (a) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd design display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (a) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd design display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot type determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a storage valve opening process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related process performed by MPU of the sound lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing round effect processing 5 executed by the MPU of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pseudo effect processing executed by the MPU of the sound ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the right side area|region of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the fourth embodiment.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first ball opening 64, second ball opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal ball opening ( Through gate) 67, variable display unit 80, storage device 600, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball inlet 64, the second ball inlet 640, the first variable prize winning device 65, the second variable prize winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 600 are made of the base plate 60 by router processing. , and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal ball entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery for a normal pattern (second pattern) is performed. In the lottery for the special symbols performed for the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery", and the lottery for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery". The lottery for the special symbol that is drawn is called "lottery for special symbol 2".

When the special pattern jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses). (or until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won), and 12 In the round, the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won a prize). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of entrances (probability variable entrance 654 and normal entrance) for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special game state. A port 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Details will be described later, but when a ball enters the probability variable entrance 654 in the special game state, "high probability state of special symbol" is given as added value after the end of the big win. On the other hand, when the ball does not enter the variable probability ball entrance 654 even once during the special game state, "ordinary pattern time saving state" is provided as an added value after the end of the big win. In addition, two kinds of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as the jackpot types of the special symbols (see FIG. 18(b)). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the ease with which a ball enters the variable probability opening 654 is made different.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. become easy. That is, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

When "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state (15R jackpot) of 15 rounds. In addition, in the special game state, when a ball enters the variable probability ball entrance 654, as an added value after the end of the big win, the pachinko machine 10 keeps the special symbol high during the period from the end of the big win to the next big win. Move to the probability state (during the probability of special symbols). On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the variable probability entrance 654 even once in the special game state, as an added value after the end of the big win, the special symbol lottery will be completed 100 times after the end of the big win. During the period, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal pattern. In addition, when shifting to the time-saving state of the normal pattern after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special pattern. This special symbol low probability state continues until the next big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the "jackpot B", compared to the "jackpot A", it is easier to enter the ball into the variable probability entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot state). That is, since the "jackpot B" is more likely to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols after the jackpot is finished, the jackpot is likely to occur again in a short interval after the jackpot is finished. Therefore, the "jackpot B" is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot A".

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to transition to. The high-probability state of the special symbols in the present embodiment (during the probability change of the special symbols) includes the state of the game in which the winning probability of the normal symbols (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. . On the other hand, the ``low probability state of special symbols'' refers to the time when the special symbols are not changing, and the probability of the big win is normal, that is, the state of the probability of big wins being lower than during the changing of the special symbols. In addition, the time saving state of normal symbols (during time saving) means a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 . On the other hand, the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability variation of the special symbols nor the time reduction of the normal symbols is performed (the state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) winning probability is increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is achieved. A long time is set compared to When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time , The number of times of opening the electric accessary 640a in the case of winning a normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol ( The winning probability of only the second symbol) may be increased compared to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the variable probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but it is not limited to this, You can limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, after the special game state is completed, a special symbol probability changing state (high probability state) is provided until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times, and after the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times. may be configured to be set to a normal state. In addition, the number of times that the special symbol is in the variable probability state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in this embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability variable entrance 654 in the special game state, it is configured to be in the time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. However, the time period of normal symbols is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

A first pattern display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). or display a special pattern (first pattern) according to the lottery result of the special pattern as a stop pattern after the fluctuation is completed, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in this first symbol display device 37, The number of balls is reserved up to four times for each type of ball entrance. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big win type (big win A, big win B) in the case of a big win. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17), for example, upper, middle, and lower. Three symbol columns are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the liquid crystal display, for example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. FIG. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which main symbols with even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. On the other hand, if it is a "jackpot B", the main A variable display in which the patterns are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been performed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. A notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display, The number of hits is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. FIG. 4(b) is an example in which the number of held balls corresponding to the entry into the first ball entrance 64 is four. When a held ball corresponding to a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is generated, a held ball number pattern different from the held ball number pattern displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4(a) is displayed. be done. As a result, the player can easily check the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second ball entrance 640. can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be held up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, referring to FIG. 5(a), a display prompting the third symbol display device 81 to hit the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 (right-hand navigation) is displayed. The display contents when this occurs will be explained.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a can be easily opened when the special symbols are in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state. By hitting (right hitting), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 . In addition, although the details will be described later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win, the first ball entrance 64 A "jackpot B" is more likely to occur than when a big win is achieved by a special pattern lottery (lottery for a special pattern 1) performed on the basis of the ball entering the heap. Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols given after the end of the big hit, or in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if the variable probability state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player cannot fully receive the benefit of the probability variation state of the pattern and the time-saving state of the normal pattern.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the image (right-handed navigation) illustrated in FIG. 5A is displayed in the probability variable state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, so that the player can enter the probability variable state of the special symbol. And it is configured so that the benefits of being in a time-saving state of normal patterns can be obtained.

As exemplified in FIG. 5(a), in right-handed navigation, a character "Aim right!" Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely acquire the benefits of the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time-saving state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b). The warning image exemplified in FIG. 5(b) indicates that the player should hit the ball to the right (hit to the right) even though it is not a period during which the player should hit the ball to the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right hitting warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the game is being executed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in the normal state (neither the probability changing state of the special symbols nor the time saving state of the normal symbols).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in the normal state (even if the ball is hit rightward, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second hole 640). Therefore, if the player hits the ball right-handed in the normal state, the chances of winning the lottery for the special symbol are reduced compared to hitting the ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 in the left-handed state. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big win, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, the player is prevented (suppressed) from losing money by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed hitting.

As illustrated in FIG. 5(b), when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3) is given a "warning". and the characters "Let's play with the left hand!!" are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be reminded that he/she should not hit with the right hand (should hit with the left hand). In addition, the hall clerk also confirms whether or not there is a right-hand hitting warning screen (see FIG. 5(b)) to determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method in which a right-hand hitting is performed in the normal state. can be easily identified.

It should be noted that the method of determining whether or not the player is hitting right is based on whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) into which the ball can flow when hitting right. . More specifically, when the ball enters one of the general winning holes 601, 602 or the out holes 603a to 603c provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) (each ball entering hole When it is determined that the ball has passed through the provided ball entry switch), it is determined that the player is hitting right.

Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) is in a state in which the balls are likely to flow down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and a state in which the balls flow down to the general winning opening 602 according to the game state. Two types of states are set, one being a state in which it is easy to activate (see FIG. 9(b)). In states other than the special game state (jackpot state) (probability variable state of special symbols, time-saving state of normal symbols, normal state), a state is set in which the balls are easily made to flow down to the general winning opening 601.例文帳に追加The general prize winning port 601 is a prize winning port in which the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters is smaller than that of the general prize winning port 602 (for example, 3). Therefore, even if the player hits to the right in the normal state, there is little advantage of entering the ball into the storage device 600 (the number of balls held cannot be increased). That is, if the player hits to the right in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the lottery for the special symbols decreases, and the number of balls held decreases, so that the disadvantage for the player increases. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from continuing to play a game method disadvantageous to him (a game method in which he hits to the right in the normal state), a warning image of hitting to the right (see FIG. 5(b)) is displayed. is configured as

It should be noted that, as a factor for determining whether or not to display the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)), not only the ball entering the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601, which is likely to win in the normal state, but also the winning The reason why it is determined whether or not a ball is entered into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 or the like, which is difficult to obtain, is that the possibility of illegal play is considered. That is, in a normal state, by continuing to illegally enter a ball into a general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a large number of paid out prize balls (for example, 15 payouts), the player can avoid a big win. There is a possibility that a fraudulent game method to obtain a large amount of prize balls will be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player is hit left (right). A right hitting warning image (see FIG. 5(b)) is displayed to prompt the player not to hit. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent games.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered one of the ball entrances (general winning entrances 601, 602, out exits 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. In the above configuration, a warning image for striking to the right (see FIG. 5(b)) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than a special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that a ball has won a prize (entered a ball) into a general prize winning port (large value winning prize port) 602 where many prize balls are paid out, fraudulent games are detected. It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that the game is being played. As a result, the hall clerk can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud by simply confirming the presence or absence of the right-hand hitting warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602, it means that the hall computer has been tampered with. may be configured to output a signal indicating As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraud has been committed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraud has occurred.

In this embodiment, the player hits right-handedly based on detection of a ball entering each ball hole (general winning holes 601, 602, out holes 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the player is hitting right, the method of determining whether or not the player is hitting right is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine that the ball is hit to the right when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A well-known sensor capable of detecting the passage of the ball may be arranged above the bowl, and it may be determined that the player is hitting to the right when the sensor detects the passage of the ball.

Next, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special game state (during the jackpot state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when a jackpot is won, for example, an image of a boy character 710 discovering a treasure chest 715 filled with treasure is displayed. This treasure suggests a large amount of prize balls that the player gets in the special game state (jackpot state). This display can increase the joy of winning a prize ball, so that a sense of satisfaction can be given to the big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81 . In the example of FIG. 6( a ), characters “ROUND3” are displayed in the display area 714 . By confirming this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot. Therefore, the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot can be easily recognized by the player.

Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed in the same manner as during the probability variable state of the special symbol and during the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, the characters "Aim right!" are displayed in the small area Ds3, and rightward arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be shot to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the jackpot state). be able to. If a player hits left in spite of the special game state (big hit state), the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is provided downstream, and is opened in the special game state (big hit state). It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a. In other words, it becomes impossible to obtain a large amount of prize balls, and the player loses money. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6(a)) is displayed even in the special game state (jackpot state) to encourage the player to hit right. As a result, the player can win prize balls in the big win.

In addition, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a number-of-winnings display area MA for displaying the number of times of winning (entering a ball) to the general winnings opening 602 is formed. For example, characters such as "EXTRA BONUS x 10" are displayed in the number-of-wins display area MA, as shown in 6(a). The characters "EXTRA BONUS" mean that prize balls are obtained by a method different from the prize balls obtained by entering the balls into the first specific prize winning opening 65a and the second specific prize winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a prize ball is obtained by entering the ball into the general winning hole 602 . In addition, the character "x10" indicates the number of times the ball entered the general prize winning opening 602 in the big win. In the example of FIG. 6(a), it means that the ball was entered into the general winning hole 602 ten times in the 1st to 3rd rounds.

A schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the characters "EXTRA BONUS x 10", and the characters "EXTRA BONUS gate open" are displayed above it. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). In addition, in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a speech balloon with the words "Aim!" . This balloon makes it possible for the player to recognize that entering the ball into the general winning hole 602 is advantageous (a large amount of winning balls can be obtained).

Also, FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing the display contents when a ball enters the general winning hole 602 in the special game state (big win state). As shown in FIG. 6(b), when a ball entering the general prize winning opening 602 is detected during the jackpot, the characters "GET" are displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image is displayed in which a ball enters a location corresponding to the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 . Furthermore, in the number-of-wins display area MA, the display content is changed from "EXTRA BONUS x 10" to "EXTRA BONUS x 11". As a result, the player can easily recognize that a prize ball has been obtained by entering the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 .

In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball enters the general winning hole 602 during the big win, the winning ball is displayed separately from the balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a. It is possible to make the player recognize the number of times that has been acquired. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of an increase in the number of "EXTRA BONUS" (the number of times a ball enters the general prize winning opening 602). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing an example of a left-handed warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a left-handed player is hit in the special game state (jackpot state). As shown in FIG. 7(a), when it is determined that the player is hitting to the left, a large display area 716 is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 for displaying a warning. Also, in the large display area, a large character "WARNING" is displayed, and below the "WARNING" character is displayed a character "Aim the attacker with a right-hand shot!". By displaying these characters in the large display area, the player can be made to recognize that the current game method (left-handed hitting) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, in the special game state (jackpot state), the player can surely win a large number of prize balls.

Whether or not the player is hitting left-handed is determined by whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 . That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), it is determined that the player is hitting left, and a left-hand hitting warning image ( (see FIG. 7A)) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a left-handed hitting warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a passage sensor that detects the passage of a ball is provided on the path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and if the sensor detects the passage of the ball during a big hit, a left-handed warning image ( It may be configured to display FIG. 7(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, when a ball is detected to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 in spite of the special game state (jackpot state), or when the special game state (jackpot state) is detected. state), a warning image is displayed when it is determined that a ball has entered the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, assuming that an abnormality has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, a large character "WARNING" is displayed in the central portion of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. At the bottom of the screen, the characters "Please call the gate error attendant" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can quickly request repairs or the like from the pachinko hall clerk or the like.

In addition, if the wiring or the like is illegally changed and the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602 that always pays out a large number of prize balls, etc. The store clerk can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity only by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7(b)). Therefore, by fixing the ball in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 and hitting the ball aiming at the storage device 600, it is intended to suppress fraudulent acts that increase the number of balls without going through a big win. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. The second symbol display device displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be activated (released) for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the probability change of the special pattern and during the time saving of the normal pattern, so that the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern) can be performed more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of winning the normal symbols increase, the player can be given many chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the probability variation of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the winning probability is increased, or the opening time or number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a is increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal ball entrance 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that some of the balls that flow down the right side of the game board, among the balls that have been shot onto the game board, can pass through. ing. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a winning lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times at the maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Also, the number of normal ball entrances 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball entry hole 64, a first prize entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the first prize entry switch. At 110 (see FIG. 17), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37 .

On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view (below the normal ball entrance 67), a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. FIG.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different numbers. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is five. good too.

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (expanded state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

As described above, during the probability variation of the special design and during the time saving of the normal design, the probability of winning the normal design is higher than during the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal design is short, so the fluctuation of the normal design In the display, the pattern of "○" becomes easy to be displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessary 640a is opened during the probability change of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols is longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second ball entrance 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, as the type of jackpot selected when a jackpot is won, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot B) that makes it easy for a ball to enter the variable probability ball inlet 654 during the special game state is the second ball inlet 640. The value is set higher when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 .

During normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the opening 64 so as to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for a big winning lottery. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, by passing the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second entrance. Since the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize at the ball opening 640, the ball is shot toward the second ball opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the ball is normally entered. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit B by passing the ball hole 67 to open the electric accessory and winning the second ball hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can be operated according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbols are changing probability, the normal symbols are in the time saving mode, or the normal state is in progress). Players can be made to change the way the ball is shot between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball inlet 64 (the lower left side of the second ball inlet 640), and a horizontally elongated rectangular first special prize prize hole is located substantially in the center thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses when a special symbol lottery resulting from winning a prize in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win, The first symbol display device 37 is lit so as to be a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the first specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific prize winning port 65a can be repeated up to 14 times (14 rounds), for example. More specifically, the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning port 65a is executed in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special game state. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid ( not shown). The first specific prize winning port 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted downward in the front by driving the large opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. The closed state and the state of the closed state are alternately repeated.

A second variable prize winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable prize winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a is provided above it. . The opening/closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by protruding forward in a front view (see FIG. 14(a). ). On the other hand, a special symbol lottery results in a big win, and in the 12th round, the opening/closing plate covering the second specific prize winning opening 650a slides to the back side in the front view, so that it sinks to the back side of the game board 13, and the ball is pushed to the back side. 2 Forms an open state in which a ball can enter the variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14(b)).

As described above, the ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a in the special game state (during the jackpot) enters the probability variable ball entering hole 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650. , After the end of the jackpot, the special symbol shifts to a variable state. On the other hand, when the ball does not enter the second specific winning hole 650a in the special game state, or even if it enters the second specific winning hole 650a, all the balls enter the normal ball entering hole 655. If you do, after the end of the jackpot, it shifts to the time-saving state of normal symbols.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as winning openings opened in the special game state. Conversely, only the first specific winning opening 65a may be used as the winning opening. Also, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of this embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 . This storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances (general winning entrances 601, 602, and out-ports 603a to 603c) in its interior, and the entering ball flows down to one of the entrances. be able to. In addition, the storage device 600 can store (stop the flow down) of only one ball that has entered its interior. Further, the storage device 600 is covered with a transparent cover body on the front side in front view, and it is possible to determine which ball entrance the ball that the player has entered (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. is configured so that it can be easily checked. Details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an overview of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured such that a ball can enter the inside of the storage device 600 via the guide channel 605 . The storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits to the right, one ball hits about every three hit balls. Balls that do not enter the guide channel 605 flow down along the left upper portion of the storage device 600 toward the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. That is, in the special game state, the player makes it so that some of the balls shot toward the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a enter the storage device 600 via the guiding flow path 605. is configured to

As shown in FIG. 8 , two types of flow paths branched by a branching member 604 are provided downstream of the guide flow path 605 inside the storage device 600 . Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 606 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front. Most of the balls that have flowed down this guide channel 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. A detection switch 601a (not shown) capable of detecting that a ball has entered (passed) is provided in the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 . When the detection switch 601a detects that a ball has entered the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, three winning balls are paid out. In addition, on the left and right sides of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, the ball which did not enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite flowing down the guide channel 606 is discharged. Out ports 603a and 603b are provided for this purpose. These out ports can prevent (suppress) the accumulation of balls inside the storage device 600 and reliably discharge the balls that have flowed down the guide channel 606 . Further, detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 (not shown) are provided at these out-ports 603a and 603b, respectively, like the general prize-winning port (small value prize-winning port) 601. FIG. These detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 make it possible to accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

Inside the storage device 600, on the right side in front view, a guide channel 607 through which the balls can flow down is provided. Most of the game balls that have flowed down this guidance channel 607 enter the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. A detection switch 602a (not shown) capable of detecting that a ball has entered (passed through) is provided in the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 . When the detection switch 602a detects that a ball has entered the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, more prize balls can be obtained when the ball enters the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. can. Out-ports 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right sides of the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602, respectively. These out-ports prevent (suppress) the balls that have not entered the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and the balls that have flowed down the guide channel 607 are removed. can be discharged without fail. Further, the out port 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown) in the same way as the out ports 603a and 603b. The detection switch 603c1 makes it possible to accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special game state (jackpot state) is reached, the ball is set to be easily entered into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. , In states other than the special game state (jackpot state), a state is set in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 . That is, in the special game state, in addition to obtaining a large amount of prize balls by opening the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a, the general prize winning port (large value winning prize) in the storage device 600 It is configured so that a prize ball can be obtained by winning a ball into the outlet 602 . As a result, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big win state), so that it is possible to increase the player's merit by winning a big win. As a result, the player can play the game with a greater enjoyment of winning the jackpot, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in states other than the special game state (jackpot state), the general prize winning port (high value winning port) 602 with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the relatively number of prize balls to be paid out is closed. A state is set in which the ball is likely to enter the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with less value. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit in putting balls into the storage device 600, so even in a state other than the special game state, the player tries to receive a large amount of payout by always aiming at the storage device 600. An irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed). As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three balls hit right-handed will enter the storage device 600 . The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three balls. That is, even if right-handed hitting is executed in a normal state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for a special symbol, and the number of balls cannot be increased by payout based on the balls entering the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to hit left.

The guide channel 607 is provided with a storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a can block the guide channel 607 by protruding forward in a front view, and can prevent the balls that have progressed to the guide channel 607 from flowing down. That is, the ball can be stopped (ball is stored) at the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the storage device solenoid 610, the storage valve 607a protrudes forward in front view (a state in which the guide channel 607 is blocked) and the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the back in front view. It is configured to be switchable between a buried state (a state in which the ball can flow down the guide channel 607). The balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a are prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the side of the guide channel 606 by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guide channel 607 and the branch member 604. . That is, the protruding portion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set high enough to prevent the balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a from flowing out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball entering the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two types of states that the storage valve 607a described above can take. FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing the motion of a ball entering the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a protruding forward, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the motion of a ball that enters the storage device 600 in a state of being buried in the water.

As shown in FIG. 9( a ), more than half of the lower end of the guiding channel 605 overlaps the upper end of the guiding channel 607 . On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide channel 606 is positioned to the left of the center axis 605a of the guide channel 605 and hardly overlaps the lower end portion of the guide channel 605 . Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide channel 605 can easily advance to the guide channel 607 .

The sphere that has advanced to the guide channel 607 is prevented from flowing down by the storage valve 607a and stops above the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). Then, when another ball newly flows down the guide channel 605 in the state where the ball is stopped above the storage valve 607a (the ball is stored), the new ball flows down the guide channel 605. The sphere coming in contact (interference) with the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a. Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (flowing direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the guiding channel 605 is changed.

Since the guide channel 607 is provided slightly to the right of the guide channel 605 (see FIG. 9A), the spheres stored on the reservoir valve 607a are newly moved to the guide channel 605. In most cases, it stops on the right side of the falling ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing down the guide channel 605 collides with the left side of the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and is repelled leftward in the front view. Therefore, the ball newly flowing down the guide channel 605 advances to the guide channel 606 provided on the left side in the front view. As described above, most of the balls that flow down the guide channel 606 enter the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of paid out prize balls (three prize balls). That is, in a state in which the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the near side in a front view and balls cannot flow down the guide channel 607 (a state in which the guide channel 607 is closed), most of the balls entering the storage device 600 are generally The ball is entered into a winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 .

On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried on the back side in the front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the balls that have progressed to the guide channel 607 from flowing down, so the guide channel 607 The ball that advances to , flows down the guiding channel 607 as it is, and enters the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 . As described above, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is a winning opening with a relatively large number of paid out balls (15 pieces), so there are many merits for the player to win.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the balls can flow down the guide channel 607 (see FIG. 9B) when the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the special game state, by making the ball enter the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a by hitting to the right in the special game state, in addition to obtaining a large amount of prize balls, it is possible to shoot by hitting to the right. Prize balls can be obtained by winning a part of the collected balls into a general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 . As a result, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big win state), so that it is possible to increase the player's merit by winning a big win. As a result, the player can play the game with a greater enjoyment of winning the jackpot, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as described above, in states other than the special game state (jackpot state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a relatively large number of winning balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and a relatively large number of winning balls are paid out. A state is set in which a ball can easily enter a general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 in which the number of winning balls to be won is small. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit in putting balls into the storage device 600, so even in a state other than the special game state, the player tries to receive a large amount of payout by always aiming at the storage device 600. The game method can be prevented (suppressed).

In the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the guide channel 606 enters the general winning port (small value winning port) 601, and the ball that has flowed down the guide channel 607 enters the general ball inlet 602. However, it is not limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of each guide flow path, a known crew means having a plurality of winning holes is provided, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning hole into which the ball enters. good too. As a result, even if the guide channel 606 is flown down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by making the ball enter a prize-winning opening from which a relatively large number of prize balls are dispensed. Therefore, the player can watch with interest until the ball entering the storage device 600 enters one of the winning holes. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the guide channel 607 is blocked by the reservoir valve 607a so that the spheres can be stored in the guide channel 607. It may be configured to store balls on the way of 607 . That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide channel 607, and is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special game state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the spheres that first flowed into the guide channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the downflow of the spheres can be stopped (the spheres can be stored at the position of the electromagnets). By configuring in this way, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

Also, in the present embodiment, one ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, but this is not a limitation, and two or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, when storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the vertical direction, or may be configured so that they can be stored side by side.

In this embodiment, the outlet is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the outlet, a prize winning outlet through which prize balls are dispensed may be provided. Also, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the respective winning holes may be varied. More specifically, for example, instead of the out port 603a, a prize winning port with 6 prize balls is provided, in place of the out port 603b, a prize winning port with 10 prize balls is provided, and in place of the out port 603c, a prize winning port is provided. may provide 12 winning openings. As a result, it is possible to more interestingly observe when the ball flows down the guiding channel 606 and to which winning opening the ball enters the guiding channel 607 . Also, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 so that the winning opening into which the ball enters is more random. . As a result, when the ball has flowed into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the ball until the ball enters one of the winning holes. In addition, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible for the staff of the hall to set a ball entrance into which the ball can easily enter. Therefore, the ball output rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, the path when the player shoots the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when hitting right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a portion of the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13, which is upstream of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, a normal ball entrance 67 is provided in the upper part of the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 . As described above, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a lottery for normal symbols is executed. Then, when the win of the normal pattern is reached, the second pattern display device 83 executes the variation performance for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern, and then displays the ``○'' pattern indicating the win of the normal pattern. Then, based on the display of the "○" symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 provided downstream of the normal ball entrance 67 is activated. It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 sec x 1 time or 1 sec x 2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, it becomes easier for a right-handed ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . As described above, during the probability change of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols, the probability of winning the normal symbols increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols shortens, and the open period of the electric accessory becomes longer. A ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . Therefore, by executing a right-hand shot, a special symbol lottery can be received without reducing the number of balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a portion downstream of the second ball entrance 640 in the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 , a storage device 600 is provided downstream of a path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 . A first variable winning device 65 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. (see Figure 11). That is, when the player hits to the right, among the balls that have flowed downstream in the right path (channel), the ball that has flowed downstream without entering (entering) the storage device 600 is ranked first. 1 It flows down in the direction of the variable winning device 65 . Balls that flow down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65 and do not enter the first specific winning port 65 a flow down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 .

In this way, the ball can flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 only by the player hitting to the right. Therefore, in the special game state (jackpot state), the player can make the ball enter the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a only by hitting to the right. You can win prizes. Also, part of the ball hit aiming at the first specific winning hole 65 a or the second specific winning hole 650 a enters the storage device 600 . As described above, in the special game state (jackpot state), most of the balls that enter the storage device 600 enter the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), the player can win more prize balls during the special game state. As a result, the player can play the game with a greater enjoyment of winning the jackpot, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. FIG. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing opening operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the first specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be openable forward in a front view. By opening the first specific winning hole 65a, a game ball flowing down a path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the first specific winning hole 65a. In addition, as described above, the first specific prize winning port 65a is used in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special game state (jackpot state) for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls (until you win a prize). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out per one ball entering. Therefore, the player can win a large amount of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the second specific prize winning port 650 of the second variable prize winning device 650 can be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding to the back side in front view. configured as possible. As a result, the upper portion of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened, and a game ball flowing down a path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won) in 12 rounds of the special game state (jackpot state). Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out per one ball entering. Therefore, the player can win a large amount of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the movement of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 and reached the first specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the right will be described. First, FIG. 13(a) shows a case where the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the ball reaches the first specific winning hole 65a with the first specific winning hole 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a. , it falls into the space in front of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13(a)). Then, the ball that has fallen to the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down a flow path provided below the first specific winning opening 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning hole 65a is inclined toward the second specific winning hole 650a, the ball flows down in the direction of the second specific winning hole 650a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning hole 65a with the first specific winning hole 65a open, as shown in FIG. The opening portion of the 1 specific prize winning port 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(b), inside the first variable winning device 65, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. By entering the ball discharge port 65c, winning of the ball is detected and the prize ball is paid out, and the ball enters the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning port 65a. can be discharged. In addition, since the bottom portion 65b of the first variable prize winning device 65 is inclined toward the ball discharge port 65c, all the balls entering the first specific prize winning port 65a enter the ball discharge port 65c. can be balled. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the motion of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 and reached the second specific winning hole 650a by hitting to the right will be described. First, FIG. 14(a) shows a case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. , it flows down the upper part of the second specific winning port 650a and falls to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14(a)). Then, the ball dropped to the left side of the second specific winning hole 650a flows down to the out hole 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left side of the second specific winning hole 650a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a open, as shown in FIG. The opening portion of the 2 specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a. As shown in FIG. 14(b), inside the second variable winning device 650, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. By entering the ball discharge port 650c, winning of the ball is detected and the prize ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning port 650a. can be discharged. In addition, since the bottom portion 650b of the second variable prize winning device 650 is inclined in the direction of the ball discharge port 650c, all the balls entering the second specific prize winning port 650a enter the ball discharge port 650c. can be balled. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the downstream structure of the ball outlet 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special game state (jackpot state), when the ball enters the probability variable ball entrance 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, After the end of the big hit, it is configured to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. This variable-probability ball entrance 654 is provided in one of the two flow paths (induction flow path 652 and induction flow path 653) provided downstream of the ball discharge port 650c (induction flow path 652). It is At the upper ends of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650d is provided for setting the flow path through which the ball flows. The flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the ball cannot advance, and to open the other flow path so that the ball can advance. It is By driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17), the flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated around the switching shaft 650e. to switch the placement.

FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) are diagrams showing the movement of the ball for each arrangement of the channel switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15( a ) is a diagram showing a case where the channel switching valve 650 d is arranged to close the guide channel 652 . In the case of the arrangement in which the guide channel 652 is closed, the ball entering the ball discharge port 650c is prevented from proceeding to the guide channel 652 by being blocked by the channel switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guiding channel 653 (see FIG. 15(a)). A ball inlet 655 is usually provided downstream of the guide channel 653 . That is, while the arrangement shown in FIG. In this embodiment, by turning off the flow path solenoid 611, the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged as shown in FIG. 15(a).

On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a case where the channel switching valve 650d is arranged to close the guide channel 653. As shown in FIG. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611 . In the arrangement in which the guide channel 653 is closed, the ball entering the ball discharge port 650c can proceed to the guide channel 652 without being blocked by the channel switching valve 650d. Therefore, the ball advances to the guide channel 653 and enters the variable probability ball entrance 654 provided downstream thereof.

When the ball enters the probability variable entry hole 654, it is set to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol at the end of the big hit (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the 12th round in which the second specific winning hole 650a is opened ends, a suggestion effect is executed to suggest to the player the game state after the end of the big win in subsequent rounds. That is, if the ball enters the probability variable entrance 654 in the 12th round, in the 13th to 15th rounds, the third symbol display device 81 provides a display effect that suggests that the special symbol will shift to the probability variable state. is executed in On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the probability variable entrance 654 in the 12th round, in the 13th to 15th rounds, the third symbol display device 81 provides a display effect suggesting a shift to the time-saving state of the normal symbol. is executed in In this way, by setting the 12th round as the round in which the big 2 specific winning hole 650a is opened, a sufficient period of time for executing the suggestive effect suggesting the game state after the end of the big win is ensured in the remaining rounds of the big win. be able to.

In addition, as described above, in the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable prize winning device 650 is provided downstream of the entrance of the pooling device 600, so that the balls flow into the pooling device 600. The easier it is for the ball to flow in, the more difficult it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650 . If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the variable probability ball entrance 654 in the 12th round of the big win B. Conversely, the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the easier it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, so the ball is more likely to enter the variable entry hole 654 in the 12 rounds of the big win B. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which balls flow into the storage device 600, the rate of ball entry into the variable probability entrance port 654 can be changed. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of inflow into the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, the more the two pegs provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to approach each other, the more difficult it is for the ball to pass through between these two pegs, and thus the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in 12 rounds of the big hit B, the ball is easily entered into the probability variable entrance 654, so that the transition to the probability variable state of the special symbol can be easily performed. On the other hand, the more the two pegs provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to separate them from each other, the easier it is for the ball to pass between the two pegs, and the easier it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the 12th round of the big hit B, the balls are likely to flow into the probability variable entrance 654, so that it is possible to make it difficult to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600, the specs of the pachinko machine 10 (ratio of probability variable state of special symbols) can be varied, so that pachinko can be adapted to the business policy of each hall. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a differs between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. As a result, in the special game state (big win state), it is easier for the ball to enter the variable probability ball entrance 654 in the big win B than in the big win A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the channel switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific prize winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the channel switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the jackpot A. FIG. The upper graph in FIG. 16(a) shows the time-measurement change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific prize winning port (second large opening port) 650a. The figure on the lower side shows the chronological change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the downstream left guiding flow path 652 of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the right guiding flow path 653 is open). be.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), when the 12th round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time After (for example, 0.2 seconds) has passed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the 12th round, and the open state is set based on the lapse of 7 seconds. This open state continues until the end of the 12th round. Specifically, the opening state is set until 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, or until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round. be done. Then, when the 12th round ends, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big win state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big wins.

In addition, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the channel switching valve 650d is set so that the guide channel 653 provided on its right side is closed and the ball can flow down the guide channel 652 on its left side (Fig. 15 (b)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round, and when 6.5 seconds have passed, the flow path switching valve 650d is reversed. That is, the guide channel 652 is closed by the channel switching valve 650d, and a state is set in which the ball can flow down the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15(a)). Since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the channel can be switched before the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

After the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (the state in which the ball can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the ball can flow down the guide channel 653 is the next big win, which continues until the 11th round is completed. Then, when the 11th round ends and the 3-second interval period starts, a state is set in which the ball can flow down the guiding channel 652 (the channel solenoid 611 is turned on). In other words, during most of the period in which the player is playing the game, the ball can pass through the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d. The state in which the ball can pass through the guidance channel 652 is limited from the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of 12 rounds to 6.5 seconds after the start of 12 rounds. There is only a period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if the ball enters the second specific winning hole (second large open hole) 650a other than the 12th round in the special game state, the ball enters the variable probability ball hole 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from being thrown, it is possible to prevent (suppress) from illegally acquiring the probability variable state of the special symbol.

Note that the timing for switching the channel switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, the guide channel 652 may be configured to switch to an open state at the start of 12 rounds, or in the middle of an interval period set after the 11 rounds (for example, after the interval starts). 0.5 second) may be configured to switch. As a result, the period in which the guide channel 652 is opened can be shortened, so that the ball can enter the inside of the second variable prize winning device 650 illegally while the second specific prize winning port 650a is closed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the variable probability ball entrance 654 . That is, fraud can be prevented.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the period during which the induction channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d is open, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open. The opening pattern of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the period during which the game is played hardly overlaps (overlaps only for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of 12 rounds). Therefore, in many cases of a big win A, the ball does not enter the variable probability ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big win), so that it is difficult to set the variable probability state of the special pattern after the end of the big win.

The reason why the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a is opened in 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12 rounds is to make it difficult to understand that the jackpot A is received immediately after the start of the 12 rounds. is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. ) 650a is opened. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific prize winning port (second large opening port) 650a immediately after the start of 12 rounds between the big win A and the big win B, it is expected that the big win this time is the big win B. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(b), changes in timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the channel switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 16(b) shows the timing change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific prize winning port (second large opening port) 650a. The figure on the lower side shows the chronological change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the downstream left guiding flow path 652 of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the right guiding flow path 653 is open). be.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the 12th round is started, the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a is set to the open state. The open state is maintained until 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the lapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a before 5 seconds elapse, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a Closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big win state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big wins.

In addition, as described above, in the 12th round of the big win B, the passage switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as that of the big win A. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the 11th round, the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d is closed so that the ball can flow down the guide channel 652 on the left side. (see FIG. 15(b)). Then, when 6.5 seconds have passed since the 12th round was started, the channel switching valve 650d is switched to the reverse direction. That is, the guide channel 652 is closed by the channel switching valve 650d, and a state is set in which the ball can flow down the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15(a)). After the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, this state (the state in which the ball can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the period during which the induction channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d is open, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the period overlaps with the period of 5 seconds at maximum. Therefore, in many cases when the jackpot B is reached, the ball can be entered into the probability variable entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so the special symbol probability variable state is set after the jackpot. easier.

In addition, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this. It may be determined arbitrarily as long as it is possible to set a pattern in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball. Moreover, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to the mode of this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 653 at the start of 12 rounds (see FIG. 15(a)), and a predetermined time (eg, 6.5. 5 seconds) has elapsed, the flow path switching valve 650d may be set so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 652 (see FIG. 15(b)).

Also, the number of rounds in which the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a is opened is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to any round. Furthermore, the second specific prize winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in a plurality of rounds. can be set to As a result, it is possible to increase the chances for the ball to enter the probability variable entrance 654, so that after the big win B is finished, the probability variable state of the special symbol can be more likely to be obtained. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific prize winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered. It can be prevented (suppressed).

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64 .

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the out-openings 603a to 603c are guided through the out-opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box may be damaged. The cover side is cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. Run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1, which will be described later, is stored. Although the details will be described later together with the description of the first winning random number counter C1, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting winning is one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a. , it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18(b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type. , And it is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18(b)). As described above, when the jackpot A is won, most of the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured to be a period during which the channel 653 is open (see FIG. 16(a)). Therefore, since it becomes difficult to let the ball flow down to the guide channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d, the ball is moved to the constant variable entrance ball port 654 provided downstream of the guide channel 652. It becomes difficult to let the ball enter. That is, when the jackpot A is achieved, it becomes difficult to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols after the jackpot is completed.

In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 18(b)). As described above, when the jackpot B is obtained, the entire period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the guidance provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured to overlap with the period during which the channel 652 is open (see FIG. 16(b)). Therefore, while the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a is open, the flow path switching valve 650d can be opened simply by entering the ball into the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a. The sphere can flow down to the guiding channel 652 provided on the left side of the . Further, as described above, the variable probability entrance 654 is provided downstream of the guide flow path 652 . Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached, it becomes easier to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the jackpot is completed.

On the other hand, when the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18(b)). In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 99" in association with the big winning B. That is, the number of determination values for the big win B is increased when the special symbol 2 lottery results in a big win compared to the case where the special symbol 1 lottery results in a big win. Therefore, when the lottery of the special pattern 2 results in a big win, the big win B is more likely to occur.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easier. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the definite variable state of the special symbols, the definite variable state of the special symbols is likely to be a big hit of the special symbols, and when it becomes a big hit, the definite variable state of the special symbols is likely to be a big hit B, and the definite variable state of the special symbols after the big win. Since the big winning B, which tends to be in the state, is likely to be repeated, the player can easily win a large number of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c1 in FIG. 18(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. 1st hit type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the off in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for initial value setting of the 1st hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance 64 consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reservation first to fourth areas) and a second ball entry are stored. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 b corresponding to the winning to the mouth 640 is provided, and each of these areas has a ball entering timing to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 In addition, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a first winning random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is If the value of the random number that becomes a big hit set by the first winning random number table 202a matches, it is determined as a special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the case of the probability variable state of the special symbol, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 9" If it is judged and it is any of "0 to 9", it is judged to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of ``0 to 399'' of the first hit random number counter C1, the determination values for the big hit are 10 values of ``0 to 9'', so that the special symbol is a big hit during the probability change of the special symbol. The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). Also, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is "200", and if "200", it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of ``0 to 399'' of the first winning random number counter C1, the decision value for the big hit is only ``200'', so that the special symbol is not possible in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table for the low probability time and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for the high probability time. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is displayed. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the special symbol 1 is selected by lottery and the jackpot is won, and the random number is any one of "0 to 49" in the first win type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot A". In addition, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery and the random number is any one of "50 to 99", the type of jackpot is "jackpot B". Furthermore, the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery, and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" when the random number is any one of "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2. In addition, when the special pattern 2 is drawn by lottery and the random number is any one of "20 to 99", the type of jackpot is "jackpot B".

In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type or two or more types may be provided. In addition, the same jackpot type is selected with the same value of the first win type counter C2 in the case of the big win by the lottery of the special pattern 1 and the case of the big win by the lottery of the special pattern 2.例文帳に追加You may By configuring in this way, the amount of data in the first winning type selection table 202b can be reduced, so the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time lag, long-time lag, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d, which stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as described above. ing.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", and various types of "loss super reach" are defined. , Various "normal reach" and various "super reach" are defined as variation patterns for big hits. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. , is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 18(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is for when the probability of normal symbols is low (period in which normal symbols are in a normal state) (see 202c1 in FIG. 18(c)), and when the probability is low, it is possible to win normal symbols. It is divided into two types for (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)) and (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)) when the probability is high (normal pattern time saving state, and special pattern variable state period), and included in each The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be hit, the probability of winning at the time of low probability of normal design (normal state of normal design) and high probability of normal design (time saving state of normal design) is changed.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that normally win a symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (202c1 in FIG. 18(c) reference). In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers for a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high (during the time reduction of the normal design, and during the probability change of the special design), there are 200 random numbers that will be the jackpot of the normal design, and the range is "5 to 204". . These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at the time of high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is activated "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power interruption (including the time of power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will now be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability flag 203g, variable probability setting flag 203h, variable probability passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, variable probability effective flag 203o , a probability variable effective timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time saving medium counter 203r, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first ball entrance. Each value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on the winning of the 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for the winning to the second ball entrance 640 are respectively stored. , and other configurations are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (first It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the three-symbol display device 81 . The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls that have entered the second ball entrance 640 and are reserved is stored. Since it is only different, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of holding variation display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 31). S703: No).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state of the special symbol (during the variable probability of the special symbol). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In this embodiment, when the variable probability setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the start of the big win is set. In addition, in the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power cut occurs. In this case, the configuration is such that the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs is backed up.

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the variable probability entrance 654 during the special game state (jackpot state). . When a game ball enters the variable probability entrance 654, the ball is detected by a variable probability switch (not shown), and the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the variable probability flag 203g being set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the variable probability setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is cut off, and if it is determined that the variable probability switch has been passed, the variable probability setting flag 203h may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by discriminating fraud such as rewriting only the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch in one round (in this embodiment, the twelfth round of the jackpot) during the jackpot state. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one when passing the variable probability switch (S1411 in FIG. 38). Also, after executing the process of whether or not the number of game balls that have flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged game balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). It should be noted that the value of the probability variable passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value is reset to zero.

The number-of-winning-wins counter 203j counts the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second It is a counter for counting the number of balls entering the large opening) 650a. Specifically, when a winning sensor (not shown) provided in each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a detects that a ball has entered the game, 1 is added and updated. (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (the value of the winning number counter 203j ) and the ejected number (total value of the ejected number counter 203q and the variable probability passage counter 203i) are matched, then reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, it is reset to 0 when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. Basically, the number of balls entering the first specific prize winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the 12th round, only the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, so in the 12th round, the winning number counter 203j is substantially the second specific winning opening (second The number of balls entering the large opening 650a is counted.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered either the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a or the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a, a prize is won. It is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of balls struck.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the elapsed time after the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15(b)). . That is, the operation counter 203k measures (counts) the elapsed time after the passage solenoid 611 is turned on and the ball is set to enter the variable probability entrance 654. In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) based on the completion of 11 rounds of jackpots, so that the flow path switching valve 650d rotates clockwise around the switching shaft 650e. Guide channel 652 is opened.

At the end of the 11th round, a counter value corresponding to the period during which the channel solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set in the operation counter 203k. That is, a counter value corresponding to a total of 9.5 seconds, which is an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round, is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 611 is set to OFF. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power is cut off. Moreover, it is reset to 0 which is an initial value by initializing the pachinko machine 10 .

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open in one round. to the closed state. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is updated by being incremented by one (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a or the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a is closed, It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged has passed.

The remaining ball timer 203n is set when one preset round ends and the first specific prize winning opening (first large open opening) 65a is closed (1st to 11th rounds, 13th to 15th rounds), or when the second When the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds), it is necessary for the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged. A counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the first variable winning device 81 to discharge the winning game ball is 2 seconds. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. The value of this remaining ball timer 203n is updated, and when the value reaches the upper limit (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (1st to 11th rounds and 13th to 15th rounds) or the second variable winning device 650 It is determined whether or not the number of prizes won in (12 rounds) matches the number of discharge (S1507 in FIG. 39). Then, when it is determined that the winning number and the discharged number do not match, an error command is set to notify that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that ball clogging occurs inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 . Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, and an impact or the like is applied at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of the jackpot to enter the ball into the probability variable ball entrance 654. Fraud can be curbed.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, even if the ball enters the probability variable entrance 654, the probability variable setting The configuration may be such that the flag 203h is not set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the probability variable gaming state from being illegally given.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that either the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a or the second specific prize winning port (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. When it is detected, updating of the counter value by the remaining ball timer 203n is started, but it is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

The variable probability valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the ball when the game ball enters the variable probability entrance 654 after the passage solenoid 611 is set to be off. is. When the probability variable effective flag 203o is set to ON, based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 611 is ON, the ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B) This indicates that the time required for the ball to enter the mouth 654 is less than that. In other words, it indicates that entering the variable probability entrance 654 is a normal operation.

The variable probability valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for the ball to enter the variable probability entrance 654 normally. In this embodiment, it takes one second for the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 652 to enter the variable probability entrance 654 . The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds with a margin of 0.2 seconds added. If the ball enters the variable probability entrance 654 after 1.2 seconds have elapsed, there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has occurred, so control is performed so that the variable probability setting flag 203h is not updated. .

As a result, in a state where the flow path switching valve 650d closes the induction flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the variable probability entrance 654), the ball is entered into the variable probability entrance 654, or From the downstream of the opening 654, the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like to pass through the variable probability ball entrance 654, or the electric wave etc. misdetects that the ball has entered the variable probability entrance 654. can be suppressed.

The discharged number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting the discharge of the balls. The discharge number counter 203q adds 1 to the value each time the discharge of the ball is detected by the ball discharge port switch (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of balls discharged, the value of the discharge number counter 203q is set to the initial value. is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time period (number of fluctuations of special symbols) in the time saving state of normal symbols. This time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the variable probability setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, the time-saving state of normal symbols is given 100 times.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and various data and programs required for game control.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (complete loss, reach loss, various reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. And, the variable probability state flag 223f, the time saving state counter 223g, the big hitting flag 223h, and the allowable time counter 223i are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) adds the number of pending balls in the variable display, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The variable probability state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state of special symbols. If this variable probability state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, and if it is off, it indicates that it is in a special symbol low probability state. This variable probability state flag 223f is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from main controller 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223f, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the probability variable state of the special symbol, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)). is displayed.

The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol time saving state. If the time saving state counter 223g is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) with normal patterns. The time saving state counter 223g is updated according to the notification contents of the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the corresponding performance is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the time-saving state of normal symbols, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)) is displayed.

The jackpot flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special game state (jackpot state). If the jackpot flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special game state (jackpot state), and if it is off, a state other than the special game state (jackpot state) (variable special symbol probability state, normal It indicates that it is either the time saving state of the pattern or the normal state). This jackpot middle flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from main controller 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (jackpot state) is started. On the other hand, the jackpot medium flag 223h is set to OFF when an ending command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). In other words, it is set to OFF when the special game state (jackpot state) ends. A corresponding effect is set according to the state of the jackpot middle flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6(a)) displayed in the special game state (jackpot state), or the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7(a)) is displayed. See) is to be displayed.

The permissible time counter 223i determines whether the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 607a enters either ball entrance (general prize winning port 601 or general winning prize port 602). It is a counter for counting the time until entering the ball (ball throwing time). By counting the ball sweeping period, when the ball enters the general prize winning opening 601 or the general prize winning opening 602, it is determined more accurately whether or not the ball entering is a normal operation. be able to. This permissible time counter 233i is set to a counter value corresponding to one second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Also, each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 42), is executed, the value is decremented by one (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

As described above, when the reservoir valve 607a is closed, the ball enters the general winning port 602 provided downstream of the reservoir valve 607a, or enters the general winning port 601 when the reservoir valve 607a is open. A warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) is displayed when the ball enters the ball. However, if the ball flows into the guide channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning port 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. sometimes. Similarly, when the ball flows into the guide channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning port 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. There is a case to ball. In order to treat these as normal ball entries (not to display a warning image), in this embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, the permissible time counter 233i is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Sets the corresponding counter value. Until one second set as the counter value elapses, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed). is configured as

The number-of-winning-awards counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 in a big win. The winning frequency counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of a big win, and resets to 1 every time a winning information command corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is received in the big winning. are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the number of times the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the special game state (big win state). (see FIG. 6(a)). The number-of-winning-awards counter 223j is referred to for accurately updating the number of times of winning displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and advance notice production are controlled.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a ``special pattern jackpot'', display a ``○'' pattern for a certain period after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is a ``special pattern omission'', display an ``x'' pattern after the fluctuation production is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the power-on varying image area 235b, and the power-on varying image is alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. , the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main pattern (third pattern), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Also, a right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above ten types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233i, and a rendering target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state and that the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a that are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big win state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. , the third pattern consisting of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also describes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 23).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image). This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50B). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2408 in FIG. 50(b) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 59(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 24) describing image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 50(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 24), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 50(b)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 50B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 25 to 39. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed as well as the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). After that, start winning processing associated with winning (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is opened as the ball passes through. A gate passage process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed to start the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variation time has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LED in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on. In addition, when the jackpot B is obtained, a red LED is lit, and when the winning is a loss, a green LED is lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario for a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening (first open opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won). , and in 12 rounds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to open in a pattern (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the jackpot type. When the processing of S218 is completed, a notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and this processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) Yes) (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol big hit" or "special symbol omission" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , stop type selection counter C3, and stop type counter CN1 (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is won is acquired from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers defined in the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have a common determination value for a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 Different random values may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of determination values for the big hit, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 , the number of judgment values that result in a big hit may be varied. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability game state) with special symbols, Based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. One of "200" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes). , sets the display mode at the time of the big win indicating the big win (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot It is determined what the jackpot type is among A and jackpot B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of symbol variations such as normal reach and super reach is determined. As described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

Variation patterns defined in this variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, variation patterns for deviation, such as "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", "loss normal reach", " Outgoing Super Reach” and “Outgoing Special Reach” are stipulated. In addition, as a variation pattern for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "common normal reach", "common super reach", and "common special reach" are specified, and as a variation pattern for jackpot B, various types of "special reach" are specified. As fluctuation patterns for common wins and losses, various "common normal reach" types, "common super reach" types, and "common special reach" types are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 34). sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a starting prize, various random number counters are acquired, and processing for holding the value is executed.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is changed. , Stores in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, in each process of S407-S412, the same process as each process of S401-S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. FIG. Each of the processes of S407 to S412 is different only in that the process of holding the held ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are the same as those of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the processes of S407 to S412 are finished, the prefetch process is executed (S413), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, the prefetching process (S413) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 28).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501), and either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is If there is no new win (S501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning prize at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether the game state at the time of start of fluctuation is the probability variable state of special symbols. If it is determined (S502), and if it is a probability variable state of special symbols (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probability variable state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. to move to. In the processing of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the judgment results of the big hit, are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608), and when it is determined that it is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: Yes), the present is a special symbol jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is in the middle (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state). That is, if it is easy to hit the normal pattern, the ball hit to the right will easily enter the second ball entrance 640, so it will be more likely to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. And the ball becomes difficult to reach. Therefore, during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the winning probability of normal symbols is prevented from increasing, and the balls are configured to easily reach the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. there is

In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 18(c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. Based on the second winning random number table for the time of probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S614: Yes), the present time is during the special symbol jackpot. (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible, when the normal symbol wins, as in the normal symbol low probability state, The number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with the normal symbols, so the second ball entrance. The opening period of the electric accessary 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is The time is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device. is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S622). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not passed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol lottery (this time lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Determine (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol win (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). In this initialization process, for example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S911).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S911, S912) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power restoration is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol probability variation state, whether or not the normal symbol time saving state, the number of times of normal symbol time saving, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the time saving counter 203r and the state of the probability variation flag 203g, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113. By outputting this status command, the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can recognize the same game status. Therefore, even though the special symbols are in a low probability state, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5(a)) is displayed, or conversely, the player is in a definite variable state of the special symbols. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of the hitting right warning image (see FIG. 5B) when the player hits right. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

When the processing of S914 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S915). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S916), and the main processing described later is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 28). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, Jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650 Processing is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is performed in accordance with the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state. and set closure. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first pattern display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) has ended, the first symbol display device 37 The variation display being executed is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27). Display (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "o" and the symbol "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30) ( display).

Next, based on the stored winning detection information, a winning information command setting process for notifying the winning information to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set by the winning information command setting process (S1008), the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a problem in the reservoir valve 607a. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the player is playing an irregular game (playing left-handed during the jackpot state, left-handed during the variable probability state of special symbols, etc.).

When the processing of S1008 is completed, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 32 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt process (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34). This is a process for opening or closing the opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102).

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

When the process of S1102 is finished, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and this process is finished. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the ball entering the storage device 600 can flow down the guide channel 607. A ball can now enter 602 (see FIG. 9(b)).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 in the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, during the special game state, in order to win a prize ball, the ball is launched aiming at the first specific winning hole (first large open hole) 65a or the second specific winning hole (second large open hole) 650a. A portion of the ball enters the storage device 600 . That is, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to winning balls based on balls entering the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, general winning provided in the storage device 600 A player can win a prize ball based on the ball entering the mouth (large value winning mouth) 602 . Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the start of the big win to the end of the big win can be increased, so that the player can play the game with more pleasure of winning the big win. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the variable probability state of special symbols or the time-saving state of normal symbols is provided. As described above, in these states, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the player tries to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right. (Trying to receive a lottery for special symbol 2). This often allows balls to flow into reservoir 600 before the start of the next big win. In states other than the special game state (jackpot state), the reservoir valve 607a is set to the closed state, so the balls are stored in the upper portion of the reservoir valve 607a until the next big win. Therefore, when the next big win occurs and the storage valve 607 a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 . That is, the player can win a large number (15) of prize balls immediately after the start of the big win. Therefore, in a situation where the player wins the jackpot but has run out of balls, the balls for the jackpot game can be secured without making a new request for lending balls.

In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1104: No), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S1104 that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1105). Then, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation for setting the operations of the first specific winning port 65a, the second specific winning port 650a, the channel switching valve 650d, etc. Setting processing is executed (S1105), and this processing ends.

Here, the big winning operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the 12th round of the jackpot is newly started (S1201). Either) (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, when it is determined that it is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a corresponding to the jackpot type is read (S1203). As a result, in the case of the big win A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16(a) is executed, and in the case of the big win B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16(b) is executed. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, the setting is made so that the guiding channel 652 is closed 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a read by the process of S1203 is set (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

In the process of S1206, which is executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 ends, a round number command indicating the round to be newly started is set (S1206), and this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description continues. In the processing of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611? It discriminates (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing in the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, when the 15th round, which is the final round of the jackpot, is completed, the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a is closed, and the first specific prize winning port (first large opening) 65a is closed. When the standby time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the interior of the has elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined by the process of S1108 that it is time to start the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1109), and this process ends.

Details of this ending process (S1110) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the content of this ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

When the process of S1301 is completed, the storage valve 607a, which was set to be open at the start of the big win, is then set to be closed (S1302). As described above, this closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big win. As a result, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), even if the ball is made to flow into the storage device 600, it is blocked by the storage valve 607a, so that the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. You will not be able to let the ball flow down. In other words, since the ball enters the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 with a small number of winning balls, the advantage of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), by always aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method that increases the number of balls released only by paying out the general winning prize port (large value winning prize port) 602 is fundamentally adopted. In a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the lottery of the special symbols is performed, so that the game can be played in anticipation of a big win.

As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three balls hit right-handed hits the ball. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three balls. In other words, even if right-handed hitting is executed in a normal state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for a special symbol, and the number of balls cannot be increased by payout based on the balls entering the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.例文帳に追加As a result, the advantage of hitting right in the normal state is eliminated, and the player can be made to play the game with the aim of winning a big prize by lottery of special symbols.

In addition, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), a part of the right-handed ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, so that the variable state of special symbols and normal symbols In the time saving state (that is, in a state where the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further increased by hitting to the right. can be made Therefore, even though the special symbols are in a variable state and the normal symbols are in a time-saving state, and the state has shifted to an advantageous state for the player, the number of balls held is steadily decreasing, and it is in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from not being able to realize it. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls held in the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols.

It should be noted that the number of prize balls for entering the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be reduced (for example, the number of prize balls may be reduced to one). As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the excessive increase in payouts and the increase in possession balls in the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages from being given to the hole. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), the advantage of hitting to the right can be further reduced.

When the process of S1302 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the variable probability setting flag 203h is on (S1303). Since it means that the ball has entered, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). As a result, after the end of the jackpot, the game shifts to the special symbol probability variation state. After the processing of S1304, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probability variation state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and this processing ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is off (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the variable probability entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. , in order to set the time period of 100 normal symbols after the end of the jackpot, 100 is set to the value of the time reduction medium counter 203r (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and this process is terminated. The status command set in the processing of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . By receiving the state command by the sound lamp control device 113, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect according to the game state.

Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON, and if it is ON, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. That is, regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the variable probability entrance 654, the timing at which the variable probability flag 203g is turned on can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to the variable probability game state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the ball can be entered into the probability variable entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the probability variable state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is completed. It is possible to draw attention to whether the ball enters the probability variable entrance 654 during the state).

Returning to FIG. 35, the description continues. In the processing of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the ball enters (wins) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, or Winning processing for monitoring the entry (winning) of the ball into the ball entrance 654 is executed (S1111). Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1111).

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not it is the period (round valid period) in which the round game is set (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is set until the interval period (3 seconds) ends. If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a ( S1402). In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403). , the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not entered either the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404. and migrate.

In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it is determined that it is during the ball-draining time for discharging the balls remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. can.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S1405). In the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes) The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by decrementing it by 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the variable probability entrance 654 (whether or not it has passed through a variable probability switch not shown) (S1410). ). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch (S1410: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), and the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), The process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the variable probability switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

In the processing of S1413 executed after the processing of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). On the other hand, in the process of S1413, if it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the guidance channel 652 is closed by turning off the channel solenoid 611 (S1414), The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and this processing ends. By setting the variable probability effective flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow path switching valve 650d is switched and the induction flow path 652 is closed, the ball remaining in the induction flow path 652 is turned on by the variable probability switch. , the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203o is ON (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203o is not ON (that is, OFF) (S1416: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203o is ON (S1416: Yes), the value of the variable probability effective timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1417). Then, the value of the probability variable valid timer 203p determines whether the upper limit (in this embodiment, 1.2 s) or not (S1418), if it is determined to be the upper limit (S1418: Yes), probability variable valid The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). Thereby, even if passage of the variable probability switch is detected, the value of the variable probability setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. As described above, if the variable probability switch is detected after the value of the variable probability valid timer 203p reaches the upper limit, there is a high possibility that the detection is due to some fraudulent act. Therefore, by turning off the variable probability valid flag 203o, updating of the variable probability setting flag 203h is prohibited, thereby suppressing fraud.

When the process of S1419 is completed, the value of the variable probability effective timer 203p is then reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420), and this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability effective timer 203p is not the upper limit (less than the upper limit) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

Thereby, if the variable probability effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch, so that the variable probability state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the time of throwing the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time during which it is determined that the passage of the variable probability switch is valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the variable probability switch and the variable probability state of the special symbol is given.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description continues. After the winning process (S1111) is executed, an abnormality process for detecting an abnormality occurring during the special game state (jackpot state) is executed (S1112), and the process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

In the abnormality process (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1501), and if it is determined that the round is not valid (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed through the ball outlet switches provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 Discriminate (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1504), and if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is OFF (S1504: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept away, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that counts the ball swabbing period. and update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after updating is the upper limit value (that is, whether or not 3 seconds have passed since the closing of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a was set). (S1506), and if it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached (three seconds have not passed) (S1506: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1505, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (total value of the probability variable passing counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) and , and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match (S1507).

In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winning prizes match (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of ejected balls does not match the number of winning prizes (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34). It is sent towards device 113 . When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an error signal is set to be output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent game balls remaining in the first variable prize winning device 65 and allowing the balls to pass through the variable probability switch.

In the processing of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1510). After that, the winning prize number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203q, and the variable probability passing counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and this process ends.

Next, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The prize winning information command setting process (S1008) is, as described above, a process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the passage of the ball into various prize winning openings (entering ball openings).

In the winning information command setting process, first, the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is read out (S1601). Then, it is determined whether or not there is new winning detection information (whether or not a new ball has entered into any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, if it is determined that new winning detection information exists (S1602: Yes), the entrance (winning opening) that detected the winning ball (winning) according to the new winning detection information (S1603). The winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each bit of the 2 bytes is associated with each winning port, out port, and the like. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning hole (entering ball hole) in which the ball has entered (winning a prize) is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning hole (entering ball hole) to which the ball has not entered is set to 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the processing of S1603 is completed, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and this processing is completed.

The prize winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the prize winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether there is a problem in the knowledge storage device 600 and whether the player is playing an irregular game, according to the winning information command. Then, when a problem or the like occurs, a display error command corresponding to the type of problem is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display error command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 notifies the error.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 41, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1816 (see FIG. 42) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), it executes power-off processing in S1816. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1816 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1702: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1816. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), it will transfer to S1704 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1816, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is executed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1816 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1709), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710), an interrupt Permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1710 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710). Next, the variable probability state flag 223f and the variable probability state counter 223g are updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1711), the interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the process proceeds to the main process. Transition. By updating the variable probability state flag 223f and the variable probability state counter 223g based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main controller 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect according to the game state.

The reason why the clearing process of S1709 is skipped is that when the process of S1708 is reached from S1704 via the process of S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1802 to S1810 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1811, and the variable display setting process of S1812 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1809, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1811). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the processing of S1812, variable display setting processing is executed (S1812). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off processing is executed (S1816). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1817), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1814: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1907). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is a special figure 1 pending ball number command or a special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value contained in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol), or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (number N2 of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1908). In addition, in the processing of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when a lottery for special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time the starting winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball are counted by the processing of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, if it is determined that the pending ball count command has not been received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1909). Then, when the state command is received (S1909: Yes), according to the gaming state notified by the state command, update the variable probability state flag 203f and the time saving state counter 203g (S1910), and end this process .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that the status command has not been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1911). When the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball was entered normally based on the winning information command, and an error is reported if there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. error notification processing is executed (S1912), and this processing ends.

on the other hand. In the processing of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1913), and if the opening command has been received ( S1913: Yes), while setting the jackpot middle flag 223h to ON, the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second is set to the value of the permissible time counter 223i (S1914). Then, an opening command for display is set (S1915), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display opening command is received, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for announcing the start of the big win.

If it is determined in the process of S1913 that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1916). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received by the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the flag 223h during the jackpot is set to OFF, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second to the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set (S1917), an ending command for display is set (S1918), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S1916, if the ending command has not been received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1919). ) and return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

Next, details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. This error notification process is, as described above, a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this error notification process (S1912).

In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is ON (S1931). contains winning information for the first ball entrance 64 (S1932). Then, if it is determined that the winning information for the first ball entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player hits left even though the jackpot is being won, and the first ball entrance 64 It means that the ball entered the ball against In other words, the player performs a game method (hitting method) that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a despite the special game state (jackpot state). means that the person is at a loss. Therefore, in order for the player to win the prize ball in the special game state (jackpot state), an error command for display corresponding to the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7(a)) is set (S1933) and processed. to S1934.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, a left-handed warning image (FIG. 7(a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this back image change command for display. With this left-handed warning image (FIG. 7(a)), it is possible to prompt the player who is playing left-handed in the special game state (jackpot state) to play right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money, and to ensure that the player wins the prize ball.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1932, if it is determined that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is performed. to S1934.

In the processing of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934). A hit time notification process for notifying when there is (S1935), and ends this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S1934: No), the ball sweeping period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is Since it means that it has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and the present process ends. That is, if a ball that has flowed into (progressed into) the guide channel 606 just before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the ball sweeping period, a problem will occur. to prevent being judged as

On the other hand, in the process of S1931, if it is determined that the jackpot medium flag 223h is not ON (is OFF) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936), When it is determined that it is 0 (S1936: Yes), it is notified when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a at normal time (either the probability variable state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the normal state) is executed (S1937), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is ejected after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the jackpot. Since it means that the period (1 second) has not passed, the process of S1937 is skipped and the present process ends. That is, when the ball that has flowed into (progressed into) the guide channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 during the ball sweeping period, a problem occurs. to prevent it from being judged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the winning notification process (S1935) for notifying when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big winning will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this winning notification process (S1935).

In the winning time notification process (S1935), first, the winning information command determined to have been received in the process of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not corresponding winning information is included (S1941). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state during the jackpot. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general prize winning port (small value prize winning port) 601 provided downstream of the guiding channel 606 . In other words, it is possible that the storage valve 607a is not opened due to failure of the storage valve 607a or the like, and as a result of the state in which the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the ball is guided to the guide flow path 606. have a nature. Therefore, in this case, an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

The ball that has flowed into the guide channel 606 may also enter the out port 603a provided on the left side of the general prize winning port 601 in the storage device 600. Regarding the corresponding prize winning information, it is not determined whether or not the storage valve 607a is malfunctioning. This is because, of the balls that have flowed into the guide channel 606, only a small proportion of the balls flow down to the out port 603a, and most of the balls enter the general prize winning port (small value prize winning port) 601, and also hit the jackpot. This is because a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600 inside, so if the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is monitored, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred. Further, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out hole 603a. , the processing load of the audio ramp controller 113 can be reduced.

In the processing of S1941, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command includes the general It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the ball entering the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 is determined. If the information is included (S1943: Yes), the value of the number-of-winning-awards counter 223j is updated by adding 1 (S1944). Then, in order to update the image during the big win in accordance with the updated value of the number-of-winning-awards counter 233j, a back image change command for display is set (S1945).

The display back image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . In the display control device 114, the display content of the number-of-wins display area MA in the third pattern display device 81 is updated by receiving this back image change command for display. More specifically, after an image in which the number of times a ball has entered the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 (the number of EXTRA BONUS) shown in FIG. The image shown in FIG. 6(a) corresponding to the subsequent number of times of ball entry is displayed. By displaying the number of times a ball enters the general winning hole (high-value winning hole) 602 in the big win in the winning times display area MA, the number of times the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a in the big win. Separately, the player can be made aware of the number of winning balls. Therefore, the game can be played with the expectation that the number of times a ball enters the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will increase. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, it is configured to determine that there is a problem in the storage valve 604a when ball entry information corresponding to a ball entering the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included. However, even if the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out port 603a, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, in order to notify when trouble occurs in the reservoir valve 607a at normal time (any of the special symbol probability variable state, the normal symbol time saving state, and the normal state) The normal notification processing will be described. In this normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined that it is not on (S1951), the current is not the probability variation state of the special symbol ( It means that it is a special symbol low probability state), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), the current state is neither the probability changing state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol (normal state). means.

In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player is hitting to the right and whether or not there is a malfunction in the operation of the reservoir valve 607a, first, the received winning information command includes a general winning opening (large value opening). It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entering the winning hole 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the reservoir valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or that the player has entered the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by an illegal method. Therefore, an error command for display corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

It should be noted that while the storage valve 607a is left open due to a malfunction, the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 607 is discharged from the out-ports 603b disposed on the left and right of the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602. , 603c, but the prize winning information corresponding to the balls entering the out ports 603b, 603c is not used as an object for determining whether or not there is a problem with the reservoir valve 607a. This is because, of the balls that flowed into the guiding channel 607, only a small proportion of the balls flow down to the out-ports 603b and 603c, and most of the balls enter the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602. , and the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 can sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred. In addition, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602, there is no need to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out holes 603b and 603c. Therefore, the processing load on the audio ramp controller 113 can be reduced.

Also, in the process of S1953, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entering the opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955). .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information command contains the winning information corresponding to the entry of the ball into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 (S1955: Yes), the normal time (variable state of special symbols, It means that the player is hitting to the right regardless of whether the time saving state of the normal symbol or the normal state). In other words, it means that the player is playing the game with a game method that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 and that there are few chances of receiving a special symbol lottery. Therefore, in this case, by displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)) for prompting the player to play the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by left-handed hitting, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the person from losing a loss and to receive the lottery of the special pattern 1. - 特許庁

In the process of S1951, if it is determined that the variable probability state flag 223f is ON (S1951: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 in the process of S1952 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (S1957). When it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1957, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not the special game state (jackpot state). Nevertheless, it means that the ball is flowing down the downstream side of the reservoir valve 607a. That is, there is a possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or that the player illegally enters the ball into the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 while the reservoir valve 607a is closed. high. Therefore, in this case, an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, it is configured to determine that there is a problem with the reservoir valve 604a when ball entry information corresponding to a ball entering the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 is included. However, even if the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the outlets 603b and 603c, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1812). This variable display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2001). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, OFF) (S2001: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2006. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2004). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2006: No), it means that no stop type command has been received from the main controller 110. Therefore, S2007 to S2013 Each process up to is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007). The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is for the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a stop type (S2008). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2009). In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

When the process of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No). No), the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is greater than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time saving state counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after subtraction is 0 (S2012), and if it is determined to be 0 (S2012), the normal state of the time saving state of the normal design (low probability state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

On the other hand, in the process of S2012, if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal design continues, so the back corresponding to the time saving state of the normal design No need to change the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2014.

In addition, the rear image displayed during the time-saving state is specifically a rear image on which right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot ends, the back type is switched to the right-handed navigation display regardless of the jackpot type. Then, when the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends, the back image is switched to the normal state back image in which the right-hand navigation is not displayed. It should be noted that, if the special pattern is in a variable state after the end of the jackpot, the special pattern will continue to be in a variable state until the next jackpot, so the right-handed navigation will be displayed from the back type.

In the processing of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is greater than 0 (S2014). Subtract and update (S2015), and terminate this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and the process ends. Through the processing of S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

In the present embodiment, the back surface type set in the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol are set in common, but different back surface types may be displayed. As a result, a wide variety of performances can be realized. Further, the remaining time period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the time reduction state counter 203g. This allows the player to easily recognize the short remaining time.

In this embodiment, the permissible time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to update during processing (sound editing/output processing, liquid crystal presentation execution management processing, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 42). Thereby, the permissible time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2101) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2202, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2202, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2101 in FIG. 48) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a at step S2201. and the processing of S2202 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2103, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2104, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 50(b) S2408) and simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 50(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2105, interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50(a). FIG. 50(a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50(b). FIG. 50(b) is a flow chart showing this V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 50(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401). If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S2402) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is transferred. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2404). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2403) or the simple display setting processing (S2409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2404), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2405). 24, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (loss, chance) are compared with each other, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2404.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, the details of the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2503).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2504), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2505) and returns to the processing of S2501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 52(a). FIG. 52(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2601).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2601 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2603, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2605, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2604 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2506), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the stop type command process (S2507) will now be described with reference to FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(b) is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S2701), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S2702).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S2703), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S2702. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S2703, and the specified The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2701, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2702.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. In the processing of S2506, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and If there is an opening command (S2508: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the opening command processing (S2509) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device 81 ends the variation display of the jackpot. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When the game ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description is continued. In the process of S2508, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S2510), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S2510: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the round number command process (S2511) will now be described with reference to FIG. 53(b). FIG. 53(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. This number-of-rounds command process is for executing a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S2902).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2510, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2512). If there is an ending command (S2512: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the ending command process (S2513) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timer counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S2512, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the back image change command process (S2515) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image corresponding to the other back image type is turned on. The determination flag is set to OFF (S3102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set by the processing in S3102 is used. , specifying the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2514, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). Otherwise (S2516: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the error command processing (S2517) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2518), and the process returns to S2501.

In the process of S2501, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes ), the processing of S2502 to S2518 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2501 to S2518 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 52(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S2601, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing executed first, the processing of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3302), S3303-S3304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S3401).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304), or if it is determined in the process of S3303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S3303: No), then the process proceeds to S3305.

In S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3503). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S3505), the present process is terminated, and the display is displayed. Return to setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3506 ), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. Since the drawing contents are always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) forming the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S3306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S3309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is ON (S3309: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S3310), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2404), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the previous stop design determination flag set by the processing of S3315, to specify the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before , the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S3309: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is ON (S3316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is transferred to the display data table buffer. 233d (S3317), and then by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing content so that is displayed.

In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image has ended. A process of setting a display data table that defines to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the details of the transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 59(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S3602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S3601, that is, if it is turned off (S3601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 59(b). FIG. 59B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3701). ), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3702). In the process of S3702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3702 that the transfer process has not ended (S3702: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to S3703. Also, as a result of the process of S3701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S3703, if all the resident image data have been transferred (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent image data transfer from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Also, in the processing of S3802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S3802: No), the processing of S3803 and S3804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3806).

In the process of S3806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3806 that the transfer process has not ended (S3806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Also, as a result of the process of S3805, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3805: No), the process proceeds to S3807.

In the processing of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S3807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the back image determination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) The start address is obtained (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

In the processing of S3813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S3813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3813 (S3813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S3814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the drawing process (S2406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2404) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3901). That is, in the processing of S3901, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S3902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 50(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning holes (the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a) are opened in the special game state (jackpot state). ) are provided, and one of the winning openings is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Both of these two types of winning holes are configured as winning holes from which a large number (15) of prize balls are paid out by entering the balls. In addition, two types of winning openings (the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a) are both provided in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13. FIG. As a result, only by hitting the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (right hitting) during the special game state (big hit state), the ball can enter even if any of the winning holes is opened. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special game state (jackpot state) can be made less dependent on the skill of the player, so that even the player, who is a beginner, can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the paths (channels) provided on the right side of the game board 13, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning holes is arranged on the upstream side. This storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits to the right, a part of the hit ball can flow into the storage device 600. A plurality of channels are provided for the flow down. Specifically, the number of prize balls is compared with the guidance flow path 606 for causing the balls to flow down to the general prize winning port (small value prize winning port) 601 with a relatively small number of prize balls (the number of prize balls is 3). A guiding flow path 607 for causing balls to flow down to a general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with a large number of targets (15 prize balls) is provided. Since the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be varied according to the type of guiding flow path that flows down, when the balls flow into the storage device 600, the number of flow paths through which the balls flow down to the player is increased. Species can be interesting to observe.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the guide channel 607 for causing the balls to flow down to the general prize winning port (large value winning prize port) 602 with a relatively large number of prize balls (15 prize balls) can be stored. A valve 607 a is provided in the guide channel 607 . This storage valve 607a is set to an open state during a special game state (during a jackpot state), and is set to a closed state during other game states. In addition, each guide channel is arranged so that the game ball that has flowed into the storage device 600 basically flows more easily into the guide channel 607 than to the guide channel 606 (see FIG. 9 ( b) see). Therefore, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to winning a prize ball by entering the ball into the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a, A prize ball can be obtained by entering a ball into the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 provided. A storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a. , and storage device 600 can be entered. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big win state), so that the player's merit by winning a big win can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can play the game with more pleasure in winning a big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a win is possible, and when the result of the lottery is a winning lottery result, a specific prize-winning slot is opened, and a player enters the specific prize-winning slot. There is one that provides a large amount of prize balls based on the ball hitting the ball (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177). In this conventional type gaming machine, a plurality of winning openings are provided in addition to the specific winning opening. There is one that is configured so that a ball that is aimed and launched can enter either a specific winning hole or another winning hole. Here, as one of the triggers is that a specific number of balls enter a specific winning opening, control is generally performed so that the specific winning opening is closed. The number of prize balls that the player can obtain in winning increases as the balls enter other prize openings before reaching a specific number. Therefore, by arranging a specific winning hole and another winning hole adjacent to each other, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls in a win, thereby further improving the player's expectation for a win.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even in situations other than winning, there are cases where an irregular game method is carried out in which a prize ball is obtained by hitting a ball aimed at another prize winning hole adjacent to a specific winning hole. rice field.

On the other hand, in states other than the special game state (jackpot state), the guide channel 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, one ball can be stored in the space formed by the upper portion of the storage valve 607a and the upstream portion of the guide channel 607. , is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the ball flows into the storage device 600 in a state where the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the ball collides with the stored ball and changes the direction of flow. and flow down easily (see FIG. 9(b)). Therefore, even if a ball enters the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), the ball is likely to enter the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 with few winning balls. Therefore, the advantage of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, the irregular game method that increases the number of balls put out only by paying out the general winning prize port (large value winning prize port) 602 is fundamentally impossible, In a state other than a game state (big win state), a game can be played in anticipation of a big win by performing a lottery of special symbols.

It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three balls hit right-handed hits the ball. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three balls. In other words, even if the player hits to the right in a game state other than the special game state (jackpot state), the lottery for the special symbol is difficult to perform, and the payout based on the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. You cannot increase the number of spheres by . As a result, the advantage of hitting right in the normal state is eliminated, and the player can be made to play the game with the aim of winning a big prize by lottery of special symbols.

In the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the guiding channel 606 enters the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601, and the ball that has flowed down the guiding channel 607 enters the general ball entering hole 602. However, it is not limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of each induction path, a known crew means having a plurality of winning holes is provided, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning hole into which the ball enters. good too. As a result, even if the guide channel 606 is flowed down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by making the ball enter a prize-winning opening where a relatively large number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, the player can watch with interest until the ball entering the storage device 600 enters one of the winning holes. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the guide channel 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that the balls can be stored in the guide channel 607. It may be configured to store balls on the way of 607 . That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction path 607, and is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special game state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the spheres that first flowed into the guide channel 607 can be attracted to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the downflow of the spheres can be stopped (the spheres can be stored at the position of the electromagnets). By configuring in this way, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. In this case, the width of the guide channel 607 is increased (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the reservoir valve 607a are removed), Electromagnets may be embedded only in the portion immediately below, and a general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 may be provided directly below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Furthermore, when there is a sphere that has been attracted by an electromagnet and has stopped flowing, the stopped sphere and other spheres come into contact with the electromagnet portion and the flow direction is changed, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. It may be configured to flow down in a direction different from that of the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 . A general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be provided below a portion of the guiding channel 607 in which the electromagnet is not embedded. As a result, the branching member 604 can be eliminated, so the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

Also, in the present embodiment, one ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, but this is not a limitation, and two or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, when storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the vertical direction, or may be configured so that they can be stored side by side.

In the present embodiment, the balls are configured to be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a reservoir valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide channel 607 so that balls cannot flow into the guide channel 607 when the reservoir valve 607a is closed. By adopting a configuration in which balls are not stored, even if the ball is hit to the right in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), the ball can be ejected without remaining inside the storage device 600. - 特許庁

In particular, in the above-described first embodiment, the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to be opened in a high-probability state of special symbols that are given after the end of the jackpot or in a time-saving state of normal symbols. In addition, in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the start winning to the second entrance 640), compared to the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the start winning to the first entrance 64), the game It is easy to become a jackpot B that is advantageous to the person. Therefore, when the player finishes winning the jackpot, the player hits the ball to the right to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 . Therefore, for example, when the time period of the normal symbol ends, the balls are stored in the storage device 600 with a high probability. As a result, the player may feel that the ball has been lost. On the other hand, by providing a storage valve 607a at the upper end of the guide flow path 607 so as not to store the balls in the storage device 600, it is possible to make the player feel that the balls have been used up without waste. . Therefore, it is possible to give satisfaction to the player.

In the present embodiment, the storage device 600 is provided with the general winning openings (small-value winning openings) 601 and 602 and the out-openings 603a to 603c, but the invention is not limited to this construction. For example, the second ball entry hole 640 may be arranged at the position where the general prize entry (high value prize entry) 602 is provided. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the second ball entrance 640 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 is moved inside the storage device 600. may Further, in this case, as an opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is configured to be opened when the lottery of the special symbols is executed 1000 times without becoming a big win after the big win. may

As a result, when the lottery for the special symbol is executed 1000 times after the end of the big win, the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, so the special symbol 2. lottery can be executed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is five. It is sufficient to configure so as to be That is, the number of balls that can enter the storage device 600 when hit to the right is 1 out of 3 balls. A ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one ball in every three balls. That is, the lottery for the special pattern 2 can be received while maintaining the possession ball. By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol lottery is repeated without a big hit (so-called big hooking occurs), the game is played with the expectation that the storage valve 607a will be opened. can be done. Therefore, even if the period during which a big win does not occur becomes longer, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. By increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 10), the ball can be ejected simply by hitting the ball to the right after the storage valve 607a is opened. It may be configured to increase. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the merit when the special symbol lottery is out of the lottery continuously 1000 times or more. Therefore, after the end of the big hit, it is hoped that it will be a big hit again with a small number of lotteries of special patterns, and if it continues to lose the lottery of special patterns, it will continue to lose the lottery of special patterns more than 1000 times in a row. I can make you wish. Furthermore, after the storage valve 607a is opened, the number of balls increases just by hitting to the right. It can make you want the condition to continue increasing for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of special pattern lotteries, the player can be made to wish for a big hit of the special pattern or wish to keep losing the special pattern lottery, so that the player can be provided with novel game characteristics. can be done.

In this embodiment, the storage device 600 is configured to have only one storage valve 604a, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the induction channel 606 may be configured to branch into two directions, and a reservoir valve that is opened only during the special game state (during the jackpot state) may be provided in one of the channels. That is, a configuration similar to that of the guide channels 606 and 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided downstream of the guide channel 606 . Then, downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, a general winning hole with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided, and the flow path without the storage valve has a small number of prize balls (for example, , 3) general prize openings may be provided. By configuring in this way, a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, so a special game state (jackpot state) is started, and each storage valve is opened, thereby storing It is possible to make the balls that have been thrown all at once flow down to a general winning hole with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15). Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big win can be increased. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600 , a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 . Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big win, as in the case of providing a plurality of storage valves.

In this embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640, and a first variable winning device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. 65 is provided, and the second variable prize winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable prize winning device 65, but the arrangement is not limited to this arrangement and may be any arrangement. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged upstream of the second ball entrance 640 . In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special game state (jackpot state), the ball launched to enter the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650 first enters the second ball entering hole. 640, it may become difficult to enter the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a, but the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a may be difficult to enter. By arranging it on the upstream side, prize balls can be obtained more smoothly during the special game state (during the big win state).

Further, by arranging the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a on the upstream side, by arranging it on the upstream side of the storage device 600, during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the storage device It is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which a ball enters at about 600 and becomes difficult to reach the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a. Therefore, each round during the special game state (during the jackpot state) can be progressed more smoothly.

In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second specific ball entrance 640 are provided as entrances that trigger the special symbol lottery, but either one may be eliminated. For example, the configuration may be such that the second ball entrance 640 is eliminated and the electric accessory 640 is provided for the first ball entrance 64 . As a result, the advantage of hitting the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state) is reduced. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the typical game method.

In this embodiment, in the special game state (jackpot state), when a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 600, the ball enters the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 where many winning balls are paid out. In addition to this, in one special game state (jackpot state), the number of balls entering the general ball entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to As a result, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to winning prize balls by winning the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a, it is possible to obtain extra prize balls. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game has been completed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player want to enter more balls into the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602, it is possible to set a target for the number of entering balls. It should be noted that the number of winnings to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily have to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be provided separately. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the big win state can be executed in a wider display area.

In this embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out based on the entry (winning) of the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a, and the number of winning balls into the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls paid out based on the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls entering (winning) the general prize opening (large value prize winning opening) 602 is all the same number (15). , but not limited to these. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 is divided into the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a. may be configured to be less than the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of winning balls (for example, 10). As a result, even if the ball only flows into the storage device 600 as a result of the ball traveling in a special game state (jackpot state), the disadvantage to the hole can be reduced.

Contrary to the above, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry (winning) of a ball into the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is determined by the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 65a. It may be configured to be larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) the prize opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering (winning) the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a is set to 10, and a general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters (wins a prize) into 602 may be fifteen. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit that the player can receive by allowing the balls to flow into the storage device 600 in the special game state (jackpot state), so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be further enhanced. can.

In this embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened for a shorter period than in the present embodiment, or may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times in a big win. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between the rounds of the jackpot, and closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period during which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls paid out in one big win from becoming too large. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls paid out to the player from being varied in one big win, so that the sales of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily predicted. In addition, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, a A portion of the spheres reaching downstream in the path (channel) can flow into the storage device 600 . In other words, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general prize winning opening 602 even during the interval period. Therefore, balls are less likely to be wasted even during the interval period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the ending effect of the big win, but it may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. As a result, part of the balls remaining on the board can flow into the storage device 600 at the start of the ending effect. In other words, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general prize winning opening 602 during the ending effect. Therefore, balls are less likely to be wasted during the ending effect. Furthermore, the storage valve 607a is kept open until a certain period of time (eg, 5 seconds) has passed since the ending production ended, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a certain period of time (eg, 5 seconds) has passed. It may be configured to switch between states. As a result, part of the balls remaining on the board can flow into the storage device 600 at the end of the ending effect. In other words, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general prize winning opening 602 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls from being wasted after the end of the ending effect.

In addition, when a game state different from the special game state (jackpot state) is set, the reservoir valve 607a is opened, and when the set game state is changed to another game state, the reservoir valve 607a may be closed. For example, it may be configured to open the storage valve 607a during the period in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. As a result, in the probability variable state of the special pattern, while receiving the lottery of the special pattern 2 that tends to be a big hit B by hitting to the right, the ball is sent to the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. can be entered. Therefore, the variable probability state of the special symbols can be made more advantageous to the player. Moreover, when the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened. Basically, the time-saving state of normal symbols is a state in which there are few merits for the player compared to the variable probability state of special symbols, but it should be configured so that the storage valve 607a is opened during the time-saving state of normal symbols. , it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time saving state of the normal pattern is reached.

Further, instead of switching the state of the reservoir valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the reservoir valve 607a according to the game state or the like, the player can switch the reservoir valve 607a at any timing. It may be configured so that the state can be switched. As a result, each player can play the game with the state of the reservoir valve 607a according to his or her taste.

In this embodiment, the outlet is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the outlet, a prize winning outlet through which prize balls are dispensed may be provided. Also, the number of prize balls to be paid out may be varied by entering the balls into the respective prize winning openings. More specifically, for example, instead of the out port 603a, a prize winning port with six prize balls is provided, in place of the out port 603b, a prize winning port with ten prize balls is provided, and in place of the out port 603c, a prize winning port is provided. may provide 12 winning openings. As a result, it is possible to more interestingly observe when the ball flows down the guiding channel 606 and to which winning opening the ball enters the guiding channel 607 . Also, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 so that the winning opening into which the ball enters is more random. . As a result, when the ball has flowed into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the ball until the ball enters one of the winning holes. In addition, by providing a nail or the like, a hall clerk can set a ball entrance into which the ball can easily enter. Therefore, the ball output rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

In this embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 may control the reservoir valve 607a. More specifically, reservoir solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to input/output port 225 of audio ramp controller 113 . Then, the reservoir valve 607a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when an opening command is received from the main controller 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when an ending command is received. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute without delay the selection process of the variable effect, the lottery process of the special symbols, etc., which are the main processes related to the game.

In this embodiment, the reservoir valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) in the special game state (jackpot state), and the reservoir valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in states other than the special game state (jackpot state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. Also, it may be configured to switch based on the result of a lottery performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to execute a lottery to determine whether to switch to the open state (released state) once per minute. good too. Moreover, when winning the lottery, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the lottery is won and the ball can be made to flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set to the open state (released state), the ball will enter the general prize winning port (large value winning prize port) 602. can be entered, the player can play the game expecting to win more lotteries. Furthermore, the lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the hall clerk or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Thus, when a player selects one machine for playing a game from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the machine having a good lottery probability can be predicted and the machine can be selected. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of habits, etc., when setting the lottery probability of the hole, the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of machine selection before starting the game. .

In the present embodiment, according to the type of jackpot, a jackpot (jack B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing at which the ball is likely to enter the variable probability entrance 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot (jackpot B) and a variable probability entrance. A jackpot (jackpot A) in which the second specific winning port 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the hole 654 is provided. It may be configured to suggest whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each round from the 1st round to the 11th round of the jackpot, an effect may be performed in which an ally of justice and a monster fight. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, a big win B is reported, and if the ally of justice is defeated, a big win A is reported. That is, when the ally of justice wins, the player can be made to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the result of the performance performed in the jackpot.

In addition, there are variations in the performance content, and the performance content that has a high degree of expectation that the allies of justice will win (easily selected in the case of jackpot B) and the high possibility that the allies of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot A) ) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice evades the enemy's attack, the expectation of victory will be high, and the attack of the ally of justice will miss, The player may be configured to increase the possibility of being defeated when the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, it is possible to predict not only the outcome of whether or not the ally of justice will win, but also the flow of presentation leading up to victory or defeat. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

Note that the content of the production performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned presentation of the battle between the ally of justice and the monster, and can suggest an advantageous jackpot B and a more disadvantageous jackpot A than the jackpot B. Any mode is acceptable. For example, the boy character 710 performs a treasure search effect, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured so that a jackpot B is reported, or the boy character 710 may It is also possible to display an effect of eating a lot, and to notify that the big win B is given when all the provided food is eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not installed in general gaming machines, an effect is provided to explain the game characteristics related to this storage device 600. You can More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions for opening the storage valve 607a, the merits when it is opened, and the demerits when the ball is hit to the right in the closed state. may be configured to display an image (description image) for explaining the This allows the player to easily understand the gameplay. Further, the type of the back surface on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the type of the back surface can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 . As a result, a player who is accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game characteristics can change the back face type to one in which the explanation image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), right-handed hitting is performed, and when it is detected that the ball has entered the storage device 600, a right-handed warning image (See FIG. 5(b)) is configured to be displayed, but it may be configured not to display the right-handed warning image under predetermined conditions. For example, if the player is hitting to the right while no balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the right-hand hitting warning image (FIG. 5(b)) is displayed until the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. ) may be configured not to be displayed. When the balls are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, the special symbols are hit later, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a. It is possible to immediately enter the ball stored in the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602. - 特許庁Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 can be used as the ball used in the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the player runs out of balls in spite of the big win, the big win game can be played without borrowing new balls.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is disposed inside the storage device 600 in the special game state (jackpot state). A prize ball can be obtained by entering a ball into a designated general prize winning hole (large value winning hole) 602.例文帳に追加In other words, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to the prize balls being paid out by entering the balls into the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a, the balls are moved to the storage device 600. It is configured such that prize balls are paid out by entering the balls. As a result, a large number of prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, in a state (normal game state) other than the special game state (jackpot state), by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a, the ball is configured such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and the balls can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. When there is a ball stored inside the storage device 600 in the normal game state, the stored ball can interfere (contact) with another ball that has newly flowed into the storage device 600. It was configured as Then, when interference (contact) with the stored balls occurs, the flowing direction of the newly flowed balls into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. (the direction of the induction channel 606). As a result, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning a prize in the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal game state, it is an irregular game that tries to increase the number of balls held without going through a big win. It was configured so that the game method would be fundamentally untenable.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Whether or not the ball is stored in the storage device 700 can be switched by the player's operation. In addition, when the ball is stored in the storage device 700, it is configured to provide two flow paths through which the ball can flow down. , so that spheres can flow into either channel.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, there are a winning opening into which balls are easily entered when the balls are not stored (a state in which the storage valve 704a is opened), and two flow paths in which the balls are stored in the storage valve 704a. The two types of winning holes respectively provided downstream of are constructed so that the number of awarded balls to be paid out is different. That is, there are two types of winning openings that can be won when balls are stored in the storage valve 704a. It is configured as follows. Also, the prize-winning opening in which the ball can win when the storage valve 704a is open is configured to be intermediate between the above two types of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state in which a ball can enter both a winning hole with a large number of prize balls and a winning hole with a small number of prize balls and a state in which an average payout can be stably received by flowing balls into the storage device 700. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch the playability when the ball is made to flow into the storage device 700 according to the player's preference, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, 2. The point that the variable winning device 650 is abolished, the point that the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and the release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed; the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp controller 113 is partially changed; A part of the process is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 62, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG. Further, the second variable winning device 650 provided in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 in the first embodiment is eliminated. The first specific prize winning opening (first large open opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all the rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special game state (jackpot state), it is configured so that the ball can be entered into the first specific winning hole (first large open hole) 65a by hitting to the left.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided in the path (channel) on the right side of the game board 13 . This storage device 700 has fewer nails around the entrance than the storage device 600 of the first embodiment, and the ratio of the balls that flow into the storage device 700 when hitting to the right is It is configured to be less than 600 (eg, 1 ball in 10). Details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the probability variable state of the special symbols or the time-saving state of the normal symbols (the period during which the player does not lose even if the player hits to the right). It is a diagram. FIG. 63(a) shows the display content when the release button 800 is not pressed (state in which the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63(b) shows the display when the release button 800 is pressed. It shows the display content in the state (state in which the storage valve 704a is open).

As shown in FIG. 63(a), when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 (see FIG. 5 ( (Refer to Ds2 of a)), the text "Press the button to open the gate!" is displayed. By displaying this character, the player can press the release button 800 (button) to open the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700. can be easily recognized. In addition, the display contents in the display areas other than the small area Ds2 are the same as the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment, so the detailed name description is omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the characters "gate open" are displayed in the small area Ds2. This makes it possible to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

Next, details of the storage device 700 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of a storage device 700 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide channel 707 for flowing down the spheres that have flowed in from the top thereof, and three channels are provided downstream of the guide channel 707. (the downstream of the induction channel 707 branches into three directions). Specifically, a guide channel 706 for causing the inflowing sphere to flow down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, a guide channel 704 for causing the sphere to flow downward when viewed from the front, and a guide channel 704 for causing the ball to flow downward in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. A guide channel 708 is provided for. As shown in FIG. 64, the peg 709a and the peg 709b are provided downstream of the guide channel 705, so that the ball is shifted to the right or to the left while flowing down the guide channel 705. However, by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the flowing direction of the ball can be corrected toward the center. Therefore, the spheres that have flowed down the guide channel 705 tend to flow into the guide channel 704 provided on the downstream center side of the guide channel 705 .

Downstream of the guide channel 706, there is provided a general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 702 with a relatively large number of awarded balls (for example, 6). In addition, downstream of the induction path 704, there is a general prize winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 in which the number of awarded balls to be paid out is smaller than that of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (for example, three). is provided. Furthermore, as the ball entry openings other than the general prize winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, there are outlet openings 703a to 703e from which prize balls are not paid out even if a ball enters the ball. is provided. Then, the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 708 enters the out port (small value winning port) 703d or the out port (small value winning port) 703e, so when the ball flows down the guide channel 708 In addition, there is no merit for the player at all. A ball that has flowed down the guiding channel 706 but has not entered the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. be done. Also, a ball that has flowed down the guiding channel 704 but has not entered the general prize winning port (middle value prize winning port) 701 is ejected to the outside by entering the out port 703b or the out port 703c. be done. These out ports 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the balls from accumulating below the storage device 700 even if the balls move irregularly due to vibration or the like, and discharge the balls reliably. can be done.

The guide channel 704 is provided with a reservoir valve 704a. Similar to the reservoir valve 607a in the first embodiment, the reservoir valve 704a, by closing the guide channel 704, stores one ball, which has flowed into the reservoir device 700 after the closure, in the upper part of the reservoir valve 704a. be able to. Unlike the reservoir valve 607a in the first embodiment, the reservoir valve 704a is configured so that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the player's operation of the release button 800 (see FIG. 67). It is When the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the flowing direction is changed by the impact caused by the interference (contact) between the ball flowing into the storage device 700 and the stored ball. This change (switching) of the flow direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the trajectory (downward direction) of a ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 and flows down while the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65(a), a description will be given of a case where a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere is repulsed leftward in front view due to the impact of the interference.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and is repelled leftward in front view, The spheres flow into the guide channel 706 and down the guide channel 706 . Here, since a general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction path 706, a relatively large amount of balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. (For example, 6) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the ball rebounds to the right, it is to the player's advantage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65(b), a case will be described in which a sphere that has interfered (contacted) with a stored sphere is repulsed to the right in front view due to the impact of the interference. As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and is repelled rightward in front view, The spheres enter the guide channel 708 and flow down the guide channel 708 . Here, since the out-ports (small value prize-winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guiding channel 708, the ball enters either one of the out-ports. In other words, if the ball rebounds to the right side in front view, the prize ball is not paid out, so there is no merit for the player.

In this way, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 repels. Therefore, when a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700, it is expected that the ball will repel leftward in front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. You can play games. That is, it is possible to more interestingly confirm the flowing direction (repulsive direction) of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the direction in which the ball is likely to repel changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle at which the ball enters the storage device 700, and the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball is likely to repel the guide channel 706 for the player. You can devise how to hit so that it becomes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing a game, the pachinko machine 10 which allows the balls to easily enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is selected by considering the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b. can be done. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of searching for the pachinko machine 10 that seems to be advantageous to him/herself.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the operation when a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is set to the open state will be described. As the spheres enter reservoir 700 , they first flow down guiding channel 705 . On the downstream side of the guide channel 705, a nail 709a and a nail 709b are provided on the left and right (see FIG. 66). However, by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the flowing direction of the ball can be corrected toward the center. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide channel 705 flows into the guide channel 704 provided downstream of the guide channel 705 on the center side.

When the storage valve 704a is open, the ball can flow down the guide channel 704, so the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 704 will flow down the guide channel 704 and enter the general winning opening (middle Enter the ball into the value winning opening) 701. As a result, a smaller number (for example, three) of prize balls than the number of prize balls entered into the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is paid out.

Thus, in the state where the storage valve 704 a is open, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 . That is, the flow direction is not changed due to the repulsion and the water does not flow into the guide channel 706 or the guide channel 708 . That is, the ball cannot be entered into the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 from which a large number of winning balls can be obtained, but the ball enters the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e. There is no possibility that the prize ball will not be obtained. Therefore, when a ball is entered into the storage device 700, a prize ball can be obtained stably, so that the player can have a sense of security.

Further, in this embodiment, the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), so that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in a closed state, there is a possibility that the ball will enter any of the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 702 and the out openings (small value winning prize openings) 703d and 703e. It can be a state (highly gambling state where there is a possibility that many prize balls can be obtained, but there is also a possibility that prize balls cannot be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stably It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player, so that each player can select the game characteristics that suit his/her taste. You can play the game by

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. The electrical configuration of the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the first embodiment in that the content of the first hit random number table 202b in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is the same. , the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp controller 113 is partially changed. They are different in that respect. Other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 67, release button 800 is electrically connected to input/output port 205 . The release button 800 is arranged at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) where the player can arbitrarily press (operate) it. When the player presses (operates) the release button 800 , a signal (press detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that the press has been detected is output to the input/output port 205 . The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the retention device solenoid 610 to open the retention valve 704a based on this depression detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on.

Next, the first win type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). This first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each jackpot type. That is, unlike the first embodiment, regardless of whether the special symbol 1 lottery results in a big hit or the special symbol 2 lottery results in a big hit, the same value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same. A jackpot type is associated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with the jackpot C (FIG. 68(a) ) at 202b1). Incidentally, this jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. In addition, after the jackpot C is completed, a time-saving state of normal symbols is provided as an added value (shift to a low-probability state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols). Further, the time-saving state of the normal symbols provided after the end of the jackpot C continues until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times.

On the other hand, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot D (see 202b2 in FIG. 68(a)). This jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the jackpot D is finished, a special symbol definite variable state of the special symbol is provided as an added value (shift to a special symbol definite variable state). In addition, the probability variation state of the special symbols given after the end of the big win D continues until the next big win.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the big win is predetermined according to the type of the big win won. That is, a more general configuration than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is adopted. In connection with this, in 2nd Embodiment, the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table 202b is changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68(b), the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 68(b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment includes a variable probability setting flag 203h, a variable probability passage counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball, which were provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the variable probability effective flag 203o, the variable probability effective timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in relation to determining whether or not the second specific winning device 650 should shift to the variable probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the game state to be set in advance at the end of the jackpot is determined, and during the special game state (during the jackpot state), it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. Since no determination is made, there is no need to use each of the above configurations in this embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a release flag 203s. This release flag 203s indicates whether the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (whether or not the state in which balls can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is released). or). The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to OFF (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

Next, referring back to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 of the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment is abolished, and a storage state flag 223k and a flow time counter 223k are added. there is

The storage state flag 223k is a flag that indicates whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed and the balls can be stored in the upper portion thereof. On the other hand, if the storage state flag 223k is off, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state, and the ball can flow down the guide channel 704. FIG. This storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command each time a storage state command is received from main controller 110 (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The sound lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the reservoir valve 704a based on the reservoir state flag 223k, and determines whether or not the reservoir valve 704a is abnormal.

The flow-down time counter 223k determines whether the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 704, the guide channel 706, or the guide channel 708 just before switching the state of the storage valve 704a It is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out mouth 703d, or the out mouth 703e (ball throwing time). By counting the ball throwing period, the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (low value winning opening) 703d When a ball enters the winning hole) 703e, it can be determined more accurately whether the ball entering is a normal operation. This flowing time counter 233k is set to a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time a storage state command is received from main controller 110 (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Also, it is decremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this embodiment, in the state where the reservoir valve 704a is closed, the ball enters the general prize winning port (middle value prize winning port) 701 provided downstream of the reservoir valve 704a, or the reservoir valve 704a is opened. In this state, when the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e, a warning image (Fig. 7 ( b) is configured so that cf. However, if the ball flows into the guide flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball will enter the general winning opening (medium value) after the storage valve 704a switches to the closed state. Winning hole) 701 may be entered. Similarly, if a ball flows into the guide channel 706 or the guide channel 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball generally flows after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. The ball may enter the winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as normal entries (not to display a warning image), in this embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the flow-down time counter 233k is set for a predetermined period (1 second). Sets the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, the ball is placed in the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or It is configured to determine that the operation is normal (no warning image is displayed) when the ball is entered into the out hole (small value prize winning hole) 703e.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. In this embodiment, the contents of the main process (see FIG. 69) are changed from those of the first embodiment. Only the various processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) will be described below, and detailed descriptions of other processes that are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 69, main processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this main process. As in the first embodiment, the main processing of the game is executed in this main processing.

In the main processing (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment is replaced with the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35), and the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 70) is executed. Another difference is that after the second symbol display update process (S1007) ends, the storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is executed. Another difference is that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state (jackpot state), execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the 1 specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

In each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of this jackpot control process 2 (S1021), S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, the process of S1103 in the first embodiment (the process of setting the opening of the storage valve) is abolished. In the second embodiment, since the reservoir valve 704a is set to the open state based on the operation of the release button 800 by the player, the state of the reservoir valve 704a regardless of whether it is a special game state (jackpot state) This is because the

Also, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round by the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a A release is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is met (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or when the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls wins after opening, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the condition for closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is established (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed. It closes (S1124) and terminates this process. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a are not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds of the special game state (jackpot state) are completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1109, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), first, an ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

When the processing of S1125 ends, it is then determined whether or not the current big win is a big win D (probability variable big win) (S1126). No), 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203r (S1127), and this process is terminated. By setting 100 to the time-saving counter 203r, it is possible to shorten the time for the normal design until the lottery for the special design is completed 100 times after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S1126, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probability variation jackpot), set the probability variation flag 203g to ON in order to give the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot ( S1128), and the process ends. Also, in the process of S1109, if it is not the timing to start the ending (S1109: No), this process ends. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment.

By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening is provided during the jackpot. , The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine (that is, a more general pachinko machine) in which the state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type.

Next, the storage control process (S1022) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this storage control process (S1022). This retention control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the retention valve 704a, as described above.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001). This means that the state in which the ball can be stored has been released), and it is then determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal has been detected.

In the process of S4002, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4002: Yes), in order to keep the reservoir valve 704a open, This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (that is, the depression detection signal has not been detected) (S4002: No), the reservoir valve 704a is closed. Solenoid 610 is set to OFF (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the closing of the storage valve 704a has been set, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is closed. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this processing ends.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear face type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the small area Ds2 is set to display the characters "Press the button to open the gate!". As a result, the player can easily recognize that the retention valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state in which balls can be stored in the storage device 700 is set). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the player is pressing (operating) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal has been detected.

In the processing of S4006, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has not been detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the storage valve 704a has been set, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the open state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this processing ends.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the released state, it outputs to the display control device 114 a display back image change command for setting the back face type corresponding to the released state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the small area Ds2 is set to display the characters "gate open". This allows the player to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

By executing this storage control process, the opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set according to the operation status of the release button 800. FIG. As a result, at any timing of the player, by storing the balls in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, either the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (low value winning opening) 703d, 703e It is possible to switch between a state in which a crab ball enters and a state in which a ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 flows down toward a general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 .

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. FIG. In this embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. Only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described below, and detailed description of other processes that are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (1811) in this embodiment. In this command determination process, the processes of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 are the same as the processes of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. each is executed.

In addition, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in this embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a malfunction such as a failure in the reservoir valve 704a. Then, warning processing is executed to issue a warning when a problem occurs (S1921), and this processing ends.

Further, in the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in this embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1916 that the ending command has not been received (S1916: No), it is then determined whether or not the storage state command has been received. It is determined (S1922). When it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF. In addition, when the storage state flag 223k is updated, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is also set by setting the back image (see FIGS. 63(a) and (b)) corresponding to the storage state after updating. Update content.

When the processing of S1923 is completed, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the flow time counter 223l (S1924), and this processing is completed. By using the ball sweeping time set for the flow-down time counter 223l, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a problem in the storage valve 704a. If it is determined in the process of S1922 that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process proceeds to S1919.

Thus, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in this embodiment, the state of the reservoir valve 704a is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the release state command and the closed state command from the main control device 110. A command can be set to the display controller 114 to enable the display. This allows the player to easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This warning process (S1921) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not there is a problem such as a failure in the reservoir valve 704a and issuing a warning when a problem occurs.

In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101). It is determined whether or not (S4102). If it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the retention valve 704a is set to the closed state (retention state) and the ball sweeping period has elapsed. Therefore, when the storage valve 704a is in the closed state (storage state), the storage time notification process is executed to notify the failure (S4103), and the process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4102 that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S4102: No), it means that the ball is now being swept away due to the closed state of the storage valve 704a. Therefore, the processing of S4103 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Here, the details of the above-described retention time notification processing (S4103) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the winning ball into the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 (S4201), If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down downstream of the storage valve 704 a and enters the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 . In other words, this means that the retention valve 704a is not normally closed even though the retention valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the retention valve 704a is set (S4202). , the process ends.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7(b)), it is possible to easily make the player or hall staff aware of the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be resolved quickly.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description continues. In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not ON (that is, OFF) (S4101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104), If it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4104: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) and the ball sweeping period has elapsed. Therefore, in the open state (released state) of the storage valve 704a, the release time notification process for notifying the trouble is executed (S4105), and this process ends. This cancellation notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the cancellation notification process (S4105). In this cancellation notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301). , the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command is output. Determining whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entering the openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is included (S4302), and corresponding to the ball entering the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e. If the winning information is not included (S4302: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out holes (small value winning holes) 703d and 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303. If the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e In the process of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the winning ball is included (S4302: Yes), an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this process is executed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 flows down the guide flow path 704, so the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out The reason why the ball enters the openings (small-value winning openings) 703d and 703e is that there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is malfunctioning in the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7(b)), it is possible to easily make the player or hall clerk aware of the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be eliminated quickly.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 700 capable of storing balls therein. This storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (guiding flow paths 704, 706, 708) inside thereof, and is configured so that balls can flow down to different ball entrances. Further, the guiding channel 704 is provided with a reservoir valve 704a capable of closing the channel. When the guide channel 704 is closed by the reservoir valve 704a, one ball can be reserved (held) in the upper portion thereof.

Also, when the storage valve 704a is open, the spheres flowing into the storage device 700 flow down the guide channel 704. Since it is configured so that the ball can easily flow in), the ball can be entered into the general prize winning port (medium value prize winning port) 701 provided downstream of the guiding channel 704 . Therefore, by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 700 , it is possible to stably receive the payout of prize balls based on the balls entering the general prize winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 .

On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the balls are stored in the upper part thereof, the balls flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with the stored balls. Or repel in either direction of the guiding channel 708 . That is, by changing the flow direction due to repulsion, either a general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 from which a large number of prize balls are paid out, or an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d or 703e from which no prize balls are paid out. Enter the ball into the crab. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 .

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball hit onto a game board. Among these conventional gaming machines, there is one in which a reserved ball can be released onto the game board by the player's operation, and the ball can enter a predetermined winning hole provided in the direction of movement ( For example, JP-A-2003-190443).

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's interest because the balls released from the holding device are simply allowed to enter a predetermined winning hole.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in a closed state, there is a possibility that the ball will enter any of the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 702 and the out openings (small value winning prize openings) 703d and 703e. It can be a state (highly gambling state where there is a possibility that many prize balls can be obtained, but there is also a possibility that prize balls cannot be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stably It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player, so that each player can select the game characteristics that suit his/her taste. You can play the game by Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched by the release button 800 at any timing of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. As a result, each player can start playing a game while the storage valve 704a is in a state that matches his or her taste. Also, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to execute a lottery to determine whether to switch to the open state (released state) once per minute. may

Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, when the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easier for the ball to enter the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e with the storage valve 704a closed, the ball is stored by lottery. The game can be played with the expectation that the valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, if the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easier for the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 with the storage valve 704a closed, the lottery continues to fail. The game can be played with the expectation that the reservoir valve 704a will continue to be closed. Furthermore, the lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the hall clerk or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Thus, when a player selects one machine for playing a game from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the machine having a good lottery probability can be predicted and the machine can be selected. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of habits, etc., when setting the lottery probability of the hole, the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of machine selection before starting the game. .

In the present embodiment, two types of channels, the guide channel 706 and the guide channel 708, are used as the channels through which the ball can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed, but the present invention is not limited to this. More flow paths and winning openings may be provided. Also, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter each winning hole may have more variations. As a result, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be enhanced, so that the player can more interestingly observe the flowing direction of the balls entering the storage device 700. can be made

Also, a plurality of flow paths may be provided through which the ball can flow down when the storage valve 704a is open. Ball inlets may be provided through which different numbers of prize balls are dispensed when flowing down each channel. As a result, even when the reservoir valve 704a is open, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be given randomness. can be observed more interestingly.

In this embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second ball inlet 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 upstream, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to flow into the storage device 700 .

In this embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as the winning opening opened in the special game state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) when pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected. In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during a predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 to keep the reservoir valve 704a open. Alternatively, the closed state (storage state) and the open state (released state) may be switched each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated). By configuring in this way, since the release button 800 can be operated only when it is desired to switch the state, the number of times of operation by the player can be reduced. Further, in contrast to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating it may be provided. Even with such a configuration, each player can be allowed to select a game feature that matches his or her taste, as in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the state of the reservoir valve 704a is displayed in the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds by characters, but the manner in which the player is notified of the state of the reservoir valve 704a is limited to this. not a thing For example, depending on the state of the reservoir valve 704a, either a photographed image in which the reservoir valve 704a is open or a photographed image in which the reservoir valve 704a is closed may be displayed. Also, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the front side of the third symbol. Further, the state of the retention valve 704a may be recognized according to the state of the retention valve 704a by changing the mode of the third symbol.

In this embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 may control the reservoir valve 704a. More specifically, reservoir solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to input/output port 225 of audio ramp controller 113 . Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main controller 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute without delay selection processing of variable effects, lottery processing of special symbols, etc., which are main processing related to the game.

Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 700 that has a unique configuration that is not installed in general gaming machines, an effect is provided to explain the game characteristics related to this storage device 700. You can More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (description image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the advantages and disadvantages of the opening is displayed. It may be configured as This allows the player to easily understand the gameplay. Further, the type of the back surface on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the type of the back surface can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 . As a result, a player who is accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game characteristics can change the back face type to one in which the explanation image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first specific winning hole 65a is provided below the first ball entrance 64 in a front view so that the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a when hit left-handed. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific prize winning port 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning hole 65a and the storage device 700 only by hitting right in the special game state (jackpot state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (jackpot state) can be made to flow into the storage device 700. can do more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player for the big win.

In this embodiment, when the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact), the flow path through which the newly flowing ball flows is It was designed to be random. In other words, in a state where the balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 700 to be distributed to the guide channel 706 and the guide channel 708 is substantially the same. configured, but is not limited to this. For example, the width of the reservoir valve 704a is widened (for example, the width is 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere), and the sphere stored above the reservoir valve 704a is positioned to the right or to the left when viewed from the front. may be configured to obtain When the ball is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a toward the left side in front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the right side of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is easily repulsed to the right side in the front view, and the ball easily flows down the guide channel 708 . As described above, out-ports (small-value prize-winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide channel 708, so the player cannot win prize balls (which is disadvantageous for the player). . On the other hand, when the ball is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a toward the right side in front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the left side of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is easily repelled to the left side in the front view, so that the ball easily flows down the guide channel 706 . As described above, the general prize winning port (large value winning prize port) 702 is provided downstream of the guide channel 708, so that the player can win a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player). becomes). In this way, depending on the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, it is possible to create an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player. You can be conscious of the arrangement of the spheres stored in the upper part of the . Therefore, if the arrangement of the ball is disadvantageous (that is, if the ball is stored on the left side in front view), the release button 800 can be pressed (operated) to open (release) the storage valve 704a. can. Also, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, if the balls are stored on the right side when viewed from the front), it is possible to make the player want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. . Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of judging whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the state (open state or closed state) of the second specific winning port 650a and the state (open state or closed state) of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 are independent of each other. , and in the privilege game state (jackpot state), the reservoir valve 607a is always controlled to be in an open state, while the second specific winning port 650a is opened for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (Fig. 16 , the opening period defined for each jackpot type) was configured to be set to the open state only. In addition, two types of flow paths (a guiding flow path 652 and a guiding flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and only when the ball flows down the guiding flow path 652, the guiding flow It was configured to be able to enter a variable probability entrance 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652 . In other words, even if the ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a during the big win, the ball does not flow down the guide channel 652 so as not to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the big win. rice field.

On the other hand, in this modification, instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a and the reservoir valve 607a of the first embodiment, a slide member 900 is used to replace the second specific winning opening 650a and the reservoir The state of the device 600 is configured to be switchable. That is, one member is configured to perform the opening/closing operation of the second specific winning port 650a and the opening/closing control of the guide channel 607 in the storage device 600, and the states are switched in conjunction with each other. In other words, when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the guiding channel 607 (general winning opening 602) is also opened. ) are also configured to be closed. When configured in this way, both the second specific winning hole 650a and the general winning hole 602 (that is, the winning hole opened during the big win by the slide member 900) are used to obtain prize balls during the big win. can be treated as

In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, only the induction flow path 652 leading to the variable probability entrance 654 is provided, and the flow path switching valve 650d, the induction flow path 653, and the normal entrance 655 is obsolete. That is, if the ball can be entered into the second specific winning hole 650a, it is configured to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. In addition, it is configured to change the winning opening opened in the 12th round according to the type of jackpot. That is, in the 12th round, the second specific prize winning port 650a and the general winning prize port (large value winning prize port) 602 are set to the open state (V route open jackpot), and in all rounds of the jackpot, the first specific winning prize A jackpot (V-route closed jackpot) is provided in which the prize-winning port 65a is set to an open state (the second specific prize-winning port 650a and the general prize-winning port (high-value prize-winning port) 602 are not opened during the big win). It is

Along with these changes from the first embodiment, conditions for ending each round of the jackpot are also changed. Specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the jackpot, the balls entered the first specific prize winning port 65a, the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the general winning port (high value prize winning port) 602. is 10 in total or 30 seconds have passed since the round started, the round game ends (the first specific winning hole 65a is closed). Also, in the 12 rounds, the number of balls entering the first specific prize winning port 65a, the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 is 10 in total, or The round game ends (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have passed since the start.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a member for switching the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (closing portion 910) , the member (ball storage portion 920) for switching the state of the guide channel 607 is composed of one member (slide member 900), and the ball is paid out when it enters the second specific winning port 650a. The number of prize balls to be played is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the contents of the ROM 202 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 76, regarding an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of the V route open jackpot (jackpot F) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when the 12th round of the V route open jackpot (jackpot F) is reached, the characters "ROUND 12" are displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. In addition, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning opening 650a has been opened is formed in the upper central portion of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANCE!!" and the characters "Probability change route open!!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that by entering the ball into the second specific winning hole 650a, the game will shift to the probability variable state of the special symbols after the big win. Other display contents such as the boy character 710 are the same as those displayed in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the downstream configuration of the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, similarly to the first embodiment, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second A variable winning device 650 is provided. In addition, a member (closing part 910) for opening or closing the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650, a member (ball storing part 920) for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600, and are arranged in a straight line. This is because the closure 910 and ball reservoir 920 are both part of the slide member, which will be discussed in more detail below.

In addition, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. A hall clerk can adjust the rate at which balls flow into reservoir 600, for example, by adjusting pegs 921a, 921b before the hall opens. By changing the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the number of balls entering the general prize winning port (high value winning port) 602 in the storage device 600 in the 12th round of the jackpot. can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the balls hit by hitting to the right easily flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the big win. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation for the jackpot game can be further improved, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Conversely, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, when it is made difficult for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the first specific winning port 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600 and the second It is possible to increase the number of balls that reach the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more speedily. In addition, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second specific winning hole 650a in the 12th round, it is possible to make it easy to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol when the big hit F is achieved. Therefore, since the possibility that the big wins will continue in a short period of time is high, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Incidentally, the structure for adjusting the easiness of the ball flowing into the storage device 600 (the easiness of the ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a) is not limited to the nail. For example, a windmill may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 so that the easiness of rotation can be adjusted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the slide member 900 including the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 described above will be described. 78(a) and (b) are sectional views of the game board 13 taken along line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77, respectively. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidably displaced toward the back side or the front side in a front view with respect to the game board 13, and by being slidably displaced toward the front side in a front view, the second specific player 900 can be slid to the front side. The winning opening 650a and the guiding channel 607 can be closed respectively. On the other hand, by sliding and displacing the slide member 900 to the rear side in front view with respect to the game board 13, the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 can be opened.

FIG. 78(a) is a diagram of the game board 13 viewed from above when the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are closed by the slide members 900, respectively. On the other hand, FIG. 78(b) is a view of the game board 13 viewed from above when the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are open.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closing portion 910 and a ball storage portion 920 protrude from the right end portion and the left end portion of a substantially rectangular base portion 930 (substantially " U-shaped shape). The closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 can be protruded toward the front side of the game board 13 or buried toward the back side of the game board 13 through openings 940a and 940b formed in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

When the slide member 900 is slid to the front side in front view, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the closing portion 910 closes the upper portion of the second specific prize winning opening 650a, so that the ball is moved to the second variable position. It becomes impossible to make a ball enter inside the winning device 650 . Similarly, since the guide channel 607 is closed by the ball storage part 920, the ball can enter the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 provided downstream of the guide channel 607. become unable.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), when the slide member 900 is slid to the depth side of the game board 13, the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the guide channel 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball is directed to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guide channel 607 or the second specific winning opening 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. can be entered.

Thus, in this modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning hole 650a and the switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. FIG. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the second specific winning port 650 and the reservoir valve 607a are separately controlled as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes important processes in the game, such as lottery of special symbols and determination of variable time. It will have a big impact on your game. On the other hand, in this modified example, the introduction of the slide member 900 can reduce the processing load of the MPU 201, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modification of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the first winning type selection table 202b in this modified example will be described. As described above, in this modified example, when a ball enters the second specific winning hole 650 a , the ball always enters the variable probability ball entering hole 654 . As the types of jackpots, there are provided a jackpot in which the second specific prize winning opening 650 is opened in the 12th round and a jackpot in which the first specific prize winning opening 65a is opened in the 12th round.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of 0 to 49 is associated with the jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is a jackpot that gives a special game state of 15 rounds. It is a jackpot that is opened until 10 balls are entered. That is, in the special game state (jackpot state), the ball cannot be entered into the probability variable ball entrance 654 arranged inside the second variable winning device 650, so after the jackpot ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100. given times.

On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). This jackpot F is a jackpot in which 15 rounds of special game conditions are awarded, and in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the second specific prize winning port 650a and the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 are held for a predetermined time (30 seconds). or until 10 balls are entered), and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls are entered). It is a jackpot that is opened until it hits the ball). In the jackpot F, the second specific prize winning port 650a is opened in the 12th round, so if the ball can be entered into the second specific prize winning port 650a in the 12th round, the special pattern is in a variable state of probability after the big win. is given. On the other hand, in the 12th round, the ball entered only the general prize-winning hole (high-value prize-winning hole) 602 in spite of the fact that the ball was not hit to the right or the ball was hit to the right. If the 12 rounds are completed without entering the ball, after the big hit F is completed, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given 100 times.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. FIG. In this embodiment, the contents of the main process (see FIG. 34) are changed from those of the first embodiment. Specifically, instead of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment, the difference is that the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed. ing. Only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described below, and detailed descriptions of other processes that are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 3 (S1031). This jackpot control process 3 is a process of setting the opening and closing of the first specific prize winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round in the jackpot state.

In each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 of the jackpot control process 3, S1101, S1102, and S1104 executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), the processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108 that were executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are abolished.

Furthermore, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36) Instead, a jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is ended. Details of this jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the above-described jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121). This jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the state (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a.

Of this jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), each process of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 is the same as each process of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. process is executed. In addition, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in this modification, if it is determined that it is the 12th round in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), then the jackpot type this time is the jackpot F (V route open It is determined whether it is a jackpot) (S1211).

If it is determined in the process of S1211 that it is not the jackpot F (S1211: No), it means that the jackpot E in which the first specific prize winning port (first large open port) 65a is opened in all the rounds of the jackpot. , the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a jackpot F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: Yes), it is a jackpot type that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a opens only in the 12th round. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing portion 910 closing the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage portion 920 closing the guiding flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. (a part of the slide member 900), and the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are slidably displaced in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a by the processing of S1203, the guidance channel 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened). ).

After setting the opening of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a , and in order to notify the audio lamp control device 114 that the guide channel 607 has been set to the open state (released state), a storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) is set (S1212). , the process proceeds to S1206. The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 34), It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the storage state command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 is generated in the third pattern display device 81, and the characters "CHANCE !!" are displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that it is a chance to shift to the probability changing state of the special symbols.

If the state is changed to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the big win is likely to occur again in a short period after the big win is finished, which is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the twelfth round of the big win F, the player can be made to launch the ball more seriously aiming at the second specific winning hole 650a. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big win from turning into a mere work for obtaining the prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the special game state (during the big win state).

As described above, the percentage of balls hitting the right-handed ball that reaches the second specific winning hole (second large opening) 650a is determined by the nails 921a and 921b ( 77) can be varied. For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right in front view, or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left in front view (opening the nail), more right-handed balls flow into the storage device 600. easier to do. Therefore, the proportion of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. In other words, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for the ball to enter the second specific winning hole 650a in the 12th round of the big win F. Also, if 10 balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 without being able to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end. . Therefore, it becomes difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. It should be noted that when the ball easily flows into the storage device 600, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with a larger number of winning balls paid out compared to the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9(b)). As a result, the player can win a large amount of prize balls, and thus the player's interest in the big win can be enhanced.

Here, in most cases, in the 1st to 11th rounds, the player hits to the right aiming at the first specific winning hole 65a. The ball also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storing part 920 by the time the twelfth round starts. Therefore, when the 12th round starts and the slide member 900 is slid and displaced to open the upper portion of the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, the balls stored in the upper portion of the ball storage portion 920 are released into the general winning opening. It flows down to (large value prize winning opening) 602 . As a result, substantially, of the balls hit to the right in the 12th round, 9 balls enter the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602, and the balls are sent to the second specific winning hole 650a. If the ball cannot be entered, the 12th round ends.

On the other hand, by adjusting the nails 921 a and 921 b closer to each other (closing the nails), it becomes difficult for a right-handed ball to flow into the storage device 600 . Therefore, the proportion of the balls reaching the second specific prize winning opening 650 is relatively high, so that in the 12th round of the big win F, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second specific prize winning opening 650a. Therefore, after the end of the big hit, it becomes easier to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol. As a result, after the end of the big win F, the big win is likely to occur again in a short period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this way, by changing the ease with which a ball enters the storage device 600 when hitting right, You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to change the playability when the jackpot F is achieved simply by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b by the hall clerk. In other words, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game property that easily shifts to the probability variable state of the special symbol, and easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, 12 It is possible to switch between a game property in which it is easy to acquire many prize balls in the first round, but a game property in which it is difficult to shift to a probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment ), the winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. The details of this winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in this modification. Of this winning process 2 (S1122), the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). process is executed.

In addition, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in this modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specific (S1404: Yes), or round time When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has passed (S1405: Yes), one of the open winning openings (first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or second specific winning opening A winning opening closing process for setting closing of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. This winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). This winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process of setting closing of the winning opening when conditions for closing the winning opening are satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

In this winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the 12th round (S4401). If it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the currently open winning opening is the first specific winning opening (first large open opening) 65a. 1 (large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4401, if it is determined that the current round is the 12th round (S4401), since the winning openings that are open are different rounds depending on the type of jackpot, the jackpot this time is the jackpot F (V route It is determined whether it is an open jackpot) (S4403). Then, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (that is, it is a jackpot E (V route closed jackpot)) (S4403: No), the currently opened prize gate is the first specific prize gate ( 650a, the process proceeds to S4402 to set the closing of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a (S4402), and this process is executed. finish.

In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. It means that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are currently open. Therefore, in this case, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are set to be closed (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are closed, set a retention state command corresponding to the closed state (retention state) ( S4405), this process ends.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 34), It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the storage state command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is erased. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the chance of shifting to the variable probability state of the special symbols has ended.

By executing this winning opening closing process (S1431), the opened winning opening can be accurately closed.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the contents of the command determination process are partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process of the second embodiment (see FIG. 69) is performed in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from main control device 110 in the jackpot. Execute the process. Since the processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the command determination process in this modified example, instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment, error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed. This error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the error notification process 2 (S1971) described above. In the error notification process 2 (S1971), the processes of S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937 are the same as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in this modified example, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the winning time notification process in the first embodiment (FIG. 45 ), instead, the hit time notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process is terminated. This winning time notification process 2 (S1981) is, like the winning time notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, a process for performing notification when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big win. is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the above-described winning time notification process 2 (S1981) will be described. In the winning notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1991). In the processing of S1991, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1991: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0. If not (S1992), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1992, when it is determined that the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the retention valve 607a is set to the closed state (retention state), and the ball sweeping period has elapsed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the winning of a ball to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (S1993).

Then, if it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry into the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that ball entry information corresponding to the entry of a ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the reservoir valve 607a is set to the closed state (reservation state). This means that the balls are flowing downstream of the reservoir valve 607a despite the fact that Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, an error command for display corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is not ON (it is OFF) (S1991: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). When it is determined that the value of the flow time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is turned on in the process of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then the received prize information command includes entry into the general prize mouth (small value prize mouth) 601. It is determined whether winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this processing is terminated.

In the processing of S1996, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the reservoir valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). This means that the ball has entered the general prize winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the ball throwing period has passed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process proceeds to S1994 in order to report the failure of the storage valve 607a.

With this hit notification process 2 (S1981), when a problem occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the problem can be quickly notified, so that the problem can be quickly resolved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open and close the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the guiding flow path in the storage device 600. 607 can be opened and closed at the same time. In other words, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining prize balls during the big win.

Switching of the state of the second specific prize winning port 650a and switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized simply by slidingly displacing the slide member 900. The processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the prize winning port 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes important processes in the game, such as lottery of special symbols and determination of variable time. It will have a big impact on your game. On the other hand, in this modified example, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

In addition, in this modification, only the variable probability ball entrance 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 always enters the variable probability ball entrance 654. It is configured to be a ball. As a result, it is possible to realize a simple game property such that if the ball can be entered into the second specific winning hole 650a, the game moves to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the big win. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand whether or not the special symbols are shifted to the variable probability state, so that even a beginner can enjoy the game. In addition, since the channel switching valve 650d, the induction channel 653, and the normal ball entrance 655 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment are eliminated, the second variable winning device 650 structure can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this modification, the ratio of the balls that flow into the storage device 600 among the balls hit to the right is adjusted by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is drawn based on the winning of a game ball into the start winning opening, and whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state is determined separately during the winning. There is a lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent the work from becoming a mere task for obtaining a lot of winning balls, and to make the player play a winning game with a sense of anticipation for the transition to the probability variation state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. We are trying to

Some of the gaming machines described above are provided with a predetermined area in which the game ball can enter only during winning. (For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-180999).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the rate at which a game ball enters a predetermined area during a hit is set in advance for each model. There was no choice but to introduce a different model on the side. In other words, the conventional gaming machine has no degree of freedom in the rate at which it shifts to the probability variable state, and it is difficult to flexibly respond to business policies that differ from hall to hall. Therefore, a game machine with higher versatility has been demanded.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the ease with which a ball enters the storage device 600 when hitting to the right can be easily changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. It consists of This makes it possible to change the ease with which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 650a provided downstream of the entrance portion of the storage device 600. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to change the playability when the jackpot F is achieved simply by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b by the hall clerk. In other words, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game property that makes it easy to shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol, and easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, special It is possible to switch between the game property in which it is difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the pattern. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that versatility can be improved.

In this modification, the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is configured to be opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in the 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be determined arbitrarily. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second specific winning hole 650a. Therefore, since it becomes easy to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Also, the opening time may be set to 2 seconds, for example. By shortening the opening time, the pachinko machine 10 in which the nails 921a and 921b are made to be more closed by making the ball enter the second specific prize winning hole 650a in a limited time. can be selected. Therefore, the game by the pachinko machine 10 can make the player enthusiastic.

In this modification, the entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning port 650a, and by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, it is possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the storage device 600. However, the configuration for varying the percentage of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, simply an out port or a prize winning port into which prize balls are paid out when a ball enters may be provided. Then, the second specific prize winning port 650a may be configured to switch between the open and closed states with a single member. Even with this configuration, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to change the ease of entering the out hole or the winning hole, the ratio of balls reaching the second specific winning hole 650a can be changed. can be made Also, by replacing the storage device 600 with an out port or a prize winning port, the structure can be simplified, so the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Also, the ease of flow into the storage device 600 does not necessarily have to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, columnar members fixed to the board surface may be provided. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible for the hall side to adjust whether or not the ball enters the second specific prize winning port 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so that the ball enters the second specific prize winning port 650a. Even if you don't hit the ball, you can keep that disappointment from going to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having a sense of distrust toward the hole.

In this modified example, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but this is not the only option. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. As a result, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not to move to the variable probability state of the special symbols, so that the game can be played with peace of mind in the subsequent special game state (jackpot state). Also, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in the fifteenth round. As a result, it is not determined until the 15th round, which is the final round, whether or not to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols, so that the player's expectation for the variable probability state of the special symbols can be maintained longer. Therefore, the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be improved. Further, for example, when the jackpot F is achieved, the second specific prize winning port 650a and the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602 may be opened consecutively in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened in the 12th and 13th rounds. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage part 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602 in the 12th round, and enter the ball storing part in the 13th round. There may be no sphere above 920 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the second specific winning hole 650a.

In this modified example, as in the first embodiment, only one ball can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of balls can be stored, For example, it may be configured such that four balls can be stored in the upper portion of the ball storing portion 920 . In this case, the conditions for ending the 12 rounds are changed, and the 12 rounds are ended when, for example, a total of 5 balls enter the first specific prize winning port 65a, the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the general prize winning port 602. It may be configured to In the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, the game is played by trying to make the ball enter the first specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the right. The upper limit number (4) is stored. In other words, 12 rounds are started and the ball storage section 920 is opened, so that the four stored balls all flow into the general prize winning port (high value prize winning port) 602, so immediately after the start of the 12 rounds. Four balls enter the specific winning opening (the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602). Therefore, 12 rounds are completed when one more ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (a total of five balls enter the second specific winning opening). 650a, or the ball enters the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602), so the chance of entering the second specific winning hole 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game for 12 rounds with a sense of tension. In addition, in the 1st to 11th rounds of the big win, while hoping that the balls do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage part 920 is 12 instead of 4, which is the upper limit). A jackpot game can be played (hoping for the round to come). Therefore, since the game can be played with a sense of tension even during the big win, it is prevented (suppressed) that the big win is just a work to get the prize balls, and the player can enjoy the big win game. can improve interest in

It should be noted that the number of balls entering a specific winning hole, which is the condition for ending 12 rounds, and the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storing section 920 may be determined arbitrarily. For example, the condition for ending 12 rounds may be less than or equal to the number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage part 920 . As a result, the game can be played with a strong hope that the ball will not be stored inside the storage device 600 before the start of the 12th round. Conversely, the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the ball storing portion 920 may be reduced. As a result, even if the upper limit number of balls is stored in the upper part of the ball storing part 920 by the start of the 12th round, multiple opportunities to enter the balls into the second specific winning hole 650a are given in the 12th round. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this modified example, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storing section 920 is opened in the 12th round of the big win F, but the effect during the big win is limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to inform whether the big win E or the big win F is made according to the result of the effect executed up to the 11th round of the big win. More specifically, for example, in each round from the 1st round to the 11th round, an effect may be performed in which an ally of justice and a monster fight. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, a big win F is reported, and if the ally of justice is defeated, a big win E is reported. That is, when the ally of justice wins, the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the result of the performance performed in the jackpot.

In addition, there are variations in the performance content, and the performance content that has a high degree of expectation that the allies of justice will win (easily selected in the case of jackpot F) and the high possibility that the allies of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot E) ) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice evades the enemy's attack, the expectation of victory will be high, and the attack of the ally of justice will miss, The player may be configured to increase the possibility of being defeated when the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, it is possible to predict not only the outcome of whether or not the ally of justice will win, but also the flow of presentation leading up to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, the content of the production performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production of fighting the allies of justice and the monsters, and it is possible to suggest an advantageous jackpot F and a disadvantageous jackpot E than the jackpot F. Any mode is acceptable. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a treasure search effect, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, the jackpot F may be notified, or the boy character 710 may It is also possible to display a presentation of eating a lot, and to notify that the player has won a jackpot F when all the provided food is eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 that has a unique configuration that is not installed in general gaming machines, an effect is provided to explain the game characteristics related to this storage device 600. You can More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions for opening the storage valve 607a, the merits when it is opened, and the demerits when the ball is hit to the right in the closed state. may be configured to display an image (description image) that explains the As a result, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the type of the back surface on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the type of the back surface can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 . As a result, a player who is accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game characteristics can change the back face type to one in which the explanation image is not displayed.

In this modified example, both the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are treated as winning openings for obtaining a big prize ball. Winning hole) 602 may be treated as a normal winning hole. That is, as a condition for ending each round of the jackpot, each round of the jackpot ends when 10 or more balls enter the first specific prize winning port 65a or the second specific prize winning port 650a. The number of balls entering the winning hole 602 may be irrelevant). As a result, the more the ball enters the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the more profitable the player can be.

In this modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the ball enters the storage device 600. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball is difficult to enter, the ball can be easily entered into the second specific winning hole 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, it was configured to be able to change the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state of the special symbols after the end of the big hit, but the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state of the special symbols is changed. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of fixing the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600, a variable probability ball entrance 654 and a normal ball entrance 655 are provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650 as in the first embodiment. may be configured. Then, it may be configured such that the hall clerk can adjust the ratio of the balls that have flowed into the inside of the second variable prize winning device 650 to the variable probability ball entrance 654 and the normal ball entrance 655 . More specifically, for example, after replacing the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment with the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, a channel switching valve 650d and a switching Axis 650e is abolished. Then, for example, a nail may be driven at the branch position of the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653 (that is, above the location where the switching shaft 650e was provided in the first embodiment). Also, the nailing position may be above the position where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15), for example, by a distance about the radius of a sphere. In other words, it may be a position at which the ball flowing down the guide channel 651 can contact (collide) and a position at which the ball can flow down the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653 . With this configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right side, the game ball flowing down the guide channel 651 can easily contact (collide) with the left side of the nail. Therefore, the ball tends to be repelled to the left when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball can easily flow into the guide channel 652 provided downstream of the second variable winning device 650 and on the left side in front view, so that the ball can easily enter the probability variable ball entrance 654 . Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it easier to change the probability of the special symbol after the end of the big win. Conversely, if the nail provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650 is adjusted to the left side, the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 651 is more likely to contact (collide) with the right side of the nail. It becomes easier to repel to the right direction. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guide flow path 653 provided downstream of the second variable winning device 650 on the left side in the front view, so that the ball can easily enter the probability variable ball entrance 654 . Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it difficult to change the probability of the special symbol after the end of the big win. In this way, by making it possible to adjust the ease with which a ball can be entered into the variable probability entrance 654, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to provide game characteristics corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

In addition, as another specific example configured to be able to change the ratio of shifting to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, instead of the nails 921a and 921b in this modification, the entrance portion of the storage device 600 is opened. A variable member may be provided to switch between the closed state and the closed state. The variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set in the open state and the period set in the closed state The ratio may be configured to be Hall adjustable. More specifically, for example, an operating means such as a DIP switch that can be set to a plurality of states is provided. Then, for example, if the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be set to the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, a state is set in which game balls are most likely to flow into the storage device 600 . Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is always set to the closed state. In other words, no balls will flow into the storage device 600 in the event of a big win, and the state is set in such a way that the balls are most likely to flow into the second specific prize winning port 650a. When the DIP switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), it may be configured such that the closed state period becomes longer as it goes from (00000000B) to (11111111B). In other words, it may be configured such that the ball is more likely to enter the second specific winning hole 650a as it goes to (11111111B), and the variable probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set after the big hit. With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can be used as a gaming machine with a game property that is unlikely to change the probability of special symbols. The setting of the DIP switch may be adjusted so as to repeat the open state. Conversely, in a hall where the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be used as a gaming machine with a game property that is likely to be in a probability variable state of special symbols, for example, the variable member may repeat the closed state for 2.5 seconds and the open state for 0.5 seconds. Just adjust the DIP switch settings accordingly. As a result, the specs of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of each hall, so that highly versatile game characteristics corresponding to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the guide channel 704 provided inside the storage device 700 can be closed by the storage valve 704a so that one ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a in the closed state. was configured to In the state where the balls are stored, the balls are made easier to enter the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e where many winning balls are paid out. When the storage valve 704a is open, the ball is easily entered into the general prize winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 where the number of awarded balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to a closed state, and is configured to open when the player operates the release button 800. As shown in FIG. In other words, if the storage valve 704a is closed, there is a possibility that the ball may enter any of the general winning port (large value winning port) 702 and the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e (prize There is a possibility that many balls can be obtained, but there is a possibility that prize balls may not be obtained (highly gambling state), and if the storage valve 704a is in an open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is a general prize. A state in which a ball can be entered into the mouth (medium value prize winning mouth) 701 (a state in which a small amount of prize balls can be stably obtained) is established. Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player, so that each player can select the game characteristics that suit his/her taste. It was configured so that a game could be played by

On the other hand, in this modified example, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700 . In addition, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the entrance (general winning entrance 702), or to enter the out exit. Is it easier to ball) is configured to change. That is, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed, it can be easily recognized whether or not the ball is likely to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. configured to be able to

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment only in that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the second embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form. Elements that are the same as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, a storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13 . As described above, in this modified example, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700 . Details of this storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modified example, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right when viewed from the front. Therefore, most of the balls that first flowed into the guide channel 704 with the reservoir valve 704a closed stand still while being biased to the right side of the guide channel 704 due to the inclination of the reservoir valve 704a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 87, the portion of the guide channel 704 above the storage valve 704a is longer than in the second embodiment. Moreover, the guiding channel 704 does not have enough width for two spheres to be arranged side by side. Therefore, when another ball flows into the guide channel 704 in a state where one ball is stored on the right side inside the guide channel 704, in many cases, a new ball will appear on the upper left side of the previously stored ball. (a new ball is stored between the previously stored ball and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guiding channel 704).

In the case of the pooled state shown in FIG. 87 (the first pooled ball is on the right side and the second pooled ball is on the left side), the balls that flow into the pooling device 700 after that are It becomes easier to collide with the right side of the second stored ball. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to the impact caused by the collision (contact) with the stored ball. That is, the ball flows into the guide channel 708 and enters either the out-port (small-value prize-winning port) 703d or 703e.

Thus, in the case of the pooling state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can be made to flow into the pooling device 700, the ball enters the out ports (small value prize winning ports) 703d and 703e. A player cannot get a prize ball because the ball is thrown. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is a disadvantageous state for the player.

A ball entry sensor 704b is provided on the upper left side of the reservoir valve 704a in the guide channel 704 to detect a ball when the ball is present in front of the user when viewed from the front. The placement of the ball can be determined by the ball entering sensor 704b. More specifically, when the incoming ball sensor 704b continues to detect the ball for a predetermined period (for example, one minute), it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is in place. By determining whether or not the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is established, an image prompting the player to press the release button 800 after a certain period of time has passed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (see FIG. 89) ) can be displayed. As a result, the disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls that have flowed into the storage device 700 tend to enter the out-ports (small-value prize-winning ports) 703d and 703e continues for a long period of time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be suppressed.

Next, another example in which two balls are stored will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the game ball that first flows into the guide channel 704 with the reservoir valve 704a closed is stored leftward with respect to the guide channel 704, and the second guide channel The spheres that have flowed into 704 are stored on the right side of the guiding channel 704 . When the stored state shown in FIG. 88 is reached, the ball that subsequently flows into the storage device 700 is likely to collide (contact) the left side surface of the second stored ball. Therefore, since the flowing direction of the ball that collides (contacts) with the stored ball is likely to change to the left direction, it flows down the guide flow path 706 and is paid out. It becomes easier to enter the ball into the winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 .

In this way, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, by letting the ball flow into the storage device 700, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. , this is an advantageous situation for players who can expect to win prize balls every time balls flow in.

Since the reservoir valve 704a is inclined downward to the right, the reservoir state shown in FIG. 88 is more difficult to achieve than the reservoir state shown in FIG. For example, after the retention valve 704a is closed, two balls flow into the guide channel 704 at approximately the same time, or the ball that first reaches the retention valve 704a This can be realized, for example, when the second ball flows into the guide channel 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repulsing in the upper left direction.

87 in most cases when the reservoir valve 704a is closed, the reservoir valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 in the present modified example as in the second embodiment. . That is, the ball can be stored in the storage device 700 in anticipation of resetting the storage state and returning to the storage state shown in FIG. 88 again. As a result, the player can play the game with the aim of achieving the pooled state shown in FIG. 88, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, when the storage state shown in FIG. It can make you feel the expectation of being able to win a lot of balls.

Also, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is shifted from the entering ball sensor 704b (the ball does not block the front side of the entering ball sensor 704b), so even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 continues for a long time, Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of an image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800 . Therefore, the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general prize winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 can be maintained for a longer period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 89, an image (suggestion display image) prompting the user to press release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (suggestion display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800. As shown in FIG. This suggestive display image is an image that is displayed when it is determined that an arrangement disadvantageous to the player continues for a certain period of time (one minute), as shown in FIG. More specifically, when the entering ball sensor 704b continues to detect the ball for one minute, it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable, and the suggestive display image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestive display image is set, the text "disadvantageous arrangement" is displayed for the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 is a disadvantageous arrangement for the player (the arrangement in which the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). can be recognized. Further, below the characters "disadvantageous arrangement", the characters "Press the button to reset the arrangement!" are displayed. By displaying this character, the player can be made aware that pressing (operating) the release button 800 will eliminate the disadvantageous state.

As described above, in this modification, the suggestion display image informs the player of the disadvantageous arrangement, and pressing (operating) the release button 800 prompts the player to cancel the disadvantageous arrangement, and the advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88). A game can be played with the aim of achieving the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, the player can be made to actively participate in the game.

In this embodiment, when a long period of time (one minute) has passed while the player is in a disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87), the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched to the open state (released state). That is, when the incoming ball sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the ball is stable in a disadvantageous state, and the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is reset. The reservoir valve 704a may be configured to be opened to allow for replenishment. As a result, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can be prevented from playing for a long time without noticing a disadvantageous state.

In this modified example, the retention valve 704a is opened when the entering ball sensor 704b continuously detects a ball for one minute. ) is not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), the period during which the player is at a disadvantage can be shortened. Also, by lengthening the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency with which the suggestive display image is displayed can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 90, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. The electrical configuration of the modified example of the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the second embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and that the configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 is changed. The difference is that an incoming ball sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225 . Other electrical configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, at least a disadvantageous time counter 223m and a suggestion display flag 223n are added to the RAM 223 in the modified example of the second embodiment.

The unfavorable time counter 223m is a counter used to determine the elapsed time after the player is placed in a disadvantageous arrangement (state in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. The value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected by the entering ball sensor 228 (see S4503 in FIG. 92). Also, when the ball is not detected by the entering ball sensor 228 in the state where the counter value has been added (the value is greater than 0), it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, when it is determined that the player is in a disadvantageous arrangement (a state in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87 based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m, Control is performed to display the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) described above.

The suggestive display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If this suggestive display flag 223n is on, it indicates that the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed, and if it is off, it indicates that the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. showing. This suggestive display flag 223n is set to ON when the display of the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when a storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a has been set to the open state (released state) is received, it is set to OFF (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 91, main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modification will be described.

Of the main processing (see FIG. 92) in this modified example, the processing of S1801 to S1817 is the same as the processing of S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment. In addition, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in this modified example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) is completed, then the cancellation suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed ( S1821), and the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821). In this cancellation suggestion display processing, first, it is determined whether or not the entering ball sensor 228 is on (S4501). It is determined whether or not there is (S4502). Then, if the suggestive display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and there is no need to determine whether or not to display the suggestive display image. End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the suggestive display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by adding 1 (S4503). It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223m is greater than 60000 (S4504). Here, since the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by 1 (every 1 ms) each time the main process (see FIG. 91) is performed, the counter value of 60000 corresponds to 1 minute.

In the process of S4503, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 60000 or less (S4504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 60000 (S4504: Yes), it is suggested to notify the player that a long time (one minute) has passed since the disadvantageous arrangement was made. A display background image change command for displaying a display is set (S4505), the suggestive display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the entering ball sensor 228 has not detected a ball (the entering ball sensor is off) (S4501: No), the arrangement is not disadvantageous (see FIG. 87). Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S4507). When it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the unfavorable time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the unfavorable time counter 223m has already been initialized and there is no need to initialize it again, so the process of S4508 is skipped. to terminate this process.

By executing this cancellation suggestion display process (S1821), the player will not play for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing this command determination process. In the processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of this command determination processing, the same processing as the processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment is executed. . Further, in the command determination process in this modification, when it is determined in the process of S1921 that the storage state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. is executed (S1929), and this process ends.

Details of this stored state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command process (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) by the storage state command (S4601). Then, if it is determined that the switch to the closed state (storage state) has been notified (S4601: Yes), then the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63(a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A command for changing the back image for display is set (S4602), the retention state flag 223k is set to ON to indicate that the retention valve 704a is in the closed state (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604. and migrate.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the state notified by the retention state command is not the closed state (retention state) (the switch to the open state (released state) is notified) (S4601: No) Next, a display back image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63(b)) corresponding to the open state (released state) on the third pattern display device 81 is set (S4605), and the storage valve In order to indicate that the current state of 704a is the open state (released state), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S4606). Then, in order to indicate that the suggestive display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestive display flag 223n is set to OFF (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604.

In the process of S4604 executed after the process of S4603 or S4607, the flow time counter 223l is checked to determine whether or not it is the ball sweeping period from when the storage valve 704a is switched to when the ball is ejected. A counter value corresponding to 1 second is set (S4604), and this processing ends. By executing this storage state command process (S1931), it is possible to appropriately update the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main controller 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700 . Moreover, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken as the storage state when the balls are stored inside. These pooling states have different ball entrances into which balls that have flowed into the pooling device 700 are likely to enter. In addition, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily determined visually. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select whether or not it is better to reset the reservoir state by once setting the reservoir valve 704a to the open state.

Also, an advantageous pooling state (a pooling state in which the ball is likely to enter the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and a disadvantageous pooling state (a pooling state in which the ball is likely to enter the out port shown in FIG. 87). , the game can be played in anticipation of an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). And, even if it becomes a disadvantageous retention state (see FIG. 87), the retention state is reset by opening the retention valve 704a, and the game is aimed again at an advantageous retention state (see FIG. 88). can be done. In addition, by being in an advantageous storage state, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment, and at the same time, by continuing to enter the ball into the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, a large number of prize balls can be obtained. It can give you hope for what you can do.

The pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700, but it is not limited to this, and an internal structure that can store three or more balls may be used. . In this case, if the incoming ball sensor 228 is provided near the upper end of the guiding channel 704 toward the left, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is a disadvantageous arrangement leading to the out port.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, by providing the incoming ball sensor 228 near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 toward the left side, whether the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 is disadvantageous to the player. Although it was constructed so as to be able to determine whether or not the entering ball sensor 228 is installed, the mounting position of the entering ball sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged near the upper end of the guiding channel 704 and rightward. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 are arranged as shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the incoming ball sensor 228, but when the balls are arranged as shown in FIG. The incoming ball sensor 228 may be arranged such that the upper ball among the stored balls is detected by the incoming ball sensor 228 . This makes it possible to determine whether or not the arrangement (see FIG. 88) is such that the ball can easily enter the general prize winning opening 702 . Therefore, based on the detection result of the entering ball sensor 228, for example, when the ball continues to be detected by the entering ball sensor 228 continuously for 5 seconds or longer, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. . Therefore, based on the arrangement of the stored balls that are advantageous to the player shown in FIG. 88, it is notified that the current state is advantageous to the player. can be done. As a method of notification, for example, the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the characters "advantageously arranged" and the characters "big chance with right hit!" You may This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the current state is advantageous, so that the player presses (operates) the release button 800 by mistake, causing the balls stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. It is possible to suppress the fact that the arrangement is reset (an advantageous arrangement is reset).

Also, the number of ball entry sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of sensors may be provided. More specifically, for example, the incoming ball sensors 228 may be provided near the upper end of the guiding channel 704 near the right side and the left side, respectively. As a result, when the sensor provided on the left side continues to detect the ball for five seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable. Also, when the sensor provided on the right side continues to detect the ball for five seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 is stable. Therefore, when the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (arrangement unfavorable to the player in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), by displaying the above-described suggestive display image (see FIG. 89), the game It is possible to prompt the person to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. 88 (arrangement advantageous to the player whose ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image (for example, "advantageous By displaying an image in which the characters "under placement" and the characters "right-handed hits a great chance!" Motivation can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the reservoir valve 704a is configured to be inclined downward to the lower right, but the inclination may be reversed. This makes it easier for the player to achieve a pooling state (see FIG. 88) that is advantageous to the player. Also, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. This makes it completely random whether a favorable or unfavorable retention state occurs.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the trigger for opening the reservoir valve 704a is only the depression (operation) of the release button 800, but other triggers may be provided. For example, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be set to the open state during the jackpot, and the storage state may be reset periodically. If the opportunity to reset the pooled state is completely left to the player, once the pooled state becomes advantageous (see FIG. 88), the game will be continued while the pooled state is maintained, and the hole will be inadequate. It may turn out to be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is periodically reset, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the advantageous storage state from continuing for a long time, thereby preventing disadvantages to the holes.

In this modified example, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on the depression (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. As a result, each player can start the game while the storage valve 704a is in a state that matches his or her taste.

Also, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to execute a lottery to determine whether to switch to the open state (released state) once per minute. may Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is disadvantageous (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are likely to be guided to the out ports (small value prize winning ports) 703d and 703e, the lottery is won. Thus, the game can be played in the hope that the storage valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is such that the balls are easily guided to the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (see FIG. 88), the storage valve 704a is opened. In order to avoid losing the lottery, it is possible to play the game in the hope that the lottery will continue to be lost. Therefore, different lottery results can be expected according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that novel game characteristics can be provided. Furthermore, the lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 704a to the open state (released state) may be configured so that the hall clerk or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Thus, when a player selects one machine for playing a game from among a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the machine having a good lottery probability can be predicted and machine selection can be made. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of habits, etc., when setting the lottery probability of a hole, the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of machine selection before starting the game. .

In this modified example, since the pooling device 700 is provided, which has a unique structure that is not installed in a general game machine, an effect for explaining the gameplay related to the pooling device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (description image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the advantages and disadvantages of the opening is displayed. It may be configured to This allows the player to easily understand the gameplay. Further, the type of the back surface on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the type of the back surface can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 . As a result, a player who is accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game characteristics can change the back face type to one in which the explanation image is not displayed.

In this modified example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) when pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected. In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during a predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 to keep the reservoir valve 704a open. Alternatively, the closed state (storage state) and the open state (released state) may be switched each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated). By configuring in this way, since the release button 800 can be operated only when it is desired to switch the state, the number of times of operation by the player can be reduced. Further, in contrast to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating it may be provided. Even with such a configuration, each player can be allowed to select a game feature that matches his or her taste, as in the present embodiment.

In this modification, when a certain period of time (one minute) has passed since the arrangement was disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to cancel the arrangement for the player. Although it is configured to prompt pressing (operation) of the button 800, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be configured integrally (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are combined into one operation button, and the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 may be electrically connected to each other). Then, when it is determined that the entering ball sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a certain period of time (one minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player as shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be configured such that the variation type that develops the effect is more likely to be selected. As a result, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) in order to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state (released state) at the same time. In general, the player observes the result of the variable performance that informs whether or not the player wins a big win with the greatest interest, so when the variable performance that develops the performance by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the player surely presses the frame button 22.例文帳に追加It is possible to make the player recognize that he/she is prompted. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

In this modified example, the first specific winning hole 65a is provided below the first ball entrance 64 in a front view so that the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a when hit left-handed. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific prize winning port 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning hole 65a and the storage device 700 only by hitting right in the special game state (jackpot state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (jackpot state) can be made to flow into the storage device 700. can do more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the big win.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided by sliding to the front side in the front view and to the back side in the front view. Although the flow path is closed and the balls can be stored in the upper part thereof, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the reservoir valve is configured to stand upright with respect to the inner wall of the channel to close the channel, and in the open state, the reservoir valve falls down in the downstream direction of the channel, The channel may be configured to allow passage of a sphere. In addition, the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a do not need to completely close the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a is shortened and the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a protrude to the front side in a front view, the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 are partially opened. It may be configured to be Moreover, the width of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the cost of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. Further, when setting the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 to the open state (released state) by the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a, the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 do not have to be completely opened. . In other words, a part of the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a may protrude into the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704, respectively. Also, the width of the open portion of the guide channel 607 or the guide channel 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the operation range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, so that the power consumed for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. can. In addition, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball, the ball that has flowed in may come into contact with the reservoir valve 607a and the reservoir valve 704a, reducing the momentum of the flow, but the ball will eventually flow down. (It can be made difficult to store (hold) at the positions of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even with this configuration, it is possible to realize the same operations as those of the above-described embodiments. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the balls can be stored in the guide channels 607 and 704 and a state in which the balls flowing into the guide channels 607 and 704 flow downstream. .

In each of the above-described embodiments, out ports are provided at both ends of each ball entrance provided in each storage device, but out ports at both ends may be eliminated. Even if the out-port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can be entered into another ball-in port. Also, by eliminating outlets at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of outlets were provided inside the storage device, but instead of the outlets provided inside the storage device, an outlet 66 provided below the game board 13 when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 2). As a result, it is possible to use only one out port, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls entering the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of ejected balls. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced because the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, one ball (the first embodiment, the modification of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment) or two balls (the modification of the second embodiment) are stored in the upper part of the storage valve. ), but it is not limited to this, and may be configured so that three or more balls can be stored. Furthermore, when storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the vertical direction, or may be configured so that they can be stored side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve may be counted. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. . As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, the five balls all flow down to the general prize winning opening (high value winning prize opening) 602, so that a large amount (5×15) of prize balls are paid out in a short period of time. can receive Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to store the balls inside the storage device 600, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be closed while the power is shut off. That is, when the shutdown of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power supply is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of the power supply shutdown is restored. may As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent behavior in which a ball is entered into the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is shut off and prize balls are obtained immediately when the power is restored.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball entrance (award winning opening) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guiding flow path through which the ball flows (that is, the arrangement of each ball entrance was fixed), but it is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a well-known croon or the like may be arranged on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning opening (entrance opening) may be provided in a ring on the croon. Randomness may be imparted to the prize-winning openings (ball-entering openings) into which the balls that have flowed down the guide channels enter by rotating the krun. This allows the player to watch with interest the ball entrance into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible, but it may be configured so that the inside of the storage device is difficult to view from the front.

In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 may control the reservoir valve. More specifically, reservoir solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to input/output port 225 of audio ramp controller 113 . Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute without delay selection processing of variable effects, lottery processing of special symbols, etc., which are main processing related to the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 118. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 (the upstream side in the direction in which the balls flow down the game board 13), and the special game In the state (jackpot state), a prize ball is obtained by entering a ball into a general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided inside the storage device 600 . In other words, in the special game state (jackpot state), in addition to the prize balls being paid out by entering the balls into the first specific winning hole 65a and the second specific winning hole 650a, the balls are moved to the storage device 600. It is configured such that prize balls are paid out by entering the balls. As a result, a large number of prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in a state (normal game state) other than the special game state (jackpot state), by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a, the ball is configured to make it difficult for the ball to enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and to allow the ball to be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. When there is a ball stored inside the storage device 600 in the normal game state, the stored ball can interfere (contact) with another ball that has newly flowed into the storage device 600. It was configured as Then, when interference (contact) with the stored balls occurs, the flowing direction of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 where the number of winning balls is small. (the direction of the induction channel 606). As a result, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal game state, it is an irregular game that tries to increase the number of balls held without going through a big win. It was configured so that the game method would be fundamentally untenable.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, a second storage device 1600 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. The detailed configuration of this second storage device 1600 will be described later with reference to FIG. It is configured such that it is possible to win a specific general winning opening (probable variable winning opening) 630a and a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 630b. Further, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1601a capable of storing balls flowing down a part of the channel. This reservoir valve 1601a is opened (released) when a specific condition is established (in this embodiment, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the jackpot (for example, 3 seconds has elapsed)), and the second reservoir device 1600 The balls stored by the storage valve 1601a are configured to flow down inside the second storage device.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the second variable winning device 650 is omitted, and the second storage device 1600 is replaced with the storage device 600. the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed; the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed; The partial processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. . Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 95, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 95, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the right side of the variable display device unit 80 The various configurations provided in the area provided in (hereinafter referred to as the right area) are different. Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 provided in the right area of the game board 13 in the first embodiment is deleted. The first specific prize winning opening (first large open opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all the rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special game state (jackpot state), by performing a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) in which the ball is shot aiming at the right side area, the player can enter the first specific prize winning opening (first large open opening) 65a. It is configured so that a ball can be entered.

Also, in the third embodiment, a second storage device 1600 is provided in the right area of the game board 13 . As shown in FIG. 96, the second storage device 1600 has an opening (flow path) formed by a frame 1612 forming the outer shape of the second storage device 1600 and the outer peripheral wall of the variable display unit 80 (see FIG. 95). entrance) 1610a. The width of the opening (inflow port) 1610a is formed to be about 15 mm, which restricts a plurality of balls from flowing into the second storage device 1600 at the same time.

A plurality of nails are planted in the vicinity of the opening (inlet) 1610a of the second storage device 1600, and the ball fired by the right-handed game collides with the plurality of nails and rebounds while flowing down the right side area. It is configured. In this way, by making the flowing direction of the balls irregular with a plurality of nails, the balls flowing down the right side area are sorted into the direction of flowing into the second storage device 1600 or the direction of passing through the first variable prize winning device 65. .

Specifically, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13 so that one ball out of 20 balls shot in a right-handed game flows into the second storage device 1600 . Also, by changing the planting positions of the plurality of nails or changing the inclination of the nails, the flow direction of the balls flowing down the right side area can be changed, and the ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 can be changed. can be adjusted.

In addition, in the third embodiment, a plurality of nails provided near the opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600 flow into the second storage device 1600 among the balls fired by the right-handed game. Although it is configured to be able to set the ratio of the balls to flow, other configurations may be used. For example, a member capable of alternately switching the flowing direction of the balls may be provided. By using such a structure for regularly distributing balls, the ratio of balls actually flowing into the second storage device 1600 can be easily adjusted with respect to the previously set ratio of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600. can be approximated.

In addition, in the present third embodiment, by adjusting the nail P2 provided near the opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600 in the upper left direction (upper left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), a right-handed game The ball fired by can easily flow down toward the first variable winning device 65, while by adjusting the nail P2 in the upper right direction (upper right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), a right-handed game A fired ball can be facilitated to flow down towards the second storage device 1600 .

Specifically, by adjusting (moving) the nail P2 in the upper left direction (the upper left direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 96), one out of 40 balls fired by the right-handed game is transferred to the second storage device 1600. By adjusting (moving) the nail P2 in the upper right direction (the upper right direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 96), one out of fifteen balls fired by the right-handed game is set to flow into the second storage device 1600. is set to flow into

With this configuration, for example, when the nail P2 is adjusted to reduce the percentage of balls entering the first variable prize winning device 65 during a jackpot game, the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 is reduced. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, the probability variable state is likely to be provided, and on the other hand, when the ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game is reduced and the peg P2 is adjusted, the first variable The rate of balls entering the winning device 65 is increased, and the speed of digesting the jackpot game can be hastened. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged no matter how the nail P2 is adjusted.

In addition, in the third embodiment, by adjusting the nail P2, it is possible to set a state in which the ball easily enters the first variable winning device 65 and a state in which the ball easily enters the second storage device 1600. However, for example, there are a state in which a ball easily enters the first variable prize winning device 65 and a state in which a ball easily enters the second storage device 1600 by a member that is constantly variably controlled after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It may be set so as to be switched periodically, or a switching member is provided to switch between a state in which it is easy to enter the first variable winning device 65 and a state in which it is easy to enter into the second storage device 1600 according to the game state. Alternatively, a selection member may be provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select either the state in which the ball is easily entered into the first variable winning device 65 or the state in which the ball is easily entered into the second storage device 1600 .

Next, the internal configuration of the second storage device 1600 according to the third embodiment will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The second storage device 1600 has a plurality of flow paths through which the balls can flow down, and is provided with a distribution device (distribution members 900 to 902 (see FIG. 96)) that distributes the falling balls to the plurality of flow paths. ing. In addition, a reservoir valve 1601a for restricting the flow of the ball (reserving the ball) is provided in a part of the plurality of flow paths (the first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96)). .

In the second storage device 1600, there are provided a specific general prize winning port (probability variable winning port) 630a and a general winning port 630b into which balls flowing down the second storage device 1600 can enter. One prize ball is paid out when a ball enters the (variable winning hole) 630a, and 15 prize balls are paid out when a ball enters the general winning hole 630b.

Furthermore, during the jackpot game, during the period from the execution of the first round of the round game to the end of the final round of the round game (hereinafter referred to as the variable winning valid period), a specific general winning opening (variable winning opening ) By the ball entering 630a (by the ball passing through the probability variable switch provided in the specific general winning opening 630a), after the jackpot game is completed, a variable probability game state that is a game state advantageous to the player is given. configured as possible. Details of the internal configuration of the second storage device 1600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG.

Furthermore, in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided at a position through which balls that have not flowed into the second storage device 1600 can pass, and a through gate 67 is provided below it. is provided. The through gate 67 is arranged at a position where a part of the ball that has flowed down the second storage device 1600, which will be described later, can also pass through (enter). A second ball entrance 640 is provided at a position where a ball that has passed (entered) the through gate 67 can enter.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a ball shot in a right-handed game flows into either the second storage device 1600 or the first variable winning device 65 by a plurality of nails. The balls distributed (passing) and flowed into the second storage device 1600 flow down inside the second storage device 1600, and can enter the specific general winning opening 630a and the general winning opening 630b.

On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the first variable winning device 65 is guided to the through gate 67 by a nail planted in the game board 13, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 640. It is configured.

Therefore, during the jackpot game, by performing a right-handed game, the ball is entered into the first variable winning device 65, and part of the balls fired by the right-handed game (5% in this embodiment) is the second It flows into reservoir 1600 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a provided in the second storage device 1600 during the variable probability winning valid period, so that after the jackpot game ends It is configured to be able to impart a game state.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment allows the player to enter a ball into the first variable prize winning device 65 and obtain a prize ball only by performing a right-handed game during a jackpot game. By entering a ball into the specific general prize winning port 630a in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to simultaneously execute a game in which a variable probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is imparted after the end of the jackpot game. becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second storage device 1600, which are opened during the jackpot game, are arranged in the right area of the game board 13, but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, the second storage device 1600 may be provided in the left area of the game board 13 (left side of the variable display unit 80), and the first variable winning device 65 may be provided in the right area of the game board 13. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select the target area during the jackpot game, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. 96 is an enlarged view enlarging the area of the two-dot chain line XCVI in FIG. 95. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 96, the right area of the game board 13 is provided with a second storage device 1600 . The second storage device 1600 includes a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 1601 to eighth flow path 1608) through which balls can flow down, a storage valve 1601a capable of storing the balls flowing down the first flow path 1601, a seventh A specific general prize winning port 630a into which the ball that has flowed down the flow path 1607 can enter, a general prize winning port 630b into which the ball that has flowed down the fifth flow path 1605 or the eighth flow path 1608 can enter, and a ball flow path A plurality of distribution members (first distribution member 900 to third distribution member 902) for distribution, and a plurality of sensors (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, passage sensors 1600c to 1600e).

Various configurations of the second storage device 1600 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, each channel formed in the second storage device 1600 will be described. The second storage device 1600 is provided with a partition wall 1611 that partitions the area inside the second storage device 1600. The left side of the partition wall 1611 in the second storage device 1600 in front view (the left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 96) A first flow path 1601 is formed in the region of , and a second flow path 1602 is formed in a region on the right side of the partition wall 1611 in the second storage device 1600 when viewed from the front (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 96).

The first flow path 1601 is formed with a passage width (approximately 15 mm) through which one ball can pass, and the storage valve 1601a described above is provided at the downstream portion thereof.

As shown in FIG. 96, the first channel 1601 is formed by a partition wall 1611 having a length (approximately 40 mm) capable of storing four balls when the storage valve 1601a is closed. The surface forming the first flow path 1601 of the partition wall 1611 is formed in a substantially arc shape to guide the ball flowing down the first flow path 1601 to the storage valve 1601a.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the first flow path 1601 from colliding with the reservoir valve 1601a while falling (gravity fall), thereby suppressing damage to the reservoir valve 1601a. It has the effect of being able to Moreover, when the storage valve 1601a is changed to the open (released) position, there is an effect that the balls stored in the first flow path 1601 can flow down smoothly.

Then, the ball that has flowed down the first channel 1601 falls onto the first distribution member 900 . The first distribution member 900 includes a third channel 1603 formed on the left side of the first distribution member 900 in front view (the left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 96) and a right side of the first distribution member 900 in front view (FIG. 96). 1604 formed on the right side of the view point of ) can alternately distribute balls to the fourth flow path 1604 . A detailed configuration of the first distribution member 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 .

The third flow path 1603 is formed by a second partition wall 1613 provided in the second storage device 1600 so that the flow direction on the downstream side is the vertical direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). A third distributing member 902 is provided at a position where the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 1603 falls. The third distribution member 902 includes a seventh channel 1607 formed on the left side of the third distribution member 902 in front view (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 96) and a right side of the third distribution member 902 in front view (FIG. 96). The spheres can be alternately distributed to the eighth flow path 1608 formed on the right side of the view point of . Note that the detailed distribution configuration of the third distribution member 902 is the same as that of the first distribution member 900 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96, the second flow path 1602 formed in the area on the right side of the partition wall 1611 is restricted by the guide nail P1 from directly flowing down the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600. In a state where the upper limit number (four) of balls is stored in the first flow path 1601, when a new ball flows into the second storage device 1600, it newly flows into the second storage device 1600. The sphere is formed so that it is guided by colliding with the sphere stored in the first channel 1601 .

Further, even if the upper limit number (four) of balls is not stored in the first flow path 1601, the guide nail P1 and the outer peripheral wall of the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 95) collide with each other. It is configured such that the ball that bounces back can flow down the second flow path 1602 . Specifically, about 5% of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 are configured to flow into the second channel 1602 . That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, about 5% of the balls fired in the right-handed game flow into the second storage device 1600, and about 5% of the balls flowed into the second storage device 1600 5% is configured to flow into the second flow path 1602 .

Regarding the inflow rate of the balls described above, the planting positions and inclinations of the plurality of nails (guide nails P1) planted on the game board 13 may be changed, or the partition wall 1611 may be changed into a different shape (for example, the partition wall 1611 can be adjusted by changing the shape to widen the distance between the top of the guide nail P1 and the guide nail P1.

The second flow path 1602 formed in this way is configured so that the balls distributed to the fourth flow path 1604 by the first distribution member 900 merge on the downstream side thereof. The second flow path 1602 and the fourth flow path 1604 are partitioned by a first partition wall 1611, so that the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 joins the fourth flow path 1604 and the first flow path 1604. In order to prevent contact with the distribution member 900, the lower end of the first partition wall 1611 is extended.

Further, although a detailed description will be given later, an operating piece 900g attached to the first distribution member 900 is provided at a position where the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 can abut. The distribution order of the first distribution member 900 can be changed by contacting the actuating piece 900g.

The ball that has flowed down the second flow path 1602 abuts on the second partition wall 1613 and flows down in the direct downward direction (perpendicular direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). It falls to the second distribution member 901 . The second distribution member 901 includes a fifth channel 1605 formed on the left side of the second distribution member 901 in front view (the left side in FIG. 96) and a right side of the second distribution member 901 in front view (FIG. 96). 1606 formed on the right side of the view point), and the balls can be alternately distributed to the sixth channel 1606. In addition, since the detailed distribution structure of the second distribution member 901 is the same as that of the first distribution member 900 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The balls distributed to the fifth flow path 1605 are guided to enter the general winning opening 630b in the same manner as the balls distributed to the eighth flow path. On the other hand, the balls distributed to the sixth channel 1606 pass through the opening (discharge port) 1610b and are discharged to the outside of the second storage device 1600. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 96, the configuration of the reservoir valve 1601a will be described. This storage valve 1601a is in a closed position in which balls cannot flow down (difficult) in the first flow path 1601 of the second storage device 1600, and in a state in which balls can flow down (easy) in the first flow path 1601. It is configured to be variable between the open position and the open position.

Specifically, the storage valve 1601a is positioned at the closed position by protruding in the front direction of the second storage device 1600 (the front direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), and is located in the back direction of the second storage device 1600 in the front view. It is composed of a shutter member that is positioned at the open position by being buried (in the depth direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), and is variable to the open position by turning on the storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 99). is configured to

The control for setting the storage device solenoid 610 to ON will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. The storage device solenoid 610 is set to turn on at the same timing (for example, in the case of the jackpot A, three seconds after the jackpot game is executed).

Next, referring to FIG. 96, the configuration of the sorting device (first sorting member 900 to third sorting member 902) will be described. The second storage device 1600 has a first distributing member 900, a second distributing member 901, and a third distributing member 902 as distributing members capable of distributing balls in the horizontal direction. The first distribution member 900 receives the balls flowing down from the first flow path 1601 in the storage section 900a or 900c. When the ball is received by the receiving portion 900 a , the weight of the ball causes the first distributing member 900 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 96 ) to distribute the ball to the third flow path 1603 . Here, each of the first distribution members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900c.

On the base body provided on the back side of the second storage device 1600, the base-side magnet 900e is arranged at a position where the magnet 900b of the first distribution member 900 is directly above (directly above from the viewpoint of FIG. 96). there is The magnet 900b of the first distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 900e are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 900e is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 900e is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the first distribution member 900 side.

The magnet 900b, like the base-side magnet 900e, is also formed of a bar-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the first distribution member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 900e. At a position where the first distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is directly above (directly above from the viewpoint of FIG. 96), the base-side magnet 900e and the first distribution portion 900 and the magnet 900b are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other, and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c faces directly upward. It will be maintained at the position rotated to either the left or the right without stopping at .

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 900e, for example, after the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates to the left to guide the ball to the third flow path 1603, the first distributing member 900 can be prevented from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the ball is guided to the third channel 1603, the containing portion 900c faces upward, and the ball flowing down from the first channel 1601 enters the containing portion 900c. The weight causes the first diverting member 900 to rotate to the right, guiding the sphere to the fourth flow path 1604 . In this way, the first distribution member 900 can alternately guide the balls flowing down from the first channel 1601 to the third channel 1603 and the fourth channel 1604 .

Here, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a case where the first distributing member 900 is stopped while being rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 900c is directed upward. In this case, when the ball flows down from the first flow path 1601, the ball is housed in the housing portion 900c, the weight of the ball causes the first distribution member 900 to rotate clockwise, and the ball is distributed to the fourth flow path 1604. be done. After the ball is distributed to the fourth flow path 1604 by the first distributing part 900, the first distributing member 900 stops at a position where the accommodating part 900a faces upward, as shown in FIG. After that, when the ball flows down from the first channel 1601 , it is accommodated in the accommodation portion 900 a and distributed to the third channel 1603 . Therefore, the balls can be distributed alternately to the third channel 1603 and the fourth channel 1604 . A third distribution member 902 is provided downstream of the third flow path 1603 , and a second distribution member 901 is provided downstream of the second flow path 1602 . The second distributing member 901 and the third distributing member 902 have the same distributing structure as the first distributing member 900 described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, an operating piece 900g is provided at the lower portion of the first distributing member 900 (on the side of the second flow path 1602), and the first distributing member 900 is rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 900c is directed upward. 96), when the ball passes through the second flow path 1602, it is configured to come into contact with this operating piece 900g. Therefore, when the ball passes through the second flow path 1602, the ball contacts the operating piece 900g, causing the first distribution member 900 to rotate clockwise to a position in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward (see FIG. 97). ).

By configuring in this way, the first distribution member 900 can change its rotation position without executing the operation of distributing the balls flowing down from the first flow path 1601 . Therefore, the direction in which the balls are distributed by the first distributing member 900, which is configured to distribute the balls alternately and regularly, can be made random, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the distribution destination of the balls. It has the effect of being able to

Next, a plurality of prize-winning ports (the specific general prize-winning port 630a and the general prize-winning port 630b) provided in the second storage device 1600 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a specific general winning opening (probability variable winning opening) 630a. The specific general winning opening (probability variable winning opening) 630a is configured such that different benefits are given according to the timing at which the ball enters. Specifically, during the jackpot game, when the ball enters while the first variable winning device 65 is open (during the variable winning effective period), a predetermined number of winning balls (one in this embodiment) is given, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variable state) in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set high is given.

On the other hand, when the ball enters at other timing (during the normal game state or during the jackpot game, while the first variable winning device 65 is not open (during the variable winning invalid period)), a predetermined number of Only prize balls (one ball in this embodiment) are given.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the release timing of the storage valve 1601a is set differently according to the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 100b, but when a specific jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) is selected, an opening period from the start of the jackpot game to the opening of the first variable winning device 65 The reservoir valve 1601a is released at the timing (three seconds after the start of the jackpot) when the ball reserved by the reservoir valve 1601a enters the specific general prize winning opening 630a during the (probability variable winning invalid period).

On the other hand, when a jackpot type other than a specific jackpot type (for example, jackpot B) is selected, a jackpot game is started, and the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened during the period (definite variable prize valid period). The storage valve 1601a is released at the timing (10 seconds after the start of the jackpot) when the ball stored by the valve 1601a enters the specific general winning hole 630a.

As a result, it is possible to change the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a according to the jackpot type selected when winning the jackpot while the ball is stored in the storage valve 1601a. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the timing at which the reservoir valve is released after winning the jackpot, which has the effect of enhancing the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the release timing of the storage valve 1601a is set differently depending on the type of jackpot, but the timing at which the ball stored by the storage valve 1601a enters the specific general winning opening 630a can be set to a period in which the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is not started during the jackpot game (probable variable winning invalid period) and a period in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (valid variable winning period). Well, for example, the release timing of the storage valve 1601a may be fixed, and the length of the opening period of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game may be set to be different for each jackpot type. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to vary the timing at which the ball enters the specific general prize winning opening 630a according to the jackpot type, as in the third embodiment.

Also, depending on the jackpot type, both the release timing and the opening period of the storage valve 1601a may be set differently, and conditions other than the jackpot type (for example, the game state when the jackpot is won (normal game The release timing of the above-described storage valve 1601a and the opening period in the jackpot game may be set differently depending on the state, variable probability game state, etc.). As a result, it is possible to complicate the timing at which the ball enters the specific general prize winning opening 630a when winning the jackpot, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing at which the ball enters. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Further, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, if the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is during the probability variable winning valid period, the probability variable state is given after the jackpot ends. This fixed variable winning valid period specifically includes the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open (round game period), and the conditions for ending one round (10 balls are entered, or 30 seconds have elapsed). ) is established until the first variable winning device 65 is released in the next round (interval period).

Therefore, even during the interval period (the period in which the first variable winning device 65 is closed) during the jackpot game, when the ball enters the specific general prize winning port 630a, the probability variable state is given after the jackpot game ends. be done. In other words, in the configuration used in the third embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific winning opening (for example, the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65) opened during the jackpot game, the jackpot It is possible to set a period (a period in which the variable probability state can be imparted) that is continuously advantageous to the player during the jackpot game, as compared with the case of providing a specific area to which the variable probability state is imparted after the game ends.

In addition, in the third embodiment, a specific area (specific general winning opening 630a) that can give a variable probability state by passing a ball is opened during a jackpot game (for example, the first variable winning device 65 Since it is provided other than the specific winning port 65a), the ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, that is, the ball (waste ball) that had no merit for the player in the past, will cause the probability variable state. A game will be played to determine whether or not it is possible to acquire As a result, during the jackpot game, the game of winning the prize balls by entering the balls into the first variable prize winning device 65 and the game of entering the balls into the specific general prize winning port 630a to obtain the probability variable state are simultaneously progressed. becomes possible. Therefore, since it is possible to simultaneously provide a plurality of game features to the player, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this case, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the specific general winning opening 630a are placed at positions where winning is possible in a game aiming at the same area (right-handed game in this embodiment). should be provided. By doing so, it is possible for the player to easily proceed with a plurality of games at the same time.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be provided in the right side area, and the specific general winning opening 630a may be provided in the normal game area (left side area). good. As a result, a right-handed game is played during the round period (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open) during the jackpot game, and the interval period (the end condition of one round (10 balls entered, or 30 Seconds elapsed) is established until the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the next round), a normal game (left-handed game) is performed, and a ball is entered into the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be constructed so as to execute a ball-throwing game.

This makes it possible to complicate the game during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game due to the monotonous game.

In addition, the general prize winning opening 630b provided in the second storage device 1600 is configured such that 15 prize balls are paid out when balls enter.

Next, referring to FIGS. 96 to 98, the flow of spheres entering the second storage device 1600 will be described. FIG. 96 is an enlarged view of the area surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI in FIG. 95, showing an example of the case where the reservoir valve 1601a is closed. As shown in FIG. 96, the spheres that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 flow down the first channel 1601 and are retained (retained) on the retention valve 1601a positioned in the closed state. The first channel 1601 is configured to be able to store four balls, and the balls that flow into the second storage device 1600 with the four balls stored in the first channel 1601 are stored in the first stream. It comes into contact with the spheres stored in the channel 1601 and flows down to the second channel 1602 (see the arrow in the drawing).

In the state shown in FIG. 96, the first distribution member 900 is rotated to the left, and the operating piece 900g is positioned at a position where the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 abuts. The ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 pushes up the operating piece 900g in the traveling direction of the ball (leftward from the viewpoint of FIG. 96).

Here, the state after the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 pushes up the operating piece 900g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is an enlarged view of the area surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI in FIG. 95, showing an example in which the state of FIG. 96 is progressed. As shown in FIG. 97, in the state shown in FIG. 96, the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 pushes up the operating piece 900g attached to the first distribution member 900, and the first distribution member 900 rotates to the right. change to a moving state. Note that when the first distribution member 900 is rotated to the right, the operating piece 900g moves to a position where the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602 does not abut (slightly abuts). The ball flowing down the path 1602 will not rotate the first distribution member 900 to the left.

Thus, in the third embodiment, the direction in which the first distribution member 900 distributes the balls can be changed by the balls flowing down the second flow path 1602 . Further, when the first distribution member 900 is changed by the ball flowing down the second flow path 1602, the first distribution member 900 is rotated rightward. The state in which the first distribution member 900 rotates to the right side is a state in which the ball that has fallen on the first distribution member 900 is distributed to the left side, which is advantageous for the player in the third embodiment. It is possible to reduce the number of balls required to enter the specific general winning hole 630a.

Specifically, the balls that enter the specific general winning hole 630a are the balls that flow down through the first flow path 1601, the third flow path 1603, and the seventh flow path 1607. First, the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 1601 is distributed to the third flow path 1603 with a probability of 1/2 by the first distribution member 900, and the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 1603 is distributed to the third distribution. By the member 902, it is distributed to the seventh channel 1607 with a probability of 1/2.

In other words, in order to ensure that the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 1601 enters the specific general winning hole 630a, it is necessary to flow down four balls at maximum. However, by rotating the first distribution member 900 to the right, the ball that first falls on the first distribution member 900 is distributed to the third flow path 1603, so that the specific general prize can be reliably won. Three balls are required to enter the opening 630a, and the number of balls required to enter the specific general winning opening 630a can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 97, the description continues. The ball that has flowed down the second channel 1602 falls onto the second distribution member 901 . In the state shown in FIG. 97, the second distributing member 901 is rotating to the right, so the balls falling on the second distributing member 901 are distributed to the fifth flow path 1605, and the general winning opening 630b Enter the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 98, a state in which the storage valve 1601a is changed to the open (released) state and the ball stored in the first flow path 1601 flows down will be described. FIG. 98 is an enlarged view of the area surrounded by the two-dot chain line XCVI in FIG. 95, showing an example in which the reservoir valve 1601a is opened (released) in the state of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 98 , when the storage valve 1601 a is opened, the balls (four balls) stored in the first flow path 1601 flow down to the first distribution member 900 . In the third embodiment, the first channel 1601 is formed so that the balls stored in the first channel 1601 in a daisy chain reach the first distribution member 900 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. It is

In the state shown in FIG. 98, of the balls stored in the first flow path 1601, the ball stored first (the ball stored on the furthest downstream side) wins the specific general winning opening 630a. , the first distribution member 900 and the third distribution member 902 are positioned.

The time required for the ball stored on the most downstream side of the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning hole 630a is 1.5 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is opened (released). be. Further, as described above, the interval at which the balls stored in the first flow path 1601 reach the first distribution member 900 is 0.5 seconds, so the balls stored in the first flow path 1601 The time required for the second ball (the second ball from the downstream side) to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is two seconds after the storage valve 1601a is opened (released). Similarly, the time required for the third ball (the third ball from the downstream side) stored in the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is determined by the time required for the storage valve 1601a to open (release ), and the time required for the fourth ball (top ball) stored in the first flow path 1601 to enter the specific general winning hole 630a is the storage valve 1601a. 3 seconds after is released (released).

As described above, in the present embodiment, four balls can be stored in the first channel 1601 in the second storage device 1600, and the balls can be reliably placed in the specific general prize winning opening 630a. It is configured so that a maximum of four first flow paths 1601 must flow down in order to make the ball enter the . Therefore, by storing the balls up to the upper limit (four) in the second storage device 1600, when the storage valve 1601a is opened (released), the balls can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

As a result, for example, even if the reserved memory number of special symbols reaches the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to accumulate the balls in the second holding device 1600, and the game can be operated. has the effect of increasing

In the present embodiment, the number of balls that can be reliably entered into the specific general winning hole 630a can be stored. In this case, when the storage valve 1601a is opened (released) by the rotating state of each distribution member (the first distribution member 900 and the third distribution member 902), the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. Since it changes whether the ball is hit or not, it is possible to make the player watch the flow of the ball and prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

Furthermore, in this case, by causing the ball to flow down the second flow path 1602, the rotation position of the first distribution member 900 is set to a rotation position (position rotated to the right) that is advantageous to the player. , the number of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the spheres flowing into the second storage device 1600 are first guided to the first flow path 1601 and stored in the first flow path 1601. Between the opening 1610a and the area (first flow path 1601) in which the balls can be stored, a plurality of flow paths through which the balls can flow down are provided, and part of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 is stored. Alternatively, distribution means (means for randomly distributing balls ) may be provided.

By using such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the flow of the balls in the second storage device 1600, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game due to the monotonous game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first distribution member 900 is provided with an operating piece 900g, and the ball flows down the second flow path 1602 to move the first distribution member 900 to a rotation position that is advantageous to the player ( Although a configuration for rotating is used, other distributing members may be provided with similar operating pieces. Further, the operation piece may be operated to rotate the distribution member to a rotation position that is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, even when a distribution member capable of regularly distributing balls is used, it is possible to complicate the flow of balls. In addition, since the balls flow down through a plurality of channels in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to change the number of balls required to enter the specific general winning opening 630a. The game can be continued so that the ball can be entered into the specific general winning hole 630a by the number, and the operation of the game can be improved.

Next, various sensors (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, passage sensors 1600c to 1600e) provided in the second storage device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. Signals output from various sensors (inflow detection sensor 1600a, upper limit detection sensor 1600b, passage sensors 1600c to 1600e) provided in the second storage device 1600 are output to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113, and output The number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600, the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600, the number of balls passing through the flow path in the second storage device 1600, and the number of balls passing through the second storage device 1600 based on the signals The number of balls stored in the 1600 is configured to be manageable.

The inflow detection sensor 1600a is a sensor that detects a ball passing through an opening (inflow port) 1610a of the second storage device 1600. FIG. The number of balls that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 can be grasped based on the signal output from the inflow detection sensor 1600a.

Next, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b is a sensor that detects that the number of balls stored in the first channel 1601 of the second storage device 1600 has reached the upper limit (four). This upper limit detection sensor is configured to output a detection signal when a ball, which is an object to be detected, is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time (two seconds). This prevents the erroneous detection signal from being output when the ball passes through the first flow path 1601, and reliably detects the state in which the ball is accumulated (stayed) in the first flow path 1601. can be done.

The passage sensor 1600c is a sensor that detects that a ball has passed through the first flow passage 1601, the passage sensor 1600d is a sensor that detects that a ball has passed through the second flow passage 1602, and the passage sensor 1600e is a sensor that detects the opening. It is a sensor that detects that a ball has passed through the portion 1610b.

In this way, by providing a sensor for grasping the passage or storage status of the balls related to the second storage device 1600, for example, each prize opening provided in the second storage device 1600 (specific general prize opening 630a and general By combining this information with the information indicating the number of balls entering the winning opening 630b), it becomes possible to easily grasp that a problem such as ball clogging has occurred in the second storage device 1600. FIG.

In this embodiment, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b can detect that the balls stored in the first flow path 1601 have reached the upper limit. You may arrange|position a detection sensor so that the number of may be grasped|ascertained. This makes it possible to grasp the state of storage of balls in the second storage device 1600 in more detail.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration of the third embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are modified. , the passage solenoid 611 connected to the input/output port of the main controller 110 has been removed, and various changes have been made to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp controller 113. The difference is that the sensor group (inflow detection sensor 1600a to passage sensor 1600e) is electrically connected. Other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, various sensor groups 229 are electrically connected to the input/output port 225 in the third embodiment. The sensor group 229 includes an inflow detection sensor 1600a for detecting the inflow of balls into the second storage device 1600, and a storage valve 1601a provided in the second storage device 1600. The upper limit detection sensor 1600b that detects that the It is composed of a passing sensor 1600d for detecting a passing ball and a passing sensor 1600e for detecting a ball passing through the sixth flow path 1606 in the second storage device 1600. Detection signals from the various sensors described above are output by an audio lamp. It is output to the control device 113 .

The sound lamp control device 113 receives detection signals output from the various sensors described above, thereby making it possible to determine whether or not the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 is normally discharged. Specifically, the number of balls that have flowed into the second storage device 1600 is calculated based on the signal output from the inflow detection sensor 1600a. Then, the number of balls passing through the sixth flow path 1606, that is, the number of balls discharged to the outside of the second storage device 1600 is calculated based on the signal output from the passage sensor 1600e.

Further, the number of balls entered into the specific general winning opening 630a and the general winning opening 630b is calculated based on the winning information command output from the main controller 110. FIG. This makes it possible to compare the total number of balls that have entered the second storage device 1600 and the total number of balls that have been discharged from the second storage device 1600 . More specifically, the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 are calculated in chronological order, and a predetermined time difference (about 5 seconds), that is, If the increase and decrease in the number of balls coincide with each other with a time difference corresponding to the time required for the game balls to flow down normally in the second storage device 1600, it is determined to be normal.

In addition, since a maximum of four balls can be stored in the second storage device 1600, in the normal game state (state in which the storage valve 1601a is closed), it flows into the second storage device 1600 When comparing the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 with the number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600, an error of 4 balls is allowed, and in the jackpot game state (state in which the storage valve 1601a is opened), the second Since there are no more balls stored in the 2-storage device 1600, it is better to perform the comparison without considering the tolerance (for 4 balls) mentioned above.

Furthermore, by providing a sensor capable of detecting the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600, it is possible to easily grasp the presence of balls illegally stored in the second storage device 1600.

For example, when the ball is intentionally retained in the second storage device 1600 and the player is in an advantageous state (a state in which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a and the probability variation is given) An act of entering a ball into the general winning opening 630a, or one ball in the general winning opening 630b in which more balls are set to be paid out than other general winning openings (general winning opening 63) by entering the ball. It is possible to discover the act of repeatedly entering the ball.

It should be noted that the method of monitoring the flow of balls in the second storage device 1600 based on the various signals described above is not limited to the details described above. In this embodiment, the total number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the total number of balls discharged from the second storage device 1600 are calculated to determine whether or not there are balls staying in the second storage device 1600. Although it is possible, for example, the number of balls that flowed down the first flow path 1601, the number of balls that flowed down the third flow path 1603, the number of balls that flowed down the fourth flow path 1604, and the number of balls that entered the specific general winning opening 630a It is also possible to calculate the number of balls and determine whether or not balls that can enter the specific general winning hole 630a (balls that have flowed down the first flow path 1601a) are staying in the second storage device 1600. good. When using such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the number of balls stored in the first channel 1601 by the storage valve 1601a if the storage valve 1601a is in the open/closed state and the storage valve 1601a is in the closed state. should be Thus, it is possible to properly grasp the situation in which the ball is illegally entered into the winning hole (specific general winning hole 630a) that is most advantageous to the player among the winning holes provided in the second storage device 1600.例文帳に追加becomes possible.

In the above-described example, the illegal entry of a ball into the specific general winning opening 630a is targeted, but the illegal entry of a ball into the general winning opening 630b may be targeted.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 100(a). FIG. 100(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 100(a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that the content of the first win type selection table 202b is changed, and an opening scenario setting table 202e is added. There is a difference.

Here, with reference to FIG.100(b), the 1st winning classification selection table 202b in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 100(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first win type selection table 202b in the third embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment is the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18(b)) in the first embodiment described above, with the addition of jackpot C as a jackpot type and each The difference is that the contents stipulated for the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot C) have been changed, and the hit of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot C) has been changed. However, other configurations are the same as the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". are stipulated. This jackpot A is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for eight rounds and the timing at which the reservoir valve 1601a is opened is set 3 seconds after the start of the jackpot. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 69" in association with the jackpot B. This jackpot B is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds and the timing at which the reservoir valve 1601a is opened is set 10 seconds after the start of the jackpot. The jackpot C is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". This jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for two rounds and the timing at which the reservoir valve 1601a is opened is set one second after the start of the jackpot.

Thus, since the number of rounds in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues and the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is opened are set according to the jackpot type, according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won It is possible to give different advantageous states to the player by pressing the button.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. is defined in correspondence with the jackpot B in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is defined in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". there is In addition, since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C defined corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the above-described special symbol 1, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special pattern 1, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 50%, the jackpot B is 20%, and the jackpot C is 30%. In the case of winning, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 20%, the jackpot B at 70%, and the jackpot C at 10%.

Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 102(b), but among the jackpots A to C, during the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the balls stored in the storage valve 1601a Big wins B and C are the big wins in which the storage valve 1601a is released at the timing when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a.

The total ratio of the big win B and the big win C is set to be 50% in the case of winning the big win in the special pattern 1 and 80% in the case of winning the big win in the special pattern 2.例文帳に追加That is, the special symbol game using the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player than the special symbol game using the special symbol 1 (probably variable state is likely to be imparted).

It should be noted that the above-described content is strictly the ratio of the balls stored by the storage valve 1601a entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. That is, as in the third embodiment, when the specific general winning opening 630a is provided at a position where the ball fired in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game can enter, during the jackpot game There is also a possibility that the ball shot to (the ball that is not stored in the storage valve 1601a) enters the specific general prize winning opening 630a.

As a result, even if the ball stored in the storage valve 1601a enters the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing other than the timing at which the probability variable state can be given, or if the jackpot is won in a state where the ball is not stored in the storage valve 1601a. Even if there is, it is possible to enter the ball into the specific general prize winning opening 630a during the jackpot game. In this case, the longer the jackpot game period is, the more balls are shot during the jackpot game, so it is possible to increase the probability of winning the specific general prize-winning opening 630a during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 101(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third embodiment. The variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal middle jackpot table 202d1, which defines a variation pattern when a special symbol jackpot is won among the variation patterns of the special symbols in the normal game state, and a special symbol selection table 202d1 in the normal game state. Among the variation patterns, a normal middle-out table 202d2 defining a variation pattern when the special symbol jackpot is not won, and a special symbol jackpot among the special symbol variation patterns in the time-saving (probability variable) game state. A time-saving (probability variable) medium jackpot table 202d3 that defines a variation pattern in the case of winning, and a variation pattern in the case of not winning a special symbol jackpot among the special symbol variation patterns in the time-saving (probability variation) gaming state. A stipulated time-saving (probability variable) medium-out table 202d4 is set.

Each of the tables 202d1 to 202d4 defines, for example, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", and various types of "loss super reach" as fluctuation patterns for failure. As a variation pattern for the jackpot, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

Here, with reference to FIG.101(b) and FIG.101(c), detailed description is given about the variation pattern referred to in the time saving (probability variation) gaming state. FIG. 101(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving (probability variable) medium jackpot table 202d3, and FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), as a variation type corresponding to when a jackpot is won during a time-saving (variable) game, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". 5 seconds) are associated with each other, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “100 to 198” as a variation type corresponding to when a jackpot is won during a time-saving (variable probability) game. Long (60 seconds) is associated and defined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), as a variation type corresponding to the case where the jackpot is not won during the time saving (probability variation) game, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 150". Normal (3 seconds) is associated and defined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "151 to 198" as the variation type corresponding to the case where the jackpot is not won during the time saving (variable probability) game. is defined in association with an out-long (60 seconds).

Thus, during the time-saving (probability variable) game, it is set so that the variation pattern in which a relatively short variation time is defined is likely to be selected, and the number of variations per unit time is increased compared to the normal game state. is set. Although not shown, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as a normal variation pattern in the normal medium/jackpot table 202d1 and the normal medium/loss table 202d2.

On the other hand, as described above, even during time saving (probability variation), a variation pattern with a long variation time is configured to be selectable. This is the time provided for executing an effect to prompt the player whether or not the result of the lottery of special symbols is a big hit.

In addition, in the third embodiment, during time saving (probability variation), a right-handed game is executed, so it is a game state in which a plurality of balls can be stored by the closed storage valve 1601a. In this game state in which the balls can be stored, if the next big win is won in a short period of time, there is a possibility that the big win game is started without the balls being stored in the storage valve 1601a.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, a variation pattern with a long variation time is configured to be executable during time saving (probability variation). As a result, during the time-saving (probability variable) game state in which the balls can be stored in the storage valve 1601a, the jackpot is won in a short period of time, and the jackpot game is started without the balls being stored in the storage valve 1601a. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the storage.

The configuration used in the third embodiment may be used as long as it is configured to prevent the game state in which the balls can be stored in the storage valve 1601a from ending in a short period of time. For example, a variation pattern with a long variation time may always be set until the variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) after the time saving (probability variation) state is started, or the special symbol A variation pattern with a long variation time may be set only when the result of winning is a big hit. In addition, until the number of balls stored by the storage valve 1601a reaches a predetermined number (eg, 4), it is easy to select a variation pattern with a long variation time. may be configured to facilitate selection of a variation pattern with a short .

Next, referring to FIG. 102, the release scenario setting table 202e in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the release scenario setting table 202e in the third embodiment. This open scenario setting table 202e defines the setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the first win type selection table 202b and the game state (usually, variable probability) when the jackpot is won.

Here, the open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1 defined in the open scenario setting table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 102(b). FIG. 102(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1. This open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the normal game state. Each period is set.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is set to "10 seconds", the interval period is set to "4 seconds", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds". , the opening period is set to "1 second", the interval period is set to "5 seconds", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds". The interval period is set to "2 seconds" and the ending period is set to "1 second".

Thus, by changing the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period corresponding to the jackpot type, it is possible to set the ball entry timing to the specific general prize winning opening 630a during the jackpot game in a complicated manner. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102(c), the open scenario setting table 202e also includes an open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202e2. FIG. 102(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the open scenario setting table (variable probability) 202e2. This open scenario table (variable probability) 202e2 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is won during the variable probability (shorter working hours) state, and the set time is different from the above-described open scenario setting table (normal) 202e1. They are the same table otherwise.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is set to "1 second", the interval period is set to "1 second", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds", and the jackpot type is set to jackpot B. , the opening period is set to "4 seconds", the interval period is set to "1 second", and the ending period is set to "5 seconds". The interval period is set to "20 seconds" and the ending period is set to "1 second".

By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won during the variable probability (time reduction), the timing at which the reservoir valve 1601a is released is specified during the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. It is the timing when the ball can be entered into the general winning hole 630a. In addition, in the jackpot C, since the interval time between rounds is set to 20 seconds, the jackpot period is longer than the jackpot game when the jackpot C is selected in the jackpot won in the normal state, and the probability is variable. It is possible to increase the probability that a ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a during the period in which the state can be granted.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability variable state is given by the jackpot winning during the probability variable (shorter time) state higher than the probability that the probability variable state is granted by the jackpot winning during the normal state. An advantageous game state can be easily provided continuously, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment includes an operation counter 203k, a remaining ball timer flag 203m, a remaining ball timer 203n, a probability variable effective flag 203o, and a probability variable effective timer provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. 203p is deleted, counter 203r during time saving and probability variation winning valid flag 203s are added.

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time short period (variation number of special symbols) in the time saving state of normal symbols. This time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag 203h is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 112). That is, in the present embodiment, if the probability variation gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, the time-saving state of 100 normal symbols is provided.

The variable probability winning flag 203s is a flag for setting a period of time during which a variable probability state is given after the jackpot game ends when a ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a during the jackpot game. When the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a while the variable winning valid flag 203s is set to ON, in addition to the payout of the prize ball (one in this embodiment) preset as the general winning opening , A probability variable state is given after the end of the jackpot game.

This probability variable winning valid flag 203s is set to ON when the first round is started in jackpot control processing 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) (S1156 in FIG. 111), and it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. (S1109 in FIG. 111: Yes), it is set to OFF (S1157 in FIG. 111). In addition, when the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a in a state where the variable winning valid flag 203s is not set to ON (set to OFF), the winning ball preset as the general winning opening ( 1 in this embodiment) is paid out.

Next, returning to FIG. 99, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. The ROM 222 in the third embodiment has an expectation level display selection table 222b added to the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. A detailed description of the degree-of-expectation display selection table 222b will be given later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, description will be given of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, when a player wins a jackpot in a variable probability (time saving) state in which a player executes a right-handed game, a variable probability state is given after the end of this big win. An effect that displays the degree of expectation (variable expectation display effect) has been added.

This probability variation expectation level display effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 104(a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the variable probability (time saving) state will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts, as in the first embodiment described above. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

In the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, is displayed. In addition, the small area Ds3 displays "right-handed display (game guidance display)" indicating that the current game state is a game state in which a right-handed game is played, and the small region Ds2 displays "right-handed display (game guidance display)". Guidance (game guide display) to the effect that if a ball flows into the second storage device 1600, it will be advantageous to the player. It is enlarged and displayed as an arrow showing the path through which the ball flows into the right warp (the entrance of the second storage device 1600).

By performing the game guidance display in this way, the player can store balls in the second storage device 1600 (closed state) in addition to the game of winning a big hit with a normal special symbol during the variable probability (time saving) state. It is possible to easily recognize that a game is being played in which balls are stored by the storage valve 1601a, thereby preventing the player from being confused about the game.

In addition, as a game guidance display in the variable probability (time saving) state, if it is a configuration that guides the game in which the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 during the variable probability (time saving) state, even if it uses a configuration other than that used in this embodiment good. For example, a display device (sub display device) different from the display device that displays the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol may be provided. In this case, an effect corresponding to the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 should be displayed. Moreover, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the effect executed by the second display device may be lively. As a result, when the special symbol is lost, the player will pay attention to the sub-display device, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special symbol has been lost in the lottery.

Furthermore, based on the result of the pre-reading of the special symbols, the content of the effect displayed on the sub-display device may be determined. Also, the display device (third pattern display device 81) displaying the third pattern and the sub-display device may be configured to be movable respectively, and control may be executed to move each display device according to the game situation. good.

As a result, the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of simultaneously executing a plurality of games (a game in which a lottery for a big win with special symbols and a game in which balls are flowed into the second storage device 1600) is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to reliably inform the player of the game result that becomes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104(b), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of winning the special symbol jackpot in the variable probability (time saving) state will be described. FIG. 104(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the third pattern display device. As shown in FIG. 104(b), in the variable probability (shorter working hours) state, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the same numbers of the third symbols are displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the small area DS2, the degree of expectation that the variable probability state will be given after the end of the current jackpot game is displayed ("80%" in the figure).

Here, the probability variation expectation level display displayed in the small area Ds2 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment operates during a predetermined period of time during a jackpot game (during a jackpot game (during operation of the conditional device), while the first variable winning device 65 is open (accessory continuous operation device is activated). By entering the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a during the middle)), it is configured such that a variable probability state is provided after the jackpot game ends.

A reservoir valve 1601a is provided in the flow path (first flow path 1601) that allows the ball to enter the specific general winning port 630a in the second storage device 1600, and the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 is It is configured so that it can be stored. This reservoir valve 1601a wins a special symbol jackpot, is canceled (opened) after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the case of jackpot A) has passed since the start of the jackpot game, and the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a. state.

This second storage device 1600 is configured to be able to store a maximum of four balls, and when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) and the first ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, the storage valve A flow path is formed so that the ball enters 1.5 seconds after the 1601a is released (opened). Next, when the second ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, two seconds after the retention valve 1601a is released (opened), the third ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. In the case, 2.5 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened), if the fourth ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, 3 seconds after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) A flow path is formed so that the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a after seconds.

That is, in the third embodiment, the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 until the jackpot is won, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened), and the length of the jackpot game period are specified. The degree of expectation that a ball enters the general prize winning opening 630a and a variable probability state is given changes.

Returning to FIG. 104(b), the description is continued. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the selected jackpot type and the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m as the ball storage information in the second storage device 1600 are used. to select a numerical value specified in an expectation degree display selection table 222b, which will be described later, and display the numerical value in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 as the probability variation expectation degree.

In this way, by displaying, as a numerical value, the degree of expectation that a variable probability state will be provided after the end of the current jackpot game when winning the jackpot, for example, if the degree of probability variable expectation is high, the player can feel a sense of security. On the other hand, when the probability variation expectation is low, it is possible to actively play a game in which balls flow into the second storage device 1600 during a big win game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the probability variation expectation to the player in a state where it is determined in advance whether or not the probability variation state is granted, the specific general winning opening 630a at the timing when the probability variation state can actually be granted Since the possibility of the ball hitting the ball is displayed as the degree of expectation, it is possible to perform highly reliable numerical display for the player.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the winning jackpot and the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m are used as information when selecting the numerical value of the probability variation expectation, but other information is used. may be used to calculate the probability variation expectation. For example, the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 can be detected, and the number of balls information indicating the number of balls stored when a big win is won, or the number of balls provided in the second storage device 1600. It is configured to be able to detect the distribution status of a plurality of distribution parts, and the numerical value of the probability variable expectation is calculated using the ball number information indicating the number of balls required until the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be configured to select. Thus, by selecting a numerical value based on a plurality of information, the reliability of the numerical value of probability variation expectation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is increased, and the highly reliable numerical value is notified to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being lowered due to the display of numerical values with low reliability.

Here, the expectation level display selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the degree-of-expectation display selection table 222b. This expectation degree display selection table 222b is a table referred to when selecting numerical values for the variable probability degree of expectation display effect described above with reference to FIG. Each numerical value is selected according to the setting status of the flow flag 223m and the value of the effect counter.

This expectation level display selection table 222b, when it is determined that the jackpot is won (S5002: Yes) in the time saving display process (S1852 in FIG. 118) to be described later, and the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to ON ( S5003: No), it is referred (S5005).

Specifically, when the winning jackpot type is jackpot A and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the production counter is set to "50" corresponding to the range of "0 to 159". , "40" is set corresponding to the range of "160 to 198". In addition, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to OFF in the jackpot A, the value of the production counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159", and "40" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". and "50" are set respectively.

In addition, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot B and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the effect counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159", "80", "160" "60" is set corresponding to the range of "198". Also, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to OFF in the big win B, the value of the effect counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159", and "60" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". and "80" are set respectively.

Furthermore, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C and the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, the value of the production counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159", and "20" is changed to "160". "10" is set corresponding to the range of "198". In addition, when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to OFF in the jackpot C, the value of the production counter corresponds to the range of "0 to 159", and "10" corresponds to the range of "160 to 198". and "20" are set respectively.

As described above, the expectation degree display selection table 222b is configured so that various numerical values are selected based on the jackpot type selected when winning the jackpot and the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m. . Next, numerical values indicating the degree of probability variation expectation selected in the degree of expectation display selection table 222b will be described.

When the jackpot is won in the variable probability (time saving) state, each period (opening period, interval period between rounds, ending period) during the jackpot game is set by the open scenario setting table (variable probability) 202e2 (Fig. 102(c) reference). As described above, among the jackpot types from jackpot A to jackpot C, jackpot B is the jackpot type that is most likely to be given a variable probability state after the jackpot game ends, followed by jackpot A and jackpot C in that order. ing.

Further, the special sphere flow flag 223m, which will be described later in detail, indicates that the balls have flowed down the second flow path in a state in which the maximum number of balls is not stored in the first flow path of the second storage device 1600. When the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON, it indicates that the first distribution unit 900 in the second storage device 1600 is positioned to guide the ball to the left. be. Therefore, when three balls pass through the first sorting section 900 at most, it indicates that the balls enter the specific general winning hole 630a.

In this way, since the numerical value indicating the degree of probability variation expectation is selected based on the determination result of how much the conditions for easily imparting the probability variation state to the player are satisfied, it is possible to display a highly reliable numerical value to the player. can be done.

In addition, depending on the value of the performance counter, it is possible to select either numerical value when the special ball flow flag 223m is set to ON or when it is set to OFF. This is to prevent the player from surely grasping the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m. This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy whether or not the ball enters the specific general prize winning opening 630a when the ball flows into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

In addition, even if the value indicating the probability variation expectation display selection table 222b is the lowest jackpot C, when winning in the probability variation (time reduction) state, the inter-round interval period is set to 20 (See FIG. 102(c)). This is 10 times longer than when the jackpot C is won in the normal game state. As a result, the period of the jackpot game is lengthened, thereby increasing the possibility of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

In this way, even when the numerical value selected in the variable probability expectation display selection table 222b is low, the ball can flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game and enter the specific general winning opening 630a by itself. Since it is possible to enter the ball, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the entrance of the second storage device 1600 is provided in the same area as the first variable winning device 65 opened during the jackpot game (area targeted in the right-handed game). Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at both the first variable winning device 65 and the second storage device 1600 at the same time by playing a right-handed game during a jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, during the jackpot game, a right-handed game is performed, and most of the balls that have not flowed into the second storage device 1600 enter the first variable winning device 65. Each device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second storage 1600) is arranged, it is possible to suppress the game aiming only at the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game.

In addition, during the jackpot game, the ball can flow into the second storage device 1600 even during the inter-round interval in which the first variable winning device 65 is closed, so the player shoots the ball during the inter-round interval. It is possible to prevent the behavior from stopping.

Returning to FIG. 99, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 in the third embodiment does not have the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and has a storage upper limit flag 223k, a special spherical flow flag 223m, and a storage valve open flag 223n added. ing.

The storage upper limit flag 223k is a flag indicating that the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 has reached the upper limit. Specifically, the upper limit detection sensor 1600b (see FIG. 96) provided on the upstream side of the first flow path shown in FIG. 96 detects the stagnation of the ball to detect that the upper limit has been reached. This storage condition flag 223k is set to ON (S4904 in FIG. 117) when it is determined in the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 117) that the number of stored balls is at the upper limit (S4904 in FIG. 117). In S1811), when the opening command is received, it is set to OFF (S3911 in FIG. 115).

The special sphere flag 223m is a flag indicating that the sphere has passed through the second channel 1602 (see FIG. 96) while the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to ON. Specifically, even though there is a space for storing the ball in the first flow path 1601 (see FIG. 96), the rebounding of the ball causes the ball to flow down the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96). 96) is detected, the flag is set to ON. This special ball flow flag 223m is determined in the storage state determination process (S1851 in FIG. 117) that the stored ball is not the upper limit (S4902 in FIG. 117: No), and the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) is (S4905 in FIG. 117: Yes) is set to ON (S4907 in FIG. 117), and in the command determination process (S1811 in FIG. 115), it is turned OFF when an opening command is received. It is set (S3912 in FIG. 115). Then, by the display processing during time saving (S1852 in FIG. 118), it is referred to when selecting a numerical value displayed in the probability variation expectation degree display effect based on the expectation degree display selection table 222b (S5005 in FIG. 118).

In the third embodiment, even if the number of balls stored in the first channel 1601 (see FIG. 96) does not reach the upper limit (4), the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 is Since the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96) is configured to flow down (approximately 5%), the setting state of the special ball flow flag 223m is used for production, but for example, the first flow path 1601 ( 96) does not reach the upper limit, and the flow path is formed so that the balls do not flow down the second flow path 1602 (see FIG. 96), When the special ball current flag 223m is set to ON, an abnormality notification may be made.

The storage valve open flag 223n is a flag indicating that the storage valve is open, and is specifically set to ON when a storage valve open command is received from the main controller 110 (S3914 in FIG. 115). , is set to OFF when a storage valve closing command is received from main controller 110 (S3915 in FIG. 115). While the storage valve open flag 223n is set to ON, the storage state determination process (S1851) shown in FIG. 117 is skipped. Thereby, the load of control processing can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, while the storage valve open flag 223n is set to ON, the storage state determination process (S1851) is skipped. is set to ON, the storage upper limit sensor 1600b (see FIG. 96) detects the retention of the ball, or the storage valve open flag 223n is set to OFF, but the first flow A process may be executed to determine that there is an abnormality when it is detected that the ball passes through the path. By executing such a process, it is possible to easily grasp an operation abnormality of the storage valve 1601a or a fraudulent act within the second storage device 1600. FIG.

Furthermore, by providing a sensor (state detection sensor) that can actually detect the operating state of the storage valve 1601a (whether it is in the open (released) state), the main controller 110 can detect the operation of the storage valve 1601a. It is possible to comprehend by comparing the operation instruction and the actual operating state of the storage valve 1601a, and it is possible to discriminate between the abnormal operation of the storage valve 1601a and the fraudulent activity in the second storage device 1600. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the process of intensively monitoring the balls entering the specific general winning opening 630a is used, but the balls entering other winning openings (for example, the general winning opening 630b) are used. A process for monitoring may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the operation flow of each device in the jackpot game of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 106(a) is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when the jackpot is won in the normal game state (normal state) and the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, and FIG. 106(b) is a probability variable It is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when a jackpot is won in a game state (probability variable state) and jackpot A is selected as a jackpot type.

First, the operation of each device when a jackpot is won in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 106(a). Jackpot A is a jackpot of eight rounds as shown in FIG. 100(b), and the reservoir valve 1601a is released (opened) three seconds after the start of the jackpot game. Also, when jackpot A is selected in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 102(b), the opening period is set to 10 seconds, the inter-round interval period is set to 4 seconds, and the ending period is set to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 106(a), the storage device (storage valve 1601a) is opened at the timing after 3 seconds from the start of the jackpot game. Since this timing is still during the jackpot opening period, even if the ball enters the specific general prize winning opening 630a, the probability variable state is not given. Even if the upper limit of four balls is stored in the second storage device 1600, the storage device (storage valve 1601a) is in an open state by the time the fourth ball reaches the specific general winning opening 630a. Since it is configured to be 3 seconds after it becomes, even if the player performs an act of storing the ball in the second storage device 1600 to the upper limit in the normal state, the stored ball will cause the probability variable state is not given.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, and the time saving state ends in a state where the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 during the time saving state, and the normal state The game can be ended without worrying about the balls stored in the second storage device 1600 in the case of shifting to the state.

Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot game, the large opening (first variable winning device 65) is opened and the first round (round game) is started. During the period from the start of the opening operation of the large opening (first variable winning device 65) during the jackpot game (from the start of the first round) to the end of the final round (8 rounds), the specific general winning opening When the ball enters 630a, it becomes a period (variable winning prize valid period) during which the variable probability state is given after the end of the jackpot game, and during that period, the variable probability winning prize valid flag 203s is set to ON (see FIG. 111) ).

The round game ends when a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) elapses, or when a predetermined number (10) of balls enter the large opening (first variable winning device 65), and an interval between rounds (4 Seconds) and then shift to the next round game. During this inter-round interval period, the first variable prize winning device 65 is in a closed state and it is impossible (difficult) to let the ball enter the first variable prize winning device 65, but the ball is transferred to the second storage device 1600. In order to make it flow in, the right-handed game is continuously executed.

As described above, when the jackpot A is selected in the normal state, even if the balls are stored in the second storage device 1600, the stored balls will not 630a so as not to enter the ball, if the ball is made to flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game and the ball is not entered into the specific general winning opening 630a, the probability variable state will occur after the jackpot game ends. is not awarded (a jackpot that is not advantageous to the player).

On the other hand, when the jackpot B is selected in the normal state, the ball stored in the second storage device 1600 is configured to enter the specific general prize winning opening 630a during the variable variable prize valid period, and furthermore, the jackpot is selected. Since 16 rounds longer than the jackpot A (8 rounds) are set as the game period, the jackpot (jackpot advantageous to the player) is more likely to be imparted with a probability variable state after the jackpot A than the jackpot A.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 106(b), the operation of each device when a jackpot is won in the variable probability gaming state (variable probability state) will be described. When jackpot A is selected in the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 102(c), the opening period is set to 1 second, the inter-round interval period is set to 1 second, and the ending period is set to 5 seconds.

By setting in this way, the ball stored in the second storage device 1600 will enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the variable probability winning valid period. Therefore, when the jackpot is selected in the variable probability state, it becomes a jackpot (jackpot advantageous to the player) in which the variable probability state is likely to be given after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, since the interval period between rounds is set to 1 second, which is set shorter than when the jackpot A is selected in the normal state (4 seconds), the period of the jackpot game, especially the first variable winning device 65 It is set so that the period during which the ball does not enter is shortened so that the jackpot game can be executed in a short period of time.

That is, in the jackpot game in the variable probability state, the ball is stored in the second storage device 1600 while the right-handed game is being executed in the variable probability state, and when the jackpot game is started, the stored ball wins the variable probability. The main game is to continue the variable probability state by entering the specific general winning hole 630a during the valid period.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, in order to suppress the fact that the jackpot is won in a short period of time during the variable probability state, a variation having a long variation time (60 seconds) as the variation time of the special symbol during the variable probability state A pattern is set to be selected (see FIG. 101).

In addition, in order to prevent the jackpot from being won in a short period of time during the variable probability state, for example, the ending period of the jackpot may be set to be longer in addition to the variation time of the special symbols. In this case, the ending period may be set long when the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a within the variable winning effective period, and the ending period is set short when the ball does not enter. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the variation time is selected based on the value of the game state and the variation type counter CS1. ) until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), a special table (special selection table) may be referred to to select a variable time.

In this case, the variable time defined in the special selection table should be longer than the variable time defined in the table for selecting other variable times (for example, 60 seconds on average). As a result, since a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected for several rotations after shifting to a specific game state (for example, time saving state), it becomes easier to store balls in the second storage device 1600.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her willingness to play due to an immediate shift to a normal game state despite the shift to a game state (a time-saving state or a probability variable state) advantageous to the player. has the effect of being able to

Also, even if the jackpot is won without storing the balls in the second storage device 1600 during the variable probability state, the balls are made to flow into the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game and enter the specific general winning opening 630a. Since the variable probability state can be continued by hitting the ball, it is not determined whether or not the variable probability state is provided after the big winning is completed until the big winning game is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the jackpot game.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 113. FIG. In the third embodiment, the content of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) and the content of jackpot control processing 4 (FIG. 111) are changed from those of the first embodiment. Below, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, only the differences from the above-described first embodiment will be explained, and other A detailed description of the processing of is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 107, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. As in the first embodiment, this timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds.

When the timer interrupt process is executed, the processes from S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above. Next, a special symbol variation process 3 (S104) is executed. This special symbol variation process 3 (S104) differs from the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the above-described first embodiment in that the detailed contents are partially changed. A description will be given later with reference to FIG.

When the special symbol variation process 3 (S104) ends, the processes from S105 to S108 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, and then the abnormal winning process (S151) is executed. This abnormal winning process (S151) is a process for determining whether or not the winning of the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a is normal, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the abnormal winning process ends, the process of S109 is executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, special symbol variation processing 3 (S104) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 3 (S104). This special symbol variation process 3 differs from the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above in that the special symbol variation time has passed (S214: Yes), and the lottery result of this time is a big hit. (S216: Yes), the content of the process executed is different. Other processing is the same as the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 3 (S104) is executed, the processes from S201 to S216 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 to S223 are executed in the same manner as the above-described special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), and this process is performed. exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big win (S216: Yes), an open scenario setting process (S251) is executed. This open scenario setting process (S251) is a process of setting each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game based on the jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won. . Details of the open scenario setting process (S251) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the open scenario setting process (S251) ends, this process ends after executing the processes of S218 and S219 in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above. Although not shown in this flowchart, after the processing of S219 and S223 is completed, a stop command is set to indicate that the special symbols are to stop changing. This stop command is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by command output processing executed in the main processing of main controller 110 . The sound lamp control device 113 stops the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by receiving the stop command. This makes it possible to match the stop timings of the special symbol and the third symbol.

Next, the open scenario setting process (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the open scenario setting process (S251). In this open scenario setting process (S251), as described above, a process for setting each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game is executed.

When the open scenario setting process (S251) is executed, first, the type of the current jackpot is acquired (S4701). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in S103 (see FIG. 107) is selected from the first winning type selection table 202b.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game state in which the lottery for the special symbol is executed this time is normal (S4702). This is when the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF at the timing when the processing of S216 (see FIG. 108) is performed, and when the value of the time saving counter 203r is 0, the game state is the normal game state. Determining (S4702: Yes), S216 (see FIG. 108) is set to the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the timing of processing is performed, or when the value of the counter 203r during time saving is greater than 0 gaming state It is determined that the game is not in the normal game state (S4702: No).

In the processing of S4702, if it is determined that the gaming state is not normal (S4702: No), based on the opening scenario setting table (probability variable) 202e2, set the contents of the opening scenario corresponding to the acquired jackpot type ( S4703), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if it is determined that the gaming state is normal (S4702: Yes), based on the opening scenario setting table (normal) 202e1, the content of the opening scenario corresponding to the acquired jackpot type is changed. It sets (S4704) and ends this processing. In this way, for each period (opening period, interval period, ending period) during the jackpot game, different periods are set according to the game state (normal state or probability variable (time reduction) state). Therefore, even if the same jackpot type is selected, different jackpot games are executed according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to provide various jackpot games to the players.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, even during a jackpot game, the timing at which a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is during the opening period (when the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is started). period), the variable probability state is not given after the jackpot game, and the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game is during the round period (opening of the first variable winning device 65 If it is a period during which the action is executed), it is configured so that the variable probability state is given after the jackpot game, so even if the same jackpot type is selected, for example, depending on the game state By setting a different period as the opening period, it is possible to change the probability that the variable probability state is given after the big win game is over.

Next, the abnormal winning process (S151) executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 107) of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the contents of the abnormal winning process (S151). This abnormal winning process (S151) is a process for determining whether the entry of the ball into the specific general winning opening 630a is normal or abnormal.

First, when the abnormal winning process (S151) is executed, it is determined whether the jackpot is currently in progress (S4801). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S4801: Yes), then it is determined whether the reservoir valve 1601a is open (S4802). Here, if it is determined that the storage valve 1601a is open (S4802: Yes), this process is terminated. That is, while the storage valve is open, abnormal winning to the specific general winning opening 630a is not discriminated in this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4801 that the current jackpot is not in progress (S4801: No), or if it is determined that the storage valve 1601a is not opened (closed) in the process of S4802 ( S4802: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (won) the specific general winning hole 630a (S4803).

If it is determined in the process of S4803 that the ball has entered (won) the specific general winning hole (S4803: Yes), an error command is set (S4804), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4803 that the ball has not entered the specific general winning hole 630a (S4804: No), this process ends.

In this way, in the abnormal winning process (S151), it is always determined whether or not the ball has entered (won) the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing other than during the jackpot or at a timing when the reservoir valve 1601a is closed. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably grasp that the ball will enter the specific general winning hole 630a at a timing when the ball does not enter (win) in a normal game.

Regarding this abnormal winning process (S151), although not shown in detail, there is a predetermined grace period from when the determination of S4801 and S4802 is executed until when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a. (4 seconds) is set. This is sufficient time for balls that have entered the second reservoir 1600 to be expelled out of the second reservoir 1600 .

By providing this predetermined grace period (4 seconds), even if the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 during the big win enters (wins) the specific general winning hole 630a after the big win ends, the winning will be regarded as abnormal. no longer able to judge. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring abnormal winning can be enhanced. In other words, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which an abnormal winning is erroneously determined.

In addition, regarding the grace period described above, it may be controlled so as not to determine abnormal winning until the grace period has passed in any situation, or the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 and the second storage The number of balls discharged out of the device 1600 is compared with the number of balls discharged to the outside of the device 1600, and when it is determined that there are no balls left in the second storage device 1600, even if the grace period remains, the remaining number of balls is determined so that abnormal winning is determined. A control that resets the grace period may be used. As a result, since the grace period can be shortened as much as possible, it is possible to determine abnormal winnings for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring abnormal winnings.

In addition, the error command set in S4804 of this abnormal winning process (S151) is executed in the main process of the main controller 110. In the external output process (S1001 in FIG. It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via an output device (not shown). When the error command is input, the sound lamp control device 113 uses the third pattern display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the jackpot control processing 4 (S1004) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1004). This jackpot control process 4 differs from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the above-described first embodiment by controlling the contents of the control to open the reservoir valve 1601a, the contents of the ending process 3 (S1110), and the winning process 3 (S1111). ) is changed and the error processing (S1112 in FIG. 34) is deleted. Other processes are the same as the jackpot control process in the first embodiment. Note that the same processes are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the first win type selection table 202b is referred to select the jackpot type, and then the opening scenario setting table 202e is referred to for each period (opening period, between rounds) in the jackpot game. interval period, ending period). Thereby, the operation timing of each device (the storage valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 and the first variable winning device 65) in this big hit game is determined. Then, an operation scenario corresponding to this operation timing is read from the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and a counter (not shown) is used to update the operation scenario, thereby executing a jackpot game.

In this way, by setting the operation timing of each device (storage valve 1601a of second storage device 1600 and first variable winning device 65) in a jackpot game to one operation scenario, the operation timing of each device, especially each device There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the deviation of the operation interval and to execute the jackpot game properly.

It should be noted that other control methods may be used as the control process during the jackpot game. may be controlled. Thus, by combining operation control of each device, it becomes possible to execute a complicated operation pattern of each device to be executed during a big win, and reduce the amount of information (the number of operation patterns) to be stored in advance. has the effect of being able to

Returning to FIG. 111, the description continues. First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1004) is executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has started (S1101). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot has started (S1101: Yes), then an opening command is set (S1102), and this process ends. In the first embodiment described above, when it is determined that the jackpot has started, the opening of the reservoir valve is set (S1103 in FIG. 34), but in the third embodiment, the jackpot start timing and the reservoir Since the opening timing of the valve 1601a is not at the same time as the opening timing of the valve 1601a, and the storage valve 1601a is configured to be opened after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the case of the big win A) after the start of the big win, it is determined that the big win has started. The storage valve 1601a is not opened in the processing executed when the

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the big win has started (S1101: No), it is then determined whether the big win is currently in progress (S1104). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot is not currently in progress (S1104: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to open the storage valve 1601a (S1153).

The opening timing of the storage valve 1601a is defined corresponding to the jackpot type (see FIG. 100(b)), and the operation scenario updated by the counter (not shown) provided in the main controller 110 is the current When it becomes the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the jackpot, it is determined that it is the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a.

Here, if it is determined that it is time to open the storage valve 1601a in the process of S1151 (S1151: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 99) is turned on to open the storage valve 1601a. (S1152). Thereby, the storage valve 1601a is opened. Next, a storage valve open command is set (S1153), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a in the processing of S1151 (S1151: No), next, a new Determine if it is time to start the round. If it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), a round number command indicating the round to be newly started is set (S1154). (S1155).

Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds to be newly started this time is the first round (S1155: Yes), the probability variable winning enable flag 203s is set to ON (S1156), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1155, if it is determined that the number of rounds to be newly started this time is not the first round (S1155: No), this processing ends.

That is, in the third embodiment, as a period in which the variable probability state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a, a specific period during the jackpot game (during the operation of the condition device) (start of the first round The period from 1 to the end of the final round (the period during which the character continuous actuating device is operating) is set. Therefore, the variable probability winning flag 203s, which is a flag indicating the period during which the variable probability state can be granted (variable probability winning valid period (see FIG. 106)), is controlled to be set at the timing when the first round is started.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then, in the same way as the jackpot control processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 35) S1107 to The process of S1109 is executed. With reference to the opening scenario set in the process of S1107, variable operations (opening operation, closing operation) of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are executed in the processing of S1108. If it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), winning processing 3 is executed (S1111), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the winning process 3 (S1111) will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S1109, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (the start timing of the ending period) (S1109: Yes), next, the probability variable winning enable flag 203s is set to OFF (S1157), Ending process 3 is executed (S1110). Then, the process ends. The ending process 3 (S1110) will be detailed later with reference to FIG.

In this way, the jackpot control process 4 (S1004) in the third embodiment includes a process for determining the opening timing of the reservoir valve 1601a separately from the jackpot start timing, and a different timing is set for each jackpot type. It is configured so that the opening operation of the valve 1601a can be executed appropriately. In addition, the probability variable winning effect flag 203s indicating the period in which the variable probability state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning hole 630a starts the ending effect from the start timing of the first round (the final round ends). It is configured to be set to ON until

Therefore, there is an effect that the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment can be properly executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the probability variable winning enable flag 203s is set to OFF is the start timing of the ending effect (the start timing of the ending period), but the timing at which the final round ends can be determined, and the final round When it is determined that the game has ended, the probability variable winning effect flag 203s may be set to OFF.

In addition, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot as in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above, the opening of the storage valve 1601a is set, and the opening operation of the storage device solenoid 610 You may make it output the opening instruction|indication of the storage valve 1601a to the apparatus (for example, accessory control apparatus) which controls. In this case, the main control device 110 outputs the current jackpot type and the opening instruction of the storage valve 1601a to the role control device, and stores the opening timing of the storage valve 1601a corresponding to each jackpot type. The control device side opens the storage valve 1601a at the opening timing corresponding to the big hit of this time. As a result, there is an effect that the processing executed by main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the ending process 3 (S1110) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending process 3 (S1110). This ending process 3 (S1110) differs from the above-described ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment in that a storage valve closing command is set, and other processes are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the ending process 3 (S1110) is executed, the processes of S1301 and S1302 are executed similarly to the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment, and then a storage valve closing command is set (S1351). Next, the processes of S1303 to S1308 are executed in the same manner as the ending process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above, and this process ends.

The storage valve closing command set in the ending process 3 (S1110) is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the storage valve opening command set in S1153 of the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111). be. By inputting a storage valve open command and a storage valve close command as storage valve related commands, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the current operating state of the storage valve 1601a. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the operation state of the storage valve 1601a. Therefore, an appropriate effect (for example, the third symbol display device By executing the performance displayed at 81), the player can watch the performance of the pachinko machine 10, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation where the player gets tired of the performance of the game early. .

Next, the prize winning process 3 (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (S1004 in FIG. 111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning process 3 (S1111). This winning process 3 (S1111) is different from the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above, except that the process is executed only when the probability variable winning valid flag 203s is set to ON. Changed the control content so that the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON by passing (entering) the variable probability switch (specific general winning opening 630a) during the period when the variable probability winning prize effective flag 203s is set to ON. The difference is in points, and the rest of the processing is the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning process 3 (S1111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the probability variable winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (S1451). If it is determined that the probability variable winning enable flag 203s is not ON (is OFF) (S1451: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variable winning enable flag 203s is ON (S1451: Yes), then the processing of S1402 to S1406 is executed in the same manner as the winning processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). . If it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1405 (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1452).

If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON in the processing of S1452 (S1452: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is, and if the probability variation setting flag 203h is not set to ON (it is set to OFF case) (S1452: No), it is determined whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch (whether the ball entered the specific general winning opening 630a) (S1410).

In the processing of S1410, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch (S1410: Yes), the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the variable probability switch (S1410: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the probability variable switch is provided in the specific general winning opening 630a different from the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and the probability variable winning effective flag 203s is set to ON, a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, and a variable probability state is provided after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the processing for setting the variable probability setting flag 203h to ON can be simplified as compared with the first embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment as well, the timing at which the variable probability state can be given by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a like the winning process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) In addition to the period during which the probability variation winning valid flag 203s is set to ON, a slight grace period (for example, 4 seconds) may be provided. As a result, for example, if the ball has flowed into the second storage device 1600 while the probability variable winning enable flag 203s is set to ON, the variable winning effective flag 203s is set to OFF and then enters the specific general winning opening 630a. It is possible to give a probability change state by hitting the ball.

In this case, as the grace period given to the probability variable winning effective flag 203s, it is sufficient to set the time that the ball that has flowed into the second storage device 1600 can reach the specific general winning opening 630a. It is preferable to set the ending period of the jackpot game to be long. By configuring in this way, the period during which the probability variable state can be granted by the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a (the period during which the probability variable winning effective flag 203s is set to ON and the grace period) is during the jackpot game Since it is possible to set only to, it is possible to unify the control for giving the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the variable probability state is provided until the end of the jackpot game, and it is possible to suppress the situation where the player's willingness to play is reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 118. FIG. In the third embodiment, the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1811) in the main process (see FIG. 114) are changed from those in the first embodiment. , and is different in that display processing (S1852) during time saving is added. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, only the differences from the above-described first embodiment will be explained, and the same processes as in the first embodiment will be explained. Detailed descriptions of other processes are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 114, main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1812 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. Here, the command determination process 3 (S1811) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. This command determination process 3 (S1811) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, when the processing of S1812 is finished, the storage state determination processing (S1851) is executed, and then the display processing during time saving (S1852) is executed. Here, the storage state determination processing (S1851) is processing for determining the storage state of the balls that have flowed into the second storage device 1600, and the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 reaches the upper limit. This is the process of determining that the ball has reached or passed through the second flow path 1602 . Based on the result determined by this storage state determination process (S1851), the above-described probability variation expectation level display effect (see FIG. 104(b)) is executed. A detailed description of the storage state determination process (S1851) will be given later with reference to FIG.

Next, the time saving medium display process (S1852) is executed when the jackpot is won in the time saving state (see FIG. 104(b)). It is a process for selecting probability variation expectation). Note that the display processing during time reduction (S1852) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 114, the description continues. After completing the process of S1852, the allowable time counter subtraction process is executed (S1853). This allowable time counter subtraction process is a process of subtracting the value of the allowable time counter 223i. The permissible time counter 223i is set to a value (1000) corresponding to 1 second in command determination processing 3 (S1811 in FIG. 115), which will be described later. subtracted. If no value is set in the permissible time counter 223i (the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0), this processing ends without decrementing the counter value.

The value (1000) set in the allowable time counter 223i in the command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 115) remains on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 at the timing when the ending command is received (the timing when the jackpot ends). It is set as a sufficient time for the ball that is playing to flow down outside the game board 13 .

After the processing of 1853 is completed, the processing of S1813 to S1817 is executed similarly to the main processing (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above, and this processing ends. Thus, in the third embodiment, the information necessary for executing the variable probability expectation level display effect (see FIG. 104(b)) by the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 (ball (storage information, ball passage information to the second flow path 1602) is acquired (storage state determination processing (S1851)), and the information is used to display the probability variation expectation display effect (see FIG. 104 (b)). It is configured to be able to select the numerical value (probability variable expectation).

Thus, by displaying the degree of expectation that a variable probability state is provided after the end of the current jackpot game as a numerical value when winning the jackpot, for example, when the degree of probability variable expectation is high, the player is given a sense of security. On the other hand, when the probability variation expectation is low, it is possible to actively play a game in which balls flow into the second storage device 1600 during a big win game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the probability variation expectation to the player in a state where it is determined in advance whether or not the probability variation state is granted, the specific general winning opening 630a at the timing when the probability variation state can actually be granted Since the possibility of the ball hitting the ball is displayed as the degree of expectation, it is possible to perform highly reliable numerical display for the player.

Next, command determination processing 3 (S1811) executed in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S1811). This command determination process 3 (S1811) is different from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above, and is executed when a winning information command is received (error notification process 3 (S1912)). , the contents of the process executed when the opening command is received, and the storage valve open command indicating opening (release) of the storage valve 1601a and the storage valve 1601a indicating closing of the storage valve 1601a. The difference is that a process to be executed when a valve closing command is received is added, and other processes are the same. The processes of S1904 to S1910 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment are also executed in the command determination process 3 (S1811) of the third embodiment. , is included in the processing (S1919) corresponding to other commands, and the illustration of that processing is omitted. Further, among the processes illustrated in FIG. 115, the same processes as those in the above-described first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S1811) is executed, first, the processes of S1901 to S1903 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. If it is determined in the processing of S1901 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S1911). Here, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1911: Yes), error notification process 3 (S1912) is executed.

This error notification process 3 (S1912) is based on winning (passing) to each device (first ball entrance 65, through gate 67, second storage device 1600) provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. When an information command is received, it is determined whether or not the game being executed by the player is normal with respect to the game state (normal game state, right-handed game state) of the pachinko machine 10, and based on the determination result. This is a process for notifying the player of the game method (displaying a warning image). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a game method suitable for the current game state. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to intentionally play a game with a game method that is not suitable for the current game state. The error notification process 3 (S1912) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 115, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S1911 that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1913). Here, if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S1913: Yes), the processing of S1914 is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), and then the storage upper limit flag 223k is set off (S3911), the special ball flow flag 223m is set off (S3912), an opening command for display is set (S1915), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1913 that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1916). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1916: Yes), the processes of S1917 and S1918 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), and this process ends.

In the processing of S1916, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1916: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage valve opening command has been received (S3913). Here, if it is determined that the storage valve open command has been received (S3913: Yes), the storage valve open flag 223n is set to ON (S3914), the display open command is set (S3915), and this process is executed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3913 that the storage valve open command has not been received (S3913: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage valve close command has been received (S3916). Here, if it is determined that the storage valve closing command has been received (S3916: Yes), the storage valve open flag 223n is set to OFF (S3917), the closing command for display is set (S3918), and this processing is executed. finish.

In the processing of S3916, when it is determined that the storage valve closing command has not been received (S3916: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1919). In addition to the processing described in the command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), the processing of steps S1904 to S1910 of the command determination processing of the first embodiment is performed as the processing according to other commands. include.

Next, error notification process 3 (S1912) executed in command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 115) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the contents of the error notification process 3 (S1912). In this error notification process 3 (S1912), based on the winning information command received from the main controller 110, the game method (right hand (whether to hit or not) is determined to be appropriate content, and a process capable of informing based on the result of determination is executed.

This error notification process 3 (S1912) discriminates the value of the allowable time counter 223i when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to ON, in contrast to the error notification process (see FIG. 44) of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that the process to be performed is deleted and the content of the process executed when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to OFF is changed. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) of the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 116, when the error notification process 3 (S1912) is executed, the processes of S1931 to S1933 are executed in the same manner as the error notification process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 44), and this process is executed. finish. As a result, it is possible to determine whether the ball enters the first ball entrance 65, which is impossible (difficult) to win in the right-handed game during the jackpot (during the jackpot game) when the right-handed game is supposed to be executed. becomes. As a result, it is possible to perceive a state in which the player is not executing a right-handed game even though the player is in the midst of a big win (during a big win game), and to notify the player of an appropriate game method.

In addition, as the notification of the proper game method, for example, the player is not executing a proper game (regardless of the game state in which the right-handed game is executed, a game other than the right-handed game is executed ), the appropriate game content (right-handed game) is notified to the player in a visually recognizable manner (for example, displayed on the third symbol display device 81), or the game content is always played. In the pachinko machine 10 notifying the player, the content of the notification is emphasized and notified (for example, the volume of the speaker is increased, the notification mode displayed on the display screen is increased, the brightness of the display screen is increased, etc. It may be configured to do). As a result, even if the player performs an inappropriate game, the game content can be appropriately notified to the player.

Returning to FIG. 116, the description continues. In the process of S1931, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 223h is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S1931: No), the error notification process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 44) Similarly, it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1936).

Here, the permissible time counter 223i in the third embodiment is a counter for measuring a predetermined period (one second) after the right-handed game state ends, and while this counter is measuring, Even if the ball passes through the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67, a right-handed warning image, which will be described later, is not displayed.

As a result, a right-handed warning image is displayed when a ball shot just before the right-handed game state ends enters (passes) the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 after the right-handed game state ends. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display of a warning image to a player who is playing a proper game, thereby suppressing the player's willingness to play. Moreover, there is an effect that the accuracy of displaying a warning image to a player who is playing an inappropriate game can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 115, this permissible time counter 223i is set to a value (1000) corresponding to one second when an ending command is received from the main controller 110 (S1917). 114), 1 is subtracted every time 1 millisecond elapses (S1853).

Returning to FIG. 116, the description continues. In the process of S1936, if it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (greater than 0) (S1936: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1936: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability state flag 223f is set to ON (S1961).

That is, it is determined using the value of the permissible time counter 223i whether or not a predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed after the end of the big win, and when the value of the permissible time counter 223i becomes 0, the big win ends. It is determined that a predetermined period (1 second) has passed since then. As a result, no warning image is displayed when the ball flowing down the game board 13 enters (passes) the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 immediately after the end of the big win.

In the process of S1961, if it is determined that the variable probability state flag 223f is set to ON (S1961: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability state flag 223f is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S1961: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0. (S1962). Here, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S1962: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1962, if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is not greater than 0 (is 0), the second storage device 1600 or the ball entering the through gate 67 (passing) It is determined whether or not the winning information command shown has been received (S1963). Here, if it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has entered (passed through) the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 has not been received (S1963: No), this processing ends.

In the processing of S1963, if it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has entered (passed through) the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67 has been received (S1963: Yes), then the right-handed warning image is displayed. A corresponding error command is set (S1964), and the process ends. Here, when the error command corresponding to the right-handed warning image is set and the error command is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1802) shown in FIG. A warning image shown in (b) is displayed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in order to determine the gaming state in which the right-handed game is not executed, the jackpot medium flag 223h, the variable probability state flag 223f, and the time saving state counter 223g are referred to. there is Then, when the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off, the variable probability state flag 223f is set to off, and the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0, the right-handed game is not executed. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered (passed through) the storage device 1600 and the through gate 67 .

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, an error command corresponding to the warning image is not set by the error notification process for a predetermined period (one second) after the jackpot is finished.

In the third embodiment, the value of the permissible time counter 223i is set to 1000 (S1917) at the timing of receiving the ending command (S1916 in FIG. 115), and when the value is 0 (when the permissible time has passed) ) (S1962 in FIG. 116: No), it is possible to determine that the ball has entered (passed through) the second storage device 1600 or the through gate 67, but other configurations may be used. The value of the permissible time counter 223i may be set to 1000 even at the timing when the time saving state counter becomes 0, other than when the ending command is received as the timing at which the right-handed game ends.

By configuring in this way, a warning image is displayed to a player who is playing a proper game even when the time saving state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state, thereby reducing the player's willingness to play. can be suppressed. Moreover, there is an effect that the accuracy of displaying a warning image to a player who is playing an inappropriate game can be enhanced.

Also, the value set in the permissible time counter 223i may be a value corresponding to a period during which it is possible to prevent the display of a warning from being erroneously displayed to a player who is playing an appropriate game. For example, it may be a value (10000) corresponding to 10 seconds. Alternatively, a different value may be set for each type of jackpot.

Furthermore, the timing for setting the value of the permissible time counter 223i may be changed based on the result of the jackpot game and the jackpot type. For example, when it is determined that the variable probability state or the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot, the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not set even when the ending command is received, and the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot And, in the case of a jackpot where the time saving state is not provided, the value of the permissible time counter 223i may be set after the jackpot ends. This eliminates the need to set a useless value in the permissible time counter 223i, thereby reducing the processing load.

Next, the storage state determination process (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the content of the storage state determination process (S1851). This storage state determination process (S1851) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 114) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the flow into the second storage device 1600 in which the storage valve 1601a is closed. This is a process for judging the state of storage and the state of flow of the ball that has been dropped.

First, when the storage state determination process (S1851) is executed, it is determined whether the storage valve open flag 223n is set to ON (S4901). Here, if it is determined that the storage valve open flag 223n is set to ON, that is, the storage valve 1601a is in the open (released) state (S4901: Yes), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, if it is determined that the storage valve open flag 223n is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4901: No), then the second storage device 1600 stores It is determined whether or not the number of spheres being played has reached the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S4902). Specifically, when the upper limit detection sensor 1600b provided in the first flow path 1601 of the second storage device 1600 shown in FIG. 96 detects that the ball stays, it is determined that the stored ball is at the upper limit.

In the processing of S4902, if it is determined that the stored balls have reached the upper limit (S4902: Yes), then a command corresponding to the upper limit of storage is set (S4903), and the upper limit flag 223k of storage is set to ON. (S4904), and the process ends. This storage upper limit flag 223k is set to OFF when a big hit is started (S3911 in FIG. 115).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4902 that the stored ball has not reached the upper limit (S4902: No), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602). (S4905). Specifically, when the passage sensor 1600d provided in the second flow path 1602 of the second storage device 1600 shown in FIG. Determine that the ball has passed.

Here, a phenomenon will be described in which a ball passes through the second guidance flow path (second flow path 1602) even though the number of stored balls has not reached the upper limit in the process of S4902. In the second storage device 1600 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, normally, as shown in FIG. When it enters 1600 it is configured to flow down to second flow path 1602 .

However, depending on the direction in which the spheres flowing into the second storage device 1600 collide with the inner wall of the second storage device 1600, the amount of the spheres stored in the first flow path 1601 may not reach the upper limit. may also flow down into the second flow path 1602 (approximately 5% of the spheres entering the second reservoir 1600). When such a ball flows down, it is determined in the process of S4905 that the ball has passed (flowed down) through the second guidance flow path (second flow path 1602).

Returning to FIG. 117, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S4905 that the ball has not passed through the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602) (S4905: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the second guide channel (second channel 1602) (S4905: Yes), then a command corresponding to the special ball flow is set (S4906), The flag 223m is set to ON (S4907), and this processing ends.

Note that, in the third embodiment, when a command corresponding to a special ball drift is set, the audio output device 226 outputs a notification sound for notifying that a special ball drift has occurred. Also, when this special ball flow occurs, as described above with reference to FIG. A position where the number of balls required to enter the ball into the mouth 630a is reduced) can be given, but other benefits may be given to the player.

For example, a general prize winning hole is provided that allows a ball to enter only when a special ball flow occurs, and a large number (15) of prize balls are awarded to the player when the ball enters the general prize winning hole. good too. Also, when a special ball flow occurs, a privilege such as giving points accumulated by the player or displaying a special image on the third symbol display device 81 may be given.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to distinguish the flow of special balls caused by the irregular movement of the ball, and furthermore, by giving a privilege to the flow of special balls, the player can enjoy the ball. Perks can be given based on movement. Therefore, it is possible to make the player happy and sad about the movement of the ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Note that in the third embodiment, when the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 does not reach the upper limit (S4902: No), the second guide flow path (second flow path 1602) (S4905: Yes), the special sphere flow flag 223m is set to ON. The special ball flow flag 223m may be set to ON when a ball passes (flows down) the guiding flow path (second flow path 1602).

With this configuration, even when the number of balls stored in the first flow path 1601 reaches the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the gaming machine due to the player stopping the shooting of the ball in the middle.

Next, the display processing during time saving (S1852) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the contents of the display processing during time saving (S1852). This time saving medium display process (S1852) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 114) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed when the jackpot is won during the time saving state (Fig. 104 (b) reference) is the process of selecting the numerical value (probability variation expectation) displayed.

First, when the display process (S1852) is executed during time saving, it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S5001). Here, when the value of the time saving state counter 223g is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S5001: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, when the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit is won (S5002 ). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning data corresponding to the change of this time wins the jackpot. Here, when it is determined that the variation of this time is not a big hit (S5002: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S5002, when it is determined that the variation of this time is a big hit (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the accumulation upper limit flag 223k is set to ON (S5003).

In the processing of S5003, if it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON (S5003: Yes), a display command corresponding to the degree of expectation MAX is set (S5004), and this processing ends. When the display command corresponding to this degree of expectation MAX is set, in the degree of probability variation expectation display effect shown in FIG. "MAX" is displayed in the numerical value of the degree.

On the other hand, in the process of S5003, if it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223k is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S5003: No), the expectation level display selection table 222b (see FIG. 105) A display command corresponding to the degree of expectation (numerical value) selected based on the defined content is set (S5005), and this processing is terminated. When this display command is set, in the probability variation expectation degree display effect shown in FIG. The expected degree (numerical value) "10 to 80" selected based on the degree display selection table 222b is displayed.

As described above, in the display processing during time saving (S1852), the display contents of the probability variation expectation degree display effect to be executed when a jackpot is won during the time saving state are determined. In this way, the value of probability variation expectation is selected based on the number of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 at the timing of winning the jackpot, the presence or absence of the special ball flow, and the type of the jackpot. (expectation) can be displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during a predetermined period during the jackpot game (period from the start of the first round to the end of the final round), the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a which is the specific area. By entering the ball, the variable probability state is given after the end of the big hit, so it is not determined whether or not the variable probability state is given at the timing of winning the big win.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, simply, the probability variation expectation based on how much the condition that the probability that the probability variation state is increased during the jackpot game is satisfied is satisfied. The content of the degree display effect is determined.

Therefore, even though it is internally determined whether or not the probability variation state is given, the probability variation expectation degree (value ) has the effect of increasing the reliability.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the storage upper limit flag 223k is set to ON, regardless of other conditions (the setting status of the special ball flow flag 223m and the type of jackpot type), it corresponds to the expectation degree MAX It is configured so that the display command to be used is set. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won with the upper limit amount (four) of balls stored in the second storage device 1600 during the time saving state, at least one of the stored balls This is because the ball can be entered into the specific general winning opening 630a at a timing at which the variable probability state can be imparted after the jackpot is completed.

That is, by storing the upper limit amount (4 balls) of balls in the second storage device 1600 until the jackpot is won in the time saving state, it is possible to create a game state in which the variable probability state is given after the next jackpot is completed. Become. By configuring in this way, even if the number of reserved memories of special symbols reaches the upper limit during the time saving state, the game of inflowing the ball into the second storage device 1600 can be continued, so that the player during the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation of the game machine due to the stop of the shooting of the ball.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a is during the jackpot game (while the condition device is in operation), and the first variable winning device 65 is opened. If it is during (during operation of the accessory continuous operation device), the variable probability state is given after the jackpot is completed. 1st variable in the next round after the period (round period) in which the 1 variable winning device 65 is open and the conditions for ending the 1st round (10 balls entered or 30 seconds have passed) are satisfied Both the period (interval period) until the winning device 65 is released are included.

Therefore, even during the interval period (the period in which the first variable winning device 65 is closed) during the jackpot game, when the ball enters the specific general prize winning port 630a, the probability variable state is given after the jackpot game ends. be done. In other words, in the configuration used in the third embodiment, when the ball passes through the winning opening opened during the jackpot game (for example, the winning opening of the first variable winning device 65), after the jackpot ends It is possible to set a longer period (a period in which the variable probability state can be given) that is continuously advantageous to the player during the jackpot game than in the case of providing a specific area to which the state is given.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the specific area in which the variable probability state can be imparted by passing the ball is provided other than the winning opening opened during the jackpot game (for example, the winning opening of the first variable winning device 65). Therefore, it is determined whether or not a ball that does not win the first variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game, i.e., a ball (waste ball) that has no merit for the player in the past, can acquire the variable probability state. It will be. As a result, during the jackpot game, the game of winning the prize balls by entering the balls into the first variable prize winning device 65 and the game of entering the balls into the specific general prize winning port 630a to obtain the probability variable state are simultaneously progressed. becomes possible. Therefore, since it is possible to simultaneously provide a plurality of game features to the player, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this case, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the specific general winning opening 630a are placed at positions where winning is possible in a game aiming at the same area (right-handed game in this embodiment). should be provided. By doing so, it is possible for the player to easily proceed with a plurality of games at the same time.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the right-handed area, and the normal game area (left-handed area) is provided with a specific general winning opening 630a. may As a result, a right-handed game is played during the round period (the period during which the first variable winning device 65 is open) during the jackpot game, and the interval period (the end condition of one round (10 balls entered, or 30 Seconds elapsed) is established until the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the next round), a normal game (left-handed game) is performed, and a ball is entered into the specific general winning opening 630a. It may be configured to execute a ball-throwing game.

This makes it possible to complicate the game during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game due to the monotonous game.

In the third embodiment described above, the second pooling device 1600 is arranged in the right region of the game board 13. For example, the second pooling device 1600 may 80) or on the left side of the game board 13 (on the left side of the variable display unit 80), and a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (left-handed game ) flow into the second reservoir 1600 .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to store the balls in the second storage device 1600 during the normal game state. As a result, if the state of not winning the big win continues in the normal game state, it becomes possible to store the upper limit amount of balls in the second storage device 1600. It is possible to provide a jackpot that is likely to be given a state, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when it shifts to the variable probability state, it is configured so that the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won. will be performed. That is, until the next big win is won, the second storage device 1600 is placed in the second storage device 1600 in a variable probability state in which the game can be played in a state where the probability of the big win is set high and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. By winning the jackpot after storing the upper limit amount of balls, a game aiming at continuation of the variable probability state even after the next jackpot game is finished is performed.

Therefore, conventionally, in a variable probability state where a game is played while simply waiting for the next big win to be won early, the upper limit amount of balls is quickly stored in the second storage device 1600 without winning the big win early. Since the player can play the game with the desire to play, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved during the variable probability state.

In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, if the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (eg, 10 times) in the probability variation state, the special symbol fluctuates 100 times from the probability variation state to the time-saving state (eg, after the jackpot ends). It may be configured so that the game state shifts to (set by the period until the game is played).

By constructing in this way, the jackpot probability is low in the case of winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a low degree of expectation to be given a probability change) in a probability variable state in which the jackpot probability is high but the game period between the jackpots is short. In the state (normal game state), but in the time-saving state in which the game period between the jackpots is long, the jackpot (the expectation that the probability variation is given is higher than winning the jackpot in the probability variation state). Since it is possible to provide a player with a big win with different advantages, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In this embodiment, the balls that have not flowed into the second storage device 1600 are configured to enter the first variable winning device 65. 1600 may be provided. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second storage device 1600 during the jackpot game (while the first variable winning device 65 is being opened).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128. FIG. In the above-described third embodiment, the second storage device 1600 is provided, a plurality of flow paths in which the ball can flow down are provided, and the flow path allows the ball to enter a specific general winning opening (definite variable winning opening) ) 630a and a general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 630b. In addition, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1601a that can store the balls flowing down a part of the flow path, and by changing the timing at which this storage valve 1601a opens, the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. By differentiating the timing of entering a ball, a jackpot to which a variable probability state is likely to be given and a jackpot to which a variable probability state is hard to be given after the end of the jackpot game are provided.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting device 2600 is provided instead of the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment. This sorting device 2600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down, and the flow path allows the ball to enter the specific general winning opening (probability variable winning opening) 630a or the second ball entering device 640. Configure.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the area provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80). A second variable winning device 650 is provided below the variable winning device 65 . Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 120, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are alternately opened in the jackpot game. So, a ball launched in a right-handed game during a jackpot game is configured to enter one of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650).

By alternately opening the two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in this way, for example, the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upper side during the jackpot game is in a closed state, and the balls passing through the first variable winning device 65 in the closed state enter the second variable winning device 650 provided below the first variable winning device 65. By controlling the opening operation of , it is possible to cause the ball launched during the big win game to enter any of the variable winning devices. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball fired during the jackpot game does not enter the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) and the player is dissatisfied. It has the effect of being able to

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a sorting device below the two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) provided on the top and bottom. 2600 is provided, and a ball distributed by the distribution device 2600 and flowing down one path enters a specific general winning hole 630a.

This specific general winning opening 630a is the same as the specific general winning opening 630a used in the above-described third embodiment, and is a predetermined period during the jackpot game, which is a variable winning valid period (from the start of the first round round game to the final round By entering the ball during the period until the end of the round game), in addition to the predetermined number of prize balls (1 piece), a variable state is given after the jackpot game ends, and a predetermined period during the jackpot game (Variable winning valid A predetermined number of prize balls (one ball) are awarded when a ball enters the game during a period other than the period (including a period during which the jackpot is not made).

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, by changing the contents of the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game based on the jackpot type that has been won, shaking during the jackpot game. It is possible to set a big win in which balls flowing down to the splitting device 2600 are likely to occur and a big win in which it is difficult to occur.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of variable winning devices, a plurality of balls are intentionally generated so as to generate balls that do not enter the two variable winning devices (balls that can flow into the sorting device 2600 during a jackpot game). The opening operation of the variable prize winning device is controlled, and it is determined whether or not a game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player after the big win is given by the ball that does not enter any of the variable prize winning devices. It is possible to provide a new game property of being played.

Therefore, in addition to the conventional game feature of making the ball enter the variable winning device during the jackpot game for the player, a benefit ( It is possible to execute a new game that determines whether or not the probability variable state) is given, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved during the jackpot game.

Conventionally, a ball that did not enter the variable winning device during the jackpot game was treated as a useless ball. To provide a pachinko machine 10 capable of effectively using all the balls shot during a jackpot game because it is constituted so as to be able to give a privilege (probability variable state) advantageous to a player by using the balls). There is an effect that the player can enjoy the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 120 is an enlarged view of the area surrounded by the two-dot chain line CXX in the game board 13 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 119, a ball shot in a right-handed game jumps over the variable display unit 80 and collides with the return rubber 69. on the right side).

As shown in FIG. 120, in the right area of the game board 13, there are a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, and a sorting device in order from the upstream side of the ball flow path (upper side of the game board 13). 2600, and a specific general prize winning opening 630a is provided at a position where a ball distributed by the distribution device 2600 to the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (the right side when viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 120) can enter.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 is provided at a position where a ball distributed by the distribution device 2600 to the left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (the left side when viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 120) can enter. Among the various configurations provided in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the specific general winning opening 630a , and the second ball entrance 640 have already been described in detail in each of the above-described embodiments, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the configuration of the distribution device 2600 will be described. The sorting device 2600 is formed with an opening 2601 into which balls flowing down the game board 13 flow. This opening 2601 is formed with an opening width of about 15 mm, and restricts two balls from flowing in at the same time. As a result, the balls that have flowed into the sorting device 2600 can flow down smoothly. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13 so that the balls passing through the second variable winning device 650 are guided to the opening 2601 of the sorting device 2600. FIG.

The balls that flow into the sorting device 2600 are sorted by two sorting members (first sorting member 1901 and second sorting member 1902) provided inside the sorting device 2600. FIG. A first channel 2602, a second channel 2603, a third channel 2604, and a fourth channel 2605 are formed in the sorting device 2600 by partition walls. The first flow path 2602 and the second flow path 263 are formed so that the spheres flow directly downward, and the third flow path 2604 flows in the lower left direction of the sorting device 2600 when viewed from the front (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120). It is formed so that the ball flows down from upstream to downstream by means of a downwardly sloping sloping member. Further, the fourth flow path 2605 is formed by a member forming the outer shape of the storage device 2600 so as to be inclined downward to the lower right direction of the sorting device 2600 when viewed from the front (the lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120).

The distribution device 2600 has a right discharge port 2606 for discharging balls to the right side of the distribution device 2600 in front view (the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 120), and the left side of the distribution device 2600 in the front view (the viewpoint in FIG. 120). A left discharge port 2607 is formed for discharging the ball to the left side).

The spheres that flowed into the sorting device 2600 are sorted by two sorting members (first sorting member 1901 and second sorting member 1902), and distributed to a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 2602 to fourth flow path 2605 ) and discharged from either the right outlet 2606 or the left outlet 2607 .

Specifically, the ball that has flowed into the sorting device 2600 passes through the passage sensor 2600 a provided in the opening 2061 and falls to the first sorting member 1901 . Since the configuration of the first distribution member 1901 is the same as that of the second distribution member 901 used in the above-described third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Balls falling on the first distribution member 1901 are alternately distributed to the first channel 2602 and the second channel 2603 by the first distribution member 1901 . A partition wall is provided below the first distribution member 1901 to separate the first channel 2602 and the second channel 2603 .

The ball that has flowed down the first flow path 2602 falls to the downstream side of the third flow path 2604, flows down the third flow path 2604 in the downstream direction (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 120), and exits the left discharge port 2607. It is discharged out of the sorting device 2600 . On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 2603 falls onto the second distribution member 1902 . The configuration of the second distribution member 1902 is the same as that of the first distribution member 1901, and is the same as that of the second distribution member 901 used in the above-described third embodiment. omitted.

Balls falling on the second distribution member 1902 are alternately distributed to the third channel 2604 and the fourth channel 2605 by the second distribution member 1902 . The balls distributed to the third channel 2604 flow down on the inclined member and are discharged out of the distribution device 2600 from the left outlet 2607 . The number of balls discharged from the left outlet 2607 can be detected by the passage sensor 2600b.

On the other hand, the balls sorted to the fourth channel 2605 are discharged out of the sorting device 2600 from the right outlet 2606 . The number of balls discharged from the right outlet 2606 can be detected by the passage sensor 2600c.

As described above, the balls flowing into the sorting device 2600 are arranged to be sorted with regularity. It is configured so that the ratio with the number of ejected balls is 1:3. That is, when four balls flow into the sorting device 2600 , at least one ball is discharged from the right discharge port 2606 .

In addition, FIG. 120 shows a state in which the surface cover of the sorting device 2600 is removed in order to explain the internal configuration of the sorting device 2600. The surface cover is made of a permeable material (ABS, polycarbonate, etc.). It is configured so that the player can grasp the status of the distribution members (the first distribution member 1901 and the second distribution member 1902). By configuring in this way, the player can play a game while grasping the situation of the distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902). It is possible to play the game while predicting the timing at which the will enter the ball.

In addition, a part of the surface cover of the distribution device 2600 may be colored or the surface cover may be colored so that the situation of the distribution members (the first distribution member 1901 and the second distribution member 1902) is difficult for the player to visually recognize. You may attach a decorative member to the surface of. With this configuration, the game can be played while predicting which outlet (the right outlet 2606 or the left outlet 2607) the ball will be ejected from each time the ball flows into the sorting device 2600. can be done. In addition, by storing the ejection port from which the ball was ejected in the past, it is possible to predict which ejection port (the right ejection port 2606 or the left ejection port 2607) will be the next ejection port. It is possible to provide a situation advantageous to a player who plays for a long time rather than a player who plays for only a short time. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game for a long period of time, and to prevent the operation of the pachinko machine 10 from deteriorating.

Furthermore, the surface cover of the sorting device 2600 may be formed with a half mirror that allows the inside to be visually recognized by irradiating light. It is preferable to irradiate the surface cover with light so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the sorting device 2600 . By doing so, the inside of the sorting device 2600 (status of each sorting member) can be made visible only when a game is actually played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

Note that the distribution device 2600 of the fourth embodiment uses distribution members (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902) whose distribution directions are alternately changed by the contact of the balls. However, the number may be three or more. By increasing the number of distribution members and increasing the flow path of the ball in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily grasp the destination of the ball.

Furthermore, a configuration in which three or more routes are distributed by one distribution member may be used. By using such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of sorting members required when forming the same number of flow paths in the sorting device 2600, and to make the sorting device 2600 more compact. It is possible to plan

Also, a configuration may be used in which the distribution member electrically switches the distribution destination of the balls. In this case, for example, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is preferable that the destination of the balls is switched at constant timing. By configuring in this way, the distribution rate can be statistically kept constant.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state (for example, time saving state or variable probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed other than during the jackpot, the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a, so the time saving state In the variable probability state, it is possible to enter a ball into a specific general winning hole 630a, which is one of the general winning holes, and obtain a prize ball (one ball in this embodiment). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the number of balls held decreases in the time saving state or the probability variable state.

In the third embodiment, the storage valve 1601a of the second storage device 1600 is released (opened) from the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to the end of the final round after the execution of the jackpot game. However, other conditions may be provided as the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) and the timing at which it is closed.

For example, the timing at which the reservoir valve 1601a is released (opened) is the timing at which a predetermined round (2nd round, final round, etc.) of the jackpot game starts or ends, or the predetermined round (2nd round, final round, etc.). The timing may be set after a predetermined period of time (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed since the start.

In addition, the timing at which the storage valve 1601a is closed is set so that the upper limit number (for example, 4) of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 after the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) can pass through the storage valve 1601a. The time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, the timing at which a predetermined round (second round, final round, etc.) has started or ended, or the predetermined round (second round, final round, etc.) has started or ended. The timing may be after a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has passed.

By configuring in this way, various periods can be set as the period during which the storage valve 1601a is open and the period during which the storage valve 1601a is closed. Specifically, for example, the timing at which the reservoir valve 1601a is released (opened) is set 3 seconds after winning the jackpot, and the timing at which the reservoir valve 1601a is closed is released (opened). If it is set to be 4 seconds after, the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) only for 3 to 7 seconds after winning the jackpot.

As a result, when 7 seconds have passed since the jackpot was won, the reservoir valve 1601a is closed even during the jackpot game. In order to continue the closed state, compared to the configuration used in the third embodiment (configuration to close the storage valve 1601a at the timing when the final round of the jackpot game is completed), the period to close the storage valve 1601a can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to start the jackpot game with the balls stored in the storage valve 1601a (with the upper limit number of balls stored).

In addition, while the reservoir valve 1601a is in a closed state during the jackpot game, a game for winning a prize ball in the current jackpot game (a game aiming at the first variable winning device 65) and the next jackpot A game (a game aiming at the second storage device 1600 in which the storage valve 1601a is in a closed state) for facilitating the variable probability state after the game ends can be executed at the same time. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved during the jackpot game. Furthermore, since it is possible to make a state in which the variable probability state is likely to be imparted after the next big win game ends depending on the result of the game during the big win game, the player is made to continue playing the game even after the big win game ends. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the gaming machine can be increased.

In addition, by providing a plurality of periods for releasing (opening) the reservoir valve 1601a during the jackpot game and varying the period for releasing (opening) the reservoir valve 1601a based on the winning jackpot, for example, when the jackpot game ends. Even if the period until winning the next jackpot is the same, the length of the closed state period of the storage valve 1601a can be varied.

As a result, it is possible to set the big win to which the variable probability state is likely to be given after the next big win game and the big win to which the variable probability state is difficult to be given depending on the operation contents of the storage valve 1601a during the big win game. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, by setting the timing to release (open) the storage valve 1601a at the start of a predetermined round (for example, the final round) during the jackpot game, the balls can be stored in the second storage device 1600 even after the jackpot game is started. becomes possible. This makes it easier for the balls stored in the second storage device 1600 to enter the specific general winning opening 630a at the timing when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) during the current jackpot game.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the period during which the balls are stored in the second storage device 1600 (the period during which the storage valve 1601a is in the closed state) and the second storage device 1600 are stored in the balls. By changing the period (the period in which the storage valve 1601a is in the released (open) state), respectively, the state where the variable probability state is likely to be given after the end of the 1 jackpot game, and the next jackpot game after the 1 jackpot Since it is possible to set a state in which the variable probability state is likely to be imparted after the game ends, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine having various game characteristics, and to increase the interest of the game of the player. .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are modified. , the removal of the storage device solenoid 610 and the flow path solenoid 611 connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the input of the sound lamp control device 113. The difference is that various sensor groups 229 (passage sensors 2600 a to 2600 c ) are electrically connected to the output port 225 . Other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 121, various sensor groups 229 are electrically connected to the input/output port 225 in the fourth embodiment. The various sensors 229 include a passage sensor 2600a that detects the inflow of balls into the sorting device 2600, and a passage sensor 2600b that detects the passage of balls through the left discharge port 2607 provided in the sorting device 2600. , and a passing sensor 2600c for detecting that a ball has passed through a right discharge port 2606 provided in the sorting device 2600. Detection signals from the various sensors described above are output to the sound lamp control device 113. be.

The sound ramp control device 113 receives detection signals output from the various sensors described above, thereby making it possible to determine whether or not the balls that have flowed into the sorting device 2600 are normally discharged. Specifically, the number of balls that have flowed into the sorting device 2600 is calculated based on the signal output from the passage sensor 2600a. Then, the number of balls discharged to the outside of the sorting device 2600 is calculated based on the signals output from the passing sensor 2600b and the passing sensor 2600c.

This makes it possible to compare the total number of balls that have flowed into the sorting device 2600 and the total number of balls that have been discharged from the sorting device 2600 . More specifically, the number of balls flowing into the sorting device 2600 and the number of balls discharged from the sorting device 2600 are calculated in chronological order, and a predetermined time difference (about 3 seconds), that is, sorting If the increase and decrease in the number of balls coincide with each other considering the time difference required for the game balls to flow down normally in the device 2600, it is determined to be normal.

By monitoring the balls that have flowed into the sorting device 2600 in this way, for example, the balls are retained in the sorting device 2600, and the timing at which the most advantageous privilege for the player is given (for example, a jackpot game) There is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of entering a ball into the specific general prize winning opening 630a.

Furthermore, using the detection results of passing sensors 2600a to 2600c provided in the sorting device 2600 and the detection results of a sensor (not shown) that detects the ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 630a, the specific general winning opening It may be configured to monitor illegal ball entry into 630a. Specifically, when the number of balls entering the specific general winning opening 630a is larger than the total number of balls passing through the right discharge opening 2606 of the sorting device 2600, it is possible to determine that an illegal entry has been made. do it. By using such a configuration, for example, the act of making a hole in the glass unit 16 covering the surface of the game board 13 and allowing the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a without going through the sorting device 2600 can be performed properly. can grasp.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 122(a). FIG. 122(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 122(a), the ROM 202 of this embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that the content of the first win type selection table 202b is changed, and a second opening scenario setting table 202e is added. It is different in that

Here, with reference to Drawing 122 (b), the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in a 4th embodiment is explained. FIG. 122(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment is the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18(b)) in the first embodiment described above, with the addition of jackpot C as a jackpot type and each The difference is that the contents stipulated for the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot C) have been changed, and the hit of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot C) has been changed. However, other configurations are the same as the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". are stipulated. The details of this jackpot A will be described later with reference to FIG. 123, but the special game state (jackpot state) continues for eight rounds, and both the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 are activated during the jackpot game. This is a jackpot with a longer than normal closed period (2 seconds) and no advantage interval. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 69" in association with the jackpot B. In this jackpot B, the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds, and the period during which both the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 are closed during the jackpot game is longer than usual (2 Seconds) This is a jackpot where the advantage interval is set three times. The jackpot C is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". In this jackpot C, the special game state (jackpot state) continues for two rounds, and the period during which both the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 are closed during the jackpot game is longer than usual (2 Seconds) This is a jackpot in which the advantage interval is set once. In addition, unlike the big win A and the big win B, the end condition of the round game for the round game by this jackpot C is set to the elapse of one second or the entry of 10 balls. Therefore, the jackpot C is set as a jackpot in which the number of prize balls to be paid out is small (nearly zero).

In this way, since the number of rounds in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues and the number of advantageous intervals are set according to the jackpot type, according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won It is possible to give different advantageous states to each player.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. is defined in correspondence with the jackpot B in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is defined in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". there is In addition, since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C defined corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the above-described special symbol 1, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special pattern 1, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 50%, the jackpot B is 20%, and the jackpot C is 30%. In the case of winning, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 20%, the jackpot B at 70%, and the jackpot C at 10%.

Here, among the jackpots A to C, the jackpot B is the jackpot type for which the number of advantageous intervals is set to be large (three times) during the jackpot game. In other words, the special symbol game using the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player than the special symbol game using the special symbol 1 (probably variable state is likely to be given). there is

Next, referring to FIG. 123, the second open scenario setting table 202f in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 123(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second release scenario setting table 202f in the fourth embodiment.

The second opening scenario setting table 202f includes a second opening scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 that is referred to when a big win is won in the normal game state, and a second opening scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 that is referred to when a big win is won in the variable probability state. It has a scenario setting table (probability variation) 202f2, and defines the setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the first hit type selection table 202b. In addition, it is set so that the second open scenario setting table (variable probability) 202f2 is referred to when the jackpot is won in the time saving state.

Here, the second release scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 defined in the second release scenario setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1. This second open scenario setting table (normal) 202f1 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the normal game state. , an ending period, and a variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device) whose opening is controlled in the round game are defined, respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening period is "5 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds" for the first round to the seventh round (first interval period), The ending period is set to be "5 seconds".

Furthermore, the variable winning device controlled to be opened in the round game is the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) for the odd rounds (1st, 3rd, 5th, and 7th rounds), and the even numbered rounds (2.4.6. 8th round), a scenario is set in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened.

If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the opening period is "5 seconds", the interval period of the 1st to 4th rounds is "0.2 seconds" (first interval period), and the 5th to 7th rounds. interval period is set to "2 seconds" (second interval period), and the ending period is set to be "5 seconds".

Furthermore, the variable winning device controlled to be opened in the round game is the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) for the odd rounds (1st, 3rd, 5th, and 7th rounds), and the even numbered rounds (2.4.6. 8th round), a scenario is set in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened.

If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening period is "5 seconds", the interval period of the first round is "2 seconds" (second interval period), and the ending period is "5 seconds". set.

Furthermore, the variable winning device controlled to be opened in the round game is the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) for the odd round (1 round), and the second variable winning device 650 (first A scenario is set in which the two large openings 650a) are opened.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) arranged in the vertical direction are alternately opened and controlled in the continuous round game. Since it is configured to be able to set a short time (0.2 seconds) as the inter-round interval, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second It is possible to suppress the occurrence of balls that do not enter the variable winning device 650).

Furthermore, the first round (first round) executed in the jackpot game is set to the round opened by the first variable winning device 65 provided above of the two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of balls that do not enter the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in the interval between rounds.

That is, when the control for alternately opening the two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction is executed in a continuous round game, when one round in which the upper variable winning device is opened ends, the ball moves upward. It will pass through the winning device. By controlling the lower variable winning device to be opened so that the ball passing through the upper variable winning device enters, the variable winning device is operated in the inter-round interval between one round and the next round. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of balls that do not enter the ball.

However, in the reverse of the pattern described above, i.e., in the inter-round interval between the round in which the lower variable winning device is opened and the round in which the upper variable winning device is opened, the closed lower variable winning device A ball passing through will occur.

Therefore, the first round (first round) to be executed in the jackpot game is set to the round opened by the first variable winning device 65 provided above of the two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction, By reducing the number of shifts from the round game in which the lower variable winning device is opened during the jackpot game to the round game in which the upper variable winning device is opened, the variable winning device (first variable winning device) is reduced in the interval between rounds. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of balls that do not enter the device 65 and the second variable winning device 650).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, either the first interval (0.2 seconds) or the second interval (2 seconds) is set as the inter-round interval. During the first interval (0.2 seconds), the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650) is closed when the ball is shot during the jackpot game as described above. This is set in order to prevent passing through the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) during the interval period.

On the other hand, the second interval (2 seconds) is set to intentionally generate a ball passing through the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65 or second variable winning device 650) during the interval period. be.

Thus, by changing the interval period (the first interval period and the second interval period) corresponding to the jackpot type, it is possible to change the ratio of occurrence of balls flowing into the sorting device 2600 during the jackpot game. becomes possible.

That is, the degree of expectation that the ball enters the specific winning hole 630a during the variable probability winning valid period of the jackpot game can be varied depending on the jackpot type. That is, depending on the jackpot type, it is possible to set a jackpot to which the variable probability state is likely to be given and a jackpot to which the variable probability state is difficult to be given.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type in which a plurality of second intervals (2 seconds) are set, which is advantageous to the player, the second interval is the end of the jackpot game (5th to 7th rounds). eyes). This is to allow the player to expect that the second interval, which is advantageous to the player, will occur during the jackpot game until the end, but the period for setting the second interval may be set to another period. For example, the interval period after the end of the round in which the variable winning device (second variable winning device 650) provided below is opened may be set as the second interval period.

Specifically, in the case of the jackpot B, the intervals of the second round, the fourth round, and the sixth round (three times in total) may be set as the second intervals. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 that executes the control to alternately open the two variable winning devices arranged in the vertical direction in consecutive round games, a ball that does not enter any of the variable winning devices. The inter-round interval that is most likely to occur will be set to the second interval.

Therefore, a ball may enter the sorting device 2600 in an inter-round interval other than the second inter-round interval for intentionally generating a ball that does not enter any of the variable winning devices. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123(c), the second opening scenario setting table 202f is also set with a second opening scenario setting table (probability variable) 202f2. FIG. 123(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second open scenario setting table (variable probability) 202f2. This second open scenario table (variable probability) 202f2 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is won during the variable probability (time saving) state. The difference is that the time set as the second interval of the interval is changed from "2 seconds" to "4 seconds". Since other contents are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

By configuring in this way, if a jackpot is won during the variable probability (time reduction) state, the time set as the second interval becomes longer, so the ratio of balls entering the sorting device 2600 during the jackpot game is reduced. can be increased.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability variable state is granted by the jackpot winning during the probability variable (time saving) state higher than the probability that the probability variable state is granted by the jackpot winning during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a game state in which the game is advantageous continuously, and the effect is that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific general winning opening 630a is provided separately from the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) that is opened during the jackpot game, and the specific general winning opening 630a By passing the ball within the probability variable winning valid period (the period from the start of the first round of the jackpot game to the end of the final round round game), the probability variable state is granted after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to Therefore, like the jackpot C described above, the period in which the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650) is opened is short (1 second). Even if it is, by setting a long interval period between rounds, the variable probability winning valid period can be lengthened.

Thus, even in the case of a jackpot with almost no payout of prize balls (a jackpot with a short period in which a variable prize winning device is opened), the game of determining whether or not to give a probability change at the end of the jackpot game can be fully enjoyed. has the effect of being able to

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the interval period between rounds is longer when the jackpot C is selected in the variable probability (shorter time) state than when the jackpot C is selected in the normal game state. Therefore, in a jackpot where prize balls are hardly paid out (a jackpot with a short period in which the variable winning device is opened), the length of the variable winning prize effective period is changed according to the game state, and it is easy to give a variable probability at the end of the jackpot game. A big win and a hard-to-win big win can be set, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided as types of jackpots, but the types of jackpot types may be further increased. In this case, for example, it is preferable to provide a plurality of jackpot types in which an inter-round interval of a different period is set for the jackpot C. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game to determine whether or not to acquire a variable probability state by using a big hit with almost no payout of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the flow of the jackpot game of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 124(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the normal game state (normal state) and the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and FIG. 124(b) is a probability variable It is a timing chart showing the flow of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the game state (probability variable state) and the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type.

First, the flow of the jackpot game when winning the jackpot in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 124(a). Jackpot B is a jackpot of 8 rounds as shown in FIG. 122(b). Also, when jackpot B is selected in the normal state, as shown in FIG. The round number is set to 2 seconds and the ending duration is set to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124(a), when five seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot game, the opening period ends and the first round of the round game is started. This first round round game is a round game in which the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) provided above the second variable winning device 650 is opened. This round game ends when 30 seconds elapse or when 10 balls enter the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a).

Here, when the round game of the 1st round is started, the probability variation prize valid flag 203s is set to ON. While the probability variable winning valid flag 203s is set to ON, when a ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a, it becomes a probability variable winning valid period in which a variable probability state is given after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when the first round ends, the first interval (0.2 seconds) is started as the interval period of the first round, and when the first interval (0.2 seconds) ends, the lower part of the first variable winning device 65 A second round game is started in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) provided in the second round is opened.

With this configuration, after the first round is completed, the ball that has passed through the first variable prize winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) in the closed state will be the second variable prize winning in the round game of the second round. A ball can be entered into the device 650 (second large opening 650a). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ball can be efficiently entered into the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), so that the player can smoothly execute the jackpot game. has the effect of being able to provide

Then, when the sixth round game in which the second variable prize winning device 650 (the second large opening 650a) is opened ends, a second interval (two seconds) is started as an interval period of the sixth round. When the interval (2 seconds) ends, the 7th round game is started in which the first variable winning device 65 (first large opening 65a) provided above the second variable winning device 650 is opened.

Here, the interval of the sixth round (corresponding to the intervals of the fifth, sixth, and seventh rounds in this embodiment) is set to the second interval (2 seconds) longer than the first interval (0.2 seconds). be. By setting this second interval, it is possible to set a period during which the balls tend to flow into the sorting device 2600 during the jackpot game. Specifically, since the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed for two seconds, three balls flow into the sorting device 2600 .

Then, although not shown, when the 8th round round game (round game in which the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened) is completed, the probability variable winning enable flag is set to OFF, and then , the jackpot game ends after an ending period (5 seconds).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, as the interval period between rounds, the first interval (0.2 seconds) in which game balls are less likely to flow into the sorting device 2600 and the interval longer than the first interval By setting the period to be long, the second interval (2 seconds) that easily flows into the sorting device 2600 can be set, and the interval period between rounds is set based on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won. , the number of times the second interval is set is varied.

As a result, by varying the frequency of balls flowing into the sorting device 2600 during the validity period of variable winning prizes depending on the type of jackpot, the probability of the balls entering the specific general winning opening 630a (the ease of entering the ball) can be varied. It becomes possible to

In addition, since the balls flowing into the distribution device 2600 are regularly distributed by the first distribution member 1901 and the second distribution member 1902 (see FIG. 120), a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of the balls By flowing into the sorting device 2600, the ball can be reliably entered into the specific general winning hole 630a.

Furthermore, depending on the distribution status of each distribution member (first distribution member 1901 and second distribution member 1902) in the distribution device 2600, one ball is distributed to the distribution device 2600 during the variable winning valid period. Since there is a possibility that the ball will enter the specific general prize winning port 630a just by flowing in, the player expects the ball to enter the specific general prize winning port 630a every time the ball flows into the sorting device 2600. The game will be executed while Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game.

Further, even if a jackpot game in which the second interval is not set (jackpot A in the present embodiment) is executed, it does not mean that the probability variable state is not given after the jackpot game ends. While the round game in which the device 650 (second large opening 650a) is opened is completed and the second variable winning device 650 (second large opening 650a) is closed (first interval (0.2 seconds) ), the ball can enter the sorting device 2600 by passing the ball through the second variable winning device 650 .

Therefore, in all jackpot games, there is a possibility that a variable probability state will be given when the jackpot game ends, so the player expects that a variable probability state will be given to the end regardless of which jackpot is won. You can play games with

Next, with reference to FIG. 124(b), the flow of the jackpot game when winning the jackpot in the variable probability game state (variable probability state) will be described. When the jackpot B is won in the probability variable gaming state (probability variable state), the time of the second interval is extended from 2 seconds to 4 seconds as compared to the case where the jackpot B is won in the normal game state shown in FIG. 124(a). There is a difference.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124(b), the interval of the sixth round (corresponding to the intervals of the fifth, sixth, and seventh rounds in this embodiment) is the second interval longer than the first interval (0.2 seconds). An interval (4 seconds) is set. By setting this second interval, it is possible to set a period during which the balls tend to flow into the sorting device 2600 during the jackpot game. Specifically, since the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are closed for four seconds, six balls flow into the sorting device 2600 .

That is, when the jackpot is won in the variable probability state, the jackpot B and the jackpot C, in which the second interval is set once or more, are selected, so that four or more balls are distributed to the sorting device 2600 during the variable probability winning valid period. Since it becomes possible to flow in and the probability variable state is given after the jackpot game ends with a high probability, the probability variable state is given after the jackpot game ends with a higher probability than when the jackpot is won in the normal game state.

Therefore, when shifting to a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, the variable probability state is likely to continue, so immediately after shifting to the variable probability state, the player is dissatisfied with the transition to the normal game state. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation of giving.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) are arranged vertically, and two variable winning devices are arranged in a continuous round game. By alternately opening the winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), a ball shot during a jackpot game is efficiently entered into the variable winning device. A distributing device 2600 for distributing balls to a specific general prize winning port 630a is provided below the two variable prize winning devices.

As a result, the balls that do not enter either of the two variable winning devices during the jackpot game, that is, the balls that have been wasted in the past, flow into the sorting device 2600, and the specific general winning opening 630a is generated. It is possible to enter the ball.

Therefore, since it is possible to provide the player with a game using all the balls shot during the jackpot game, there is an effect that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, description will be given of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, an interval performance is executed during the second interval period as a performance during the jackpot game, and six rounds are performed to determine whether or not the probability variable state is given after the jackpot is completed. The difference is that the round effect to be notified during the eye round game is executed.

First, the interval effect will be described with reference to FIG. 125(a). First, with reference to FIG. 125(a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 125(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. The display area displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the present fourth embodiment is a schematic diagram showing the part that the player aims at with respect to the display screen of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 76). is changed to the sorting device 2600, and the rest is the same.

The display screen shown in FIG. 125(a) shows an interval effect displayed during the interval period (2 seconds) of the fifth round after the end of the fifth round of the round game. , and the second variable winning device 650 are both in a closed state, and the screen is for informing the player that the ball can be flowed into the sorting device 650. FIG. It should be noted that this interval effect is a effect that is displayed every time at the interval between rounds in which the second interval is set.

Then, when the interval period of the fifth round ends and the round game of the sixth round is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 125(b) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 125(b), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the sixth round of the round game will be described. FIG. 125(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. In the fourth embodiment, it is determined that the ball entered the specific general winning opening 630a during the period from the start of the variable winning valid period (see FIG. 124) to the fifth round interval period (the variable variable state after the end of the jackpot). is determined to be granted), a round effect is executed to inform the player during the sixth round of the round game.

Here, if it has already been confirmed that the variable probability state will be provided after the end of the jackpot, an effect is displayed to congratulate the player with "Congratulations on getting" as shown in FIG. 122(b). On the other hand, if it has not been decided that the variable probability state will be imparted at the stage of executing the round effect, an effect is displayed to encourage the player, ``I'm sorry, don't give up yet'' (not shown).

In the present embodiment, since the variable probability winning valid period continues until the final round of the jackpot game ends, it is confirmed that the variable probability state is given at the stage when the round game of the sixth round is executed. Even without it, there is still a possibility that the definite variable state will be granted. As a result, the player informed that the variable probability state will be imparted by executing the round performance can be made to execute the rest of the jackpot game with peace of mind, while the variable probability state is imparted. A player who is informed that the situation has not been settled can be made to play between the remaining jackpot game machines willingly.

In addition to the production during the jackpot game described above, the production of immediately notifying when the ball enters the specific general winning prize opening 630a during the validity period of the variable winning prize, and the variable state is given until the jackpot game ends. An effect may be executed in which the player is not notified of whether or not the game is available.

Next, returning to FIG. 121, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 according to the fourth embodiment does not have the prize-winning counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment, and has a probability variable passing flag 223p added.

The variable probability passage flag 223p is a flag indicating that it is determined that a variable probability state is given after the end of the jackpot game due to the ball entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the variable probability winning valid period during the jackpot game. . By setting the variable probability passing flag 223p to ON, a round effect is executed to notify that the variable probability state is given after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 125(b)). This variable probability passing flag 223p is set to the specific general winning opening 630a while the variable probability winning valid flag 203s is set to ON (within the valid period of probability variable winning) in the winning process 4 (S1111) which will be described later with reference to FIG. A state command (S1453 in FIG. 126) that is set based on the ball passing through the variable probability switch provided is set to ON by the audio lamp control device 113 receiving (S4952 in FIG. 127), 128, it is set to OFF in the round effect processing (S4953) described later (S5106).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 126, processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, since the storage device 600 (see FIG. 2) is omitted from the first embodiment described above, the control processing related to the storage valve 607a (see FIG. 8) provided in the storage device 600 is deleted. Since the channel switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15) in the second variable prize winning device 650 is deleted, the control processing for the channel switching valve 650d is deleted. The difference is that the content of the winning process (S1111 in FIG. 35) to be executed is changed to winning process 4 (see FIG. 126).

In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment, only the points that have been changed from the first embodiment will be described, and the processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be described. , and the simple deletion of processing, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 126, the winning process 4 (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning process 4 (S1111). This winning process 4 (S1111) is different from the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above, except that the process is executed only when the probability variable winning valid flag 203s is set to ON ( S1451), control content so that the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON by passing (entering the ball) through the variable probability switch (specific general winning opening 630a) during the period when the variable probability winning effective flag 203 is set to ON is changed (S1452), and when the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON, the state command corresponding to the variable probability passing state is set (S1453), and other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, among the processes executed in the winning process 4 (S1111), the processes of S1451 and S1452 are the same as the winning process 3 (FIG. 113) of the above-described third embodiment, so the same reference numerals are used. and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning process 4 (S1111) is executed, the process of S1451 is executed in the same manner as the winning process 3 (see FIG. 113) of the third embodiment described above. The processes of S1402 to S1406 are executed in the same manner as the form winning process (see FIG. 38). After that, the process of S1452 is executed in the same manner as the winning process 3 of the third embodiment (see FIG. 113), and the processes of S1410 and S1412 are executed in the same manner as the winning process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). executed.

When the processing of S1412 is completed, next, the state command corresponding to the variable probability passage state is set (S1453), and this processing is terminated. In the processing of this S1453, while the variable probability winning effective flag 203s is set to ON (between the start of the first round in the jackpot game and the end of the last round), the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a. (The ball has passed through the variable probability switch).

This variable probability passing command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1001) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 34). By the voice lamp control device 113 receiving the state command set in the process of S1453, as in the round effect executed during the jackpot game (see FIG. 125 (b)), before the jackpot game ends, It is possible to inform whether or not the variable probability state is provided after the end of the big winning game.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the content of command determination processing 4 of the main processing (see FIG. 42) is changed. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, only the differences from the above-described first embodiment will be described, and the same processes as in the first embodiment will be described. Detailed descriptions of other processes are omitted.

First, the command determination process 4 (S1811) executed in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (S1811). This command determination process 4 (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113, like the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. , which are executed in response to various commands output from the main controller 110 .

This command determination process 4 (S1811) is the above-described command determination process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), with the addition of a process that is executed when a variable probability passing command is received, and the winning information command The difference is that the content of the processing to be executed when the command is received is changed and the content of the processing to be executed when the round number command is received is specified, and the other processing is the same. The processes of S1904 to S1910 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above are also executed in the command determination process 3 of the third embodiment. It is included in the processing (S1919) according to the command, and the illustration of that processing is omitted. Further, among the processes illustrated in FIG. 115, the same processes as those in the above-described first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 127, when the command determination process 4 (S1811) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1903 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the process of S1901 (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation passing command has been received (S4951). When it is determined that the probability variable passage command is received (S4951: Yes), the probability variable passage flag 223p is set to ON (S4952), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4951 that the variable probability passing command has not been received (S4951: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S1911). Here, if it is determined that a prize information command has been received (S1911: Yes), the data stored in the prize information storage area is updated based on the received command (S4953), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then the processing of S1913 to S1918 is performed in the same manner as the command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43). to run. Then, if it is determined in the process of 1916 that the ending command has not been received (S1916: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4954).

Here, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4954: Yes), round effect processing is executed (S4955). This round effect is a process of determining the content of the effect to be executed during the jackpot game. Details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the round effect processing (S4955) ends, next, a display round number command is set (S4956), and this processing ends. This display round number command is currently being executed by being output to the display control device 114 in command output processing (S1802) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control processing 113. The number of rounds of the round game is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 125(a)).

In the processing of S4954, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4954: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1919). In addition to the processing described in the command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), the processing of steps S1904 to S1910 of the command determination processing of the first embodiment is performed as the processing according to other commands. include.

Next, referring to FIG. 128, the round effect processing (S4955) executed in the command determination processing 4 (S1811 in FIG. 127) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round effect processing (S4955). This round effect processing (4955) is a process of determining the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, specifically, a process of determining the display contents of the round effect shown in FIG. 125(b). is executed.

When the round effect processing (S4955) is executed, the current round number is first extracted based on the round number command received this time (S5101). Then, it is determined whether the current number of rounds is 6, that is, whether it is time to start the sixth round (S5104).

Here, if it is determined that the current round number is not 6 (it is not the time to start the 6th round) (S5102: No), a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. (S5103), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the current number of rounds is 6 (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability passage flag 223p is ON (S5104).

In the processing of S5104, if it is determined that the probability variable passage flag 223p is set to ON (S5104: Yes), a round command for display indicating the probability variable route passage (that the probability variable passage command has been received) is set ( S5105). By setting the display round command indicating the passage of the variable probability route, an image congratulating the player with "Congratulations on getting" is displayed during the sixth round of the round game (see FIG. 125(b)).

And, when the processing of S5105 is finished, then the variable probability passage flag 223p is set to OFF (S5106), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variable passage flag 223p is not set to ON (set to OFF) in the processing of S5104 (S5104: No), the probability variable route non-passing (the probability variable passage command has not been received ) is set (S5107), and this process is terminated. By setting the display round command indicating that the variable probability route is not passed, an image encouraging the player to say "I'm sorry, don't give up" is displayed (not shown) during the sixth round of the round game.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the main controller 110 sends information indicating that the ball has entered the specific general winning opening 630a within the probability variable winning effective period (see FIG. 124) during the jackpot game. Since it is constructed so as to be able to output to the voice lamp control device 113, for example, it is possible to notify whether or not the variable probability state is given after the end of the big win game, for example, before the end of the big win game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, until the final round of the jackpot game is over, since the variable probability winning valid period continues, the stage (middle stage) in which the round game of the sixth round is executed, the variable probability state is given. Even if it is not confirmed, there is still a possibility that a certain state will be granted. As a result, the player informed that the probability variable state is imparted by executing the round performance displayed during the sixth round of the round game is allowed to execute the rest of the jackpot game with peace of mind. On the other hand, the player informed that the provision of the variable probability state is not confirmed can be made to play the remaining jackpot game machines willingly.

In addition to the production during the jackpot game described above, the production of immediately notifying when the ball enters the specific general winning prize opening 630a during the validity period of the variable winning prize, and the variable state is given until the jackpot game ends. An effect may be executed in which the player is not notified of whether or not the game is available.

Although two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) are provided in the fourth embodiment, the number of variable winning devices may be one. In addition, as a configuration of the variable winning device, one variable winning device has two openings on the upstream side and the downstream side in the flow direction of the balls, and the two openings are opened and closed by one opening and closing member. can be With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of balls that do not enter the variable winning device between rounds during the jackpot game.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the specific general winning opening 630a is provided below the two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650), but other configurations may be used. Alternatively, for example, a variable prize winning device may be arranged below the specific general prize winning port 630a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the probability variable winning valid period during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, a sorting device 2600 may be provided above the specific general prize winning opening 630a. By configuring in this way, for example, when winning a jackpot that ends the jackpot game in a short period of time (for example, a two-round jackpot), the specific general prize winning opening 630a is within the probability variable winning valid period during the jackpot game. It is possible to provide the playability that whether or not the ball enters the ball is determined by the distribution state of the distribution device 2600 balls.

Such a game feature, as in the present embodiment, separates the specific area (specific general winning opening 630a) where the variable probability state can be given by entering (passing) within the variable probability winning valid period from the variable winning device It can be realized because it is provided, and even if a jackpot with few balls to be paid out (a jackpot with a short period in which the variable prize winning device is opened, for example, a two-round jackpot) is won, a game that gives a variable probability state is executed. can be made

Therefore, even in the case of a jackpot with a small number of balls to be paid out (a jackpot with a short period in which the variable prize-winning device is opened, for example, a two-round jackpot), which has been disadvantageous to the player in the past, the player's desire to play can be enhanced. There is

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 149. FIG. In the above-described third embodiment, the second storage device 1600 is provided, and the second storage device 1600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the balls can flow down. It is configured to be able to win in the variable winning opening) 630a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 630b. Further, the second storage device 1600 is provided with a storage valve 1600a capable of storing balls flowing down a part of the channel.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, instead of the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment, a third storage device 3600, a first distribution member 3901 and a second distribution member 3902, and a first gate 670 are provided. ing.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the first variable display is provided in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the area provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80). A winning device 65 is provided, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided below the first variable winning device 65 . Since the configurations of the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in that a second variable winning device 650 is added, and instead of the second storage device 1600, a third storage device 3600, the provision of the first distribution member 3901 and the second distribution member 3902, the provision of the first gate 670, and the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are partially changed. The points, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. , and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 129, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 129 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the area on the right side of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment (the area on the right side of the game board 13, that is, the variable display device unit 80) are different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 130, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is an enlarged view of the area of the two-dot chain line CXXX shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 130, a first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 are arranged vertically in the right area of the game board 13. By controlling so that the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are alternately opened, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of balls that do not enter any of the variable winning devices during the jackpot game. It is configured. The configuration and operation control of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, which are arranged vertically, are the same as in the above-described fourth embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A plurality of nails (nails K10, K11) are planted below the second variable prize winning device 650, and a ball passing through the second variable prize winning device 650 is formed between the nails K10 and K11. It flows down to opening 3900 or channel 3910 . Here, the nail K10 and the nail K11 are each provided by connecting a plurality of nails, and by changing the planting positions and inclinations of the plurality of nails, the ratio of the balls flowing down the opening 3900 can be changed. is configured to

Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is configured to flow down to the opening 3900 at a rate of 1 ball out of 3 balls (about 33%) out of the balls launched by the right-handed game and passed through the second variable winning device 650. It is A ball that flows down the flow path 3910 in the right area passes through the through gate 67 and flows down to a position where it can enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball that does not enter the second ball entrance 640 , through an out port 66 (see FIG. 129) to a ball discharge path (not shown).

In addition, the balls flowing down the opening 3900 are distributed to a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 3900a to fourth flow path 3900d) by the first distribution device 3901 and the second distribution device 3902, and finally the second distribution device 3900. The ball that has flowed down the flow path 3900b and the fourth flow path 3900d passes through the through gate 67 in the same way as the ball that has passed through the flow path 3910, flows down to a position where it can enter the second ball entrance 640, and enters the second ball entrance 640. Balls that have not entered the ball inlet 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66 (see FIG. 129).

On the other hand, the balls flowing down the third flow path 3900 c pass through the first gate 670 and flow down to the third storage device 3600 . The third storage device 3600 has a storage valve 3600a configured identically to the storage valve 1601a provided in the second storage device 1600 of the third embodiment described above. , is retained (retained) on the retention valve 3600a.

As shown in FIG. 130, the third storage device 3600 is provided with a side wall 3600b so that one ball is stored on the storage valve 3600a. It is configured to remain on the storage valve 3600a even if it collides with another ball that has come.

Further, when a new ball flows down toward the third storage device 3600 while the ball is stored on the storage valve 3600a, it collides with the ball stored on the storage valve 3600a, and the flow path 3911 be guided to. The ball guided to the flow path 3911 flows down to a position where it can enter the second ball entrance 640, and the ball that does not enter the second ball entrance 640 passes through the out port 66 (see FIG. 129). It is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

Then, the balls stored in the third storage device 3600 enter the specific general prize winning opening 630a provided below the third storage device 3600 when the storage valve 3600a is opened (released). The specific general prize winning opening 630a has the same structure as that of the above-described third embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the characteristic configuration among the game features of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be briefly described. In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol lottery (win/fail determination) executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. Later, when the ball passes through the first gate 670, the jackpot type is determined. Then, the jackpot game is started by determining the jackpot type (selecting the jackpot type).

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 16 seconds) elapses after it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot in the special symbol propriety determination, the storage valve 3600a of the third storage device 3600 is opened.

Furthermore, as in the above-described third embodiment, a specific general winning opening 630a is provided, and the final round game ends after the first (first round) round game is started within a specific period during the jackpot game By entering the ball into the specific general winning hole 630a during the period until the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player is given.

That is, when it is determined to be a big hit in the judgment of the special symbol, the ball is passed through the first gate 670 to shift to the game state (jackpot standby state) in which the big hit game is started, and the storage valve 3600a is opened ( (16 seconds, for example). Then, when the ball is passed through the first gate 670 within a predetermined period (for example, within 9 seconds) after it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 enters the third storage device 3600. A jackpot game is started in the stored state.

A round game (first round round game) in which one of the variable winning devices (eg, the first variable winning device 65) is opened after an opening of a predetermined period (eg, 6 seconds) when the jackpot game is started. is started. When a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, 16 seconds elapses) after it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the storage valve 3600a is changed to the open position, and the balls stored in the third storage device 3600 are specified. The ball enters the general winning hole 630a.

If the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is within the probability variable winning valid period (the period from the start of the first round round game to the end of the final round round game), the jackpot game A certain state is given after the end.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a probability variable state is provided after the jackpot game ends according to the period required from when the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot until the ball is passed through the first gate 670. It is possible to change the degree of expectation (probability) to be given.

Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game from when the special symbol is determined to be a big win (after shifting to the big win waiting state) to when the ball is passed through the first gate 670.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, two variable winning devices (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) are provided in the right area of the game board 13, and the two variable winning devices are operated for each round game. By alternately controlling the opening, a situation is suppressed in which a ball shot during a jackpot game does not enter any of the variable winning devices. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of balls passing through the second variable winning device 650 and entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the variable probability winning valid period in the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 130, the flow of spheres in the right area in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, about 33% of the balls fired by the right-handed game pass through the opening 3900, and 50% of the balls flowing down the opening 3900 are distributed to the first flow path 3900a, and the first flow path 3900a 50% of the balls that flow down are distributed to the third flow path 3900c, and the balls that flow down the third flow path 3900c enter the specific general winning hole 630a. That is, the balls shot by the right-handed game enter the specific general winning hole 630a at a rate of about 1 ball out of 12 balls.

Also, the ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state passes through the opening 3900 formed by the nail K10 and the nail K11, and flows down the first distribution section 3901 and the second distribution section 3902. and distributed to each channel. Here, it is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the ball that has passed through the opening 3900 to pass through the first gate 670 .

Then, the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 is stored (held) in the third storage device 3600 when the storage valve 3600a is closed, and when the storage valve 3600a is open (released), the specific general winning prize The ball enters the mouth 630a. Here, the time required for the ball passing through the first gate 670 to enter the specific general prize winning opening 630a is approximately one second.

Further, when the storage valve 3600a is opened (released), the time required for the ball stored (held) in the storage valve 3600a to enter the specific general winning opening 630a is set to 0.5 seconds. ing.

By configuring in this way, when the ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state of winning a special symbol jackpot (jackpot standby state), a jackpot game is executed. Then, the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 is stored (held) in the third storage device 3600, and after a predetermined time (for example, 16 seconds after winning the jackpot), the storage valve 3600a is opened (released). The ball enters the specific general winning device 630a.

Further, even if the right-handed game is continuously executed after the ball passes through the first gate 670, the next ball passes through the first gate 670 after about 7.2 seconds ( 100 shots can be fired in 60 seconds, and the number of balls that pass through the first gate 670 is 1 out of 12). That is, by setting a period shorter than 7.2 seconds (maximum 6 seconds in this embodiment) as the opening period in the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started, and two variable winning devices (first variable It is possible to suppress the balls that have passed through the winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 from entering the specific general winning hole 630a during the round game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the specific winning hole 630a at an unintended timing and to provide a fair game.

Furthermore, this embodiment is configured to be able to determine whether or not the ball that entered the specific general winning hole 630a is a ball that has been shot through a proper game. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 130, a sensor (not shown) that detects a ball passing through the opening 3900 and a sensor (not shown) that detects a ball passing through the second flow path 3900b. A sensor (not shown) for detecting balls passing through the fourth flow path 3900d is provided, and is configured to be able to measure the number of balls fired in a right-handed game. The main controller 110 is configured to output a command capable of ascertaining the number of balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and the number of balls that have passed through the first gate 670 .

Based on the signals output from the sensors provided as described above and the commands output from main controller 110, the number of balls passing through opening 3900, the number of balls passing through second flow path 3900b, and the number of balls passing through fourth flow By determining whether the total number of balls passing through path 3900d and the total number of balls passing through first gate 670 match, it is possible to fraudulently Act of letting the ball pass through the gate 670) It is configured to be able to determine whether the ball is allowed to pass through the first gate 670 or not.

Further, in the present embodiment, one out of four balls passing through the opening 3900b is configured to pass through the first gate 670. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the second flow path 3900b Whether or not the distribution member properly distributes the balls by determining whether or not the ratio of the total number of balls that have passed through the flow path 3900d and the number of balls that have passed through the first gate 670 is 3:1. is configured to be able to discriminate.

As a result, the distribution member is damaged and the balls are distributed only to one of the paths, or the distribution member is illegally damaged so that the balls are distributed only to the paths that are advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to easily determine that a fraudulent act is being performed.

When comparing the number of balls for each sensor or each command or the total number of balls for each sensor or command, it is preferable to provide a predetermined allowable range. This takes into consideration the time lag when the ball flows down. Specifically, it is preferable to consider the time (approximately 1 second) required for the ball that has passed through the opening 3900 to pass through the through gate 67 or the first gate 670 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the third embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are modified. is partially changed, and the sensor group 229 connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 is eliminated. Other electrical configurations are the same as those in the third embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 132(a). FIG. 132(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 132(a), the ROM 202 of this embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment in that the content of the first winning type selection table 202b is changed, and the opening scenario setting table 202e is changed to the third opening. The difference is that the scenario setting table 202g is used.

Here, with reference to Drawing 132 (b), the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in a 5th embodiment is explained. FIG. 132(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment. In this embodiment, after winning the jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery (whether or not determination), based on the ball passing through the first gate 670, the first winning type selection table 202b is referred to, and the jackpot type is selected. is selected.

The first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment is defined for each jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot C) for the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 100(b)) in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the content is changed, and other configurations are the same as the first winning type selection table 202b of the third embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(b), as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 1, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". are stipulated. This jackpot A is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for eight rounds. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 69" in association with the jackpot B. This jackpot B is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for eight rounds. The jackpot C is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". This jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for two rounds.

Among the above-described jackpot types, jackpot A and jackpot B are both jackpots with the same number of rounds (8 rounds). Scenarios (operation control scenarios during jackpot games) are differentiated for jackpots in which round games of the same number of rounds (eight rounds) are executed.

Next, as the jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol 2, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. is defined in correspondence with the jackpot B in the range of "20 to 89", and the jackpot C is defined in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". there is In addition, since the contents set in the jackpot types A to C defined corresponding to the special symbol 2 are the same as those of the above-described special symbol 1, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won with the special pattern 1, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 50%, the jackpot B is 20%, and the jackpot C is 30%. In the case of winning, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 20%, the jackpot B at 70%, and the jackpot C at 10%.

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the third open scenario setting table 202g in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 133(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third release scenario setting table 202g in the fifth embodiment.

This third open scenario setting table 202g is a third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1, which is referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in the state of winning a jackpot in the normal game state (jackpot waiting state). , and a third open scenario setting table (variable probability) 202g2 that is referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state of winning a jackpot in the variable probability state (jackpot standby state), and each of them has a first hit. The setting contents of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected in the type selection table 202b are defined. It should be noted that, when the jackpot is won in the time saving state, it is set so as to refer to the third open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202g2.

Here, the third release scenario setting table (normal) 202g1 defined in the third release scenario setting table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 133(b). FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1. This third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1 is a table that is referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state of winning a jackpot in a normal game state (jackpot waiting state), and is selected. An opening period, an interval period between rounds, and an ending period in the jackpot game are set corresponding to the jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening scenario is set such that the opening period is "6 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds". is the jackpot B, the opening scenario is set such that the opening period is "16 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds". When the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening scenario is set such that the opening period is "6 seconds", the interval period is "0.2 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds".

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(c), the third opening scenario setting table (probability variation) 202g2 defined in the third opening scenario setting table 202g will be described. FIG. 133(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the third open scenario setting table (variable probability) 202g2. This third open scenario setting table (variable probability) 202g2 is a table that is referred to when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state of winning a jackpot in a variable probability (time saving) state (jackpot standby state), and is selected. An opening period, an inter-round interval period, and an ending period in the jackpot game are set corresponding to the jackpot type thus set.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the opening scenario is set such that the opening period is "1 second", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds". is the jackpot B, the opening scenario is set such that the opening period is "11 seconds", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds". When the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening scenario is set such that the opening period is "1 second", the interval period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "5 seconds".

As described above, in the present embodiment, among the periods (opening period, interval period, ending period) set during the jackpot, the opening period is set differently depending on the jackpot type. In addition, the opening period and the interval period are set to differ according to the game state (normal state or variable probability (time reduction) state).

Thus, by changing the opening period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening period (until the first round of the round game is started) is changed. .

Therefore, it is possible to provide a big win in which the ball stored in the third storage device 3600 is easy to enter and a big win in which the ball is difficult to enter within the probability variable winning valid period. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG.

In addition, the interval between rounds is set to 0.2 seconds in the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1, which is referred to in the case of the normal game state (see FIG. 133(b)), and the variable probability (time reduction) state It is set to 0.5 seconds in the third open scenario setting table (probability variation) 202g2 referred to in the case of .

This inter-round interval lengthens the state in which none of the variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) is open during the variable winning effective period by setting the period longer. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a provided below the second variable winning device 650 during the variable probability winning valid period.

On the other hand, by shortening the period of the interval between rounds, it is possible to shorten the state in which none of the variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) is open during the variable winning valid period. can. Therefore, the balls shot during the jackpot game can be efficiently entered into any of the variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650).

That is, the jackpot game in which the open scenario is set by referring to the third open scenario setting table (normal) 202g1, that is, the jackpot game executed in the normal game state has the inter-round interval set to 0.2 seconds. Therefore, few balls pass through the second variable winning device 650 during the inter-round interval.

On the other hand, the jackpot game in which the open scenario is set by referring to the third open scenario setting table (probability variable) 202g2, that is, the jackpot game executed in the probability variable (shorter time) state is set to an interval between rounds of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the second variable winning device 650 during the inter-round interval increases.

As a result, in the jackpot game executed in the probability variable (shorter time) state, even if the balls stored in the third storage device 3600 at the start of the jackpot game do not enter the specific general winning opening 630a within the variable probability winning valid period , the ball passing through the second variable prize winning device 650 during the interval between rounds of the jackpot game can easily enter the specific general prize winning opening 630a within the probability variable prize valid period.

Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability variable state is given by the jackpot winning during the probability variable (shorter time) state higher than the probability that the probability variable state is granted by the jackpot winning during the normal state. An advantageous game state can be easily provided continuously, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the interval between rounds is set to 0.2 seconds for all jackpot games that are executed when a jackpot is won in the normal game state. May be set. For example, the period of the interval between rounds in a specific number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) is set to 1.5 seconds, and a game is executed in which the ball is entered into the specific general winning opening 630a using the interval between rounds. good too.

Next, contents defined in the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 134(a). As shown in FIG. 134(a), the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment has a jackpot flag 203t, a storage valve opening flag 203u and an opening counter 203v added to the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

The jackpot flag 203t is a flag indicating that the special symbol determination result is a jackpot. When the ball passes through the first gate 670 while the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON, the jackpot type and release scenario are set, and the jackpot game is started. This jackpot flag 203t is set to ON when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in special symbol variation processing 5 (S104 in FIG. 141) (S271), and jackpot type determination processing (S1051 in FIG. 143). is referred to (S5201). Then, it is set to OFF in the jackpot type determination process (S1051 in FIG. 143) (S5203).

The storage valve open flag 203u is a flag indicating that the counter (open counter 203v) for opening the storage valve 3600a is counting because the determination result of the special symbol is a jackpot. While the storage valve opening flag 203u is set to ON, a new value is not set to the opening counter 203v.

The storage valve open flag 203u is set to ON in the storage valve opening process (S1052 in FIG. 144) (S5210), and is set to OFF after the storage solenoid 600 is set to ON (S5214).

The opening counter 203v is a counter for counting the timing of opening the storage valve 3600a when the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit. The open counter 203v is set to a counter value (S5211) in the storage valve opening process (S1052 in FIG. 144), and is decremented in the process of S5215.

Next, returning to FIG. 131, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The ROM 222 of the fifth embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the third embodiment in that the expectation level display selection table 222b is deleted and a pseudo effect frequency setting table 222c is added. Hereinafter, the pseudo effect count setting table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 134(b).

FIG. 134(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the pseudo effect count setting table 222c. The pseudo effect count setting table 222c is a table for setting the number of pseudo effects to be executed in the first pseudo effect (see FIGS. 138 and 139) which is executed when the special symbol determination result is a big win. be. This pseudo effect number setting table 222c is referred to when setting the number of pseudo effects in the pseudo effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5404).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), according to the game state (normal game state or variable probability (shorter working hours) state) when the determination result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the set number of times of pseudo production is set. When a jackpot is won in a normal game state, the number of simulated performances is set to 4 times, and when a jackpot is won in a variable probability (time saving) state, the number of times of simulated performance is set to 5 times.

Returning to FIG. 131, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment deletes the storage upper limit flag 223k, the special spherical flow flag 223m and the storage valve open flag 223n from the RAM 223 in the above-described third embodiment, and the pseudo effect flag 223q and the pseudo effect counter. 223r and an opening flag 223s are added.

The pseudo effect flag 223q is a flag indicating that the pseudo effect is being executed. This pseudo effect flag 223q is set to ON in the jackpot related process (S5912 in FIG. 147) (S5302), and is set to OFF in the pseudo effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5411).

The pseudo effect counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of times the pseudo effect is executed, and is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the pseudo effect is executed. By discriminating the counter value of this pseudo-presentation counter 223r, the final pseudo-presentation can be discriminated and different effects can be executed. The pseudo effect counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S5407) in the pseudo effect process (S1854 in FIG. 149), and when it is determined that the value of the counter is the upper limit (S5405: Yes), it is reset to 0 (S5413 ).

The opening flag 223s is a flag indicating that a jackpot game has started. This opening flag 223s is output from main controller 110 in the jackpot-related processing (S5912 in FIG. 147) based on the ball passing through first gate 670 in the state (jackpot standby state) in which the jackpot of a special symbol is won. is set to ON when an opening command is received (S5305), and is referred to when setting a pattern to be pseudo-stopped in pseudo-effect processing (S1854 in FIG. 149) (S5408), and after setting the contents of the pseudo-effect It is set to off (S5411).

Here, the flow of the game when winning the jackpot in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG. FIG. 135 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a big win is won in the normal game state, and FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a big win is won in the variable probability (time saving) state.

First, as shown in FIG. 135, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a counter value (for example, a value corresponding to 16 seconds) for opening the storage device (third storage device 3600) is set. Then, based on the ball passing through the first gate 670, the jackpot type is determined (selected) (for example, the jackpot A is determined (selected)), and the opening corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined (selected). A scenario is set and a jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game is started, the first round of the round game is started after the opening period (6 seconds) set in the opening scenario has passed. Then, the period from the start of the first round of the round game to the end of the final round of the round game is set as the probability variable prize valid period.

In addition, when 16 seconds have passed since the special symbol jackpot was won, the storage device (third storage device 3600) is changed to an open state, and balls are stored in the storage device (third storage device 3600). , the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a.

Therefore, when the ball is passed through the first gate 670 within 10 seconds after winning the special symbol jackpot, it passes through the first gate 670 and is stored in the storage device (third storage device 3600). The ball enters the specific general prize winning opening 630a during the probability variable prize valid period.

Further, when the ball is passed through the first gate 670 within 10 seconds to 16 seconds after winning the special pattern jackpot, it passes through the first gate 670 and enters the storage device (third storage device 3600). The ball stored in , enters the specific general winning opening 630a outside the variable winning effective period (during the opening period of the jackpot game).

Furthermore, when the ball is passed through the first gate 670 after 16 seconds after winning the special pattern jackpot, the third storage device 3600 is already opened before the ball is passed through the first gate 670. The ball that has passed through the first gate 670 enters the specific general winning hole 630a as it is. However, as shown in FIG. 130, since it is designed so that the time required for the ball to flow down from the first gate 670 to the specific general prize winning opening 630a is 1 second, the ball passing through the first gate 670 , The ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a outside the variable winning valid period (during the opening period of the jackpot game).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball is passed through the specific area (the first gate 670) within a predetermined period of time (within 10 seconds) after winning the special symbol jackpot, so that the game is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be given a probability variable state that is a state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game even after winning the special symbol jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, the opening period of the jackpot game is set to be different according to the jackpot type determined by the ball passing through the first gate 670 . Specifically, when the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, the opening period is set to 6 seconds, and when the jackpot B is selected, the opening period is set to 16 seconds.

In this way, since the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the probability variable prize effective period differs depending on the jackpot type determined by passing the ball through the first gate 670, the jackpot of the special symbol is won. In this case, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the ball can pass through the first gate 670 as soon as possible. In addition, even if the timing of passing the ball through the first gate 670 is delayed, by selecting the jackpot type in which the opening scenario with a short opening period is set, the ball that has passed through the first gate 670 will have a variable winning validity period. Since the ball will enter the specific general winning hole 630a within a short period of time, there is an effect that the player can have expectations until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the flow of the game when winning a jackpot in the variable probability (time saving) state will be described. In this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the variable probability (time saving) state, the timing at which the storage device (third storage device 3600) is opened is the same as when the jackpot is won in the normal game state (special symbol is 16 seconds after winning the jackpot), but the opening period corresponding to each jackpot type selected by passing the ball through the first gate 670 is set to be short.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state, if jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, the opening period is "6 seconds"; if jackpot B is selected, the opening period is "16 seconds"; When C is selected, "6 seconds" is set as the opening period (see FIG. 133(b)).

On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the variable (shorter time) state, the opening period is "1 second" when the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, and when the jackpot B is selected, the opening period is "11 seconds", and the jackpot C is selected. When selected, "1 second" is set as the opening period (see FIG. 133(c)).

By constructing in this way, it is better to win a jackpot in the variable probability (shorter time) state than in the case of winning a jackpot in a normal game state. It is possible to set a longer period during which a ball can enter the mouth 630a. Therefore, it is possible to make the probability that the probability variable state is given by the jackpot winning during the probability variable (shorter time) state higher than the probability that the probability variable state is granted by the jackpot winning during the normal state. An advantageous game state can be easily provided continuously, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening period to be set is different between when the jackpot is won in the normal game state and when the jackpot is won in the variable probability (shorter time) state (the opening period is different in the variable probability (shorter time) state is set short), the probability of being given a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot can be changed (higher probability variable (shorter time) state), but other configurations may be used.

For example, the timing at which the storage device (third storage device 3600) is opened may be different between when a jackpot is won in the normal game state and when a jackpot is won in the variable probability (time saving state). Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the storage device (third storage device 3600) is opened 16 seconds after the jackpot is won, and the jackpot is won in the probability variable (time reduction) game state. In this case, the storage device (third storage device 3600) should be opened 21 seconds after the jackpot is won.

Even if configured in this way, similarly to the present embodiment, the probability that the probability variable state is given by the jackpot winning during the probability variable (time saving) state is higher than the probability that the probability variable state is granted by the jackpot winning during the normal state. As a result, it is possible to continuously provide a game state that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the pseudo effect executed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a timing chart showing the flow of the pseudo performance when the big win A is selected. This pseudo-effect is a effect that informs whether a variable probability state is given after the jackpot game ends after winning the jackpot. A first simulated performance executed based on the game contents from the stop display to the start of the jackpot game, and a second simulated performance executed based on the game contents during the jackpot game. ing.

This pseudo effect is executed using a pseudo symbol (see FIG. 138(b)) having the same aspect as the third symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variation of the special symbol. Specifically, it is an effect of stopping and displaying a predetermined pattern row (for example, "341" or "666") after changing the pseudo pattern for 2 seconds. is executed a plurality of times (four times or five times), and finally, it is notified that a probability variable state is imparted after the jackpot game is finished by the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed.

First, when the big win is won (when the third symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81) (see FIG. 138(a)), the game of passing the ball through the first gate 670 is started. Simultaneously, the pseudo symbol rendering is executed a plurality of times in the third symbol display device 81 (first pseudo rendering). The upper limit number of times this pseudo effect is executed is set by the pseudo effect frequency setting table 222c (see FIG. 134(b)).

When the number of times of the simulated effect to be executed does not reach the upper limit number of times set by the simulated effect frequency setting table 222c, the simulated pattern is stopped in a stop mode (for example, "341") indicating that the simulated effect continues. Display and execute the following pseudo-rendering.

Then, at the timing at which the upper limit number of pseudo effects set by the pseudo effect frequency setting table 222c is executed (the timing at which the fourth pseudo effect is executed in the case of FIG. 137), a pseudo effect process described later (FIG. 149 ), it is determined whether a predetermined condition (the ball passes through the first gate 670) is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the first pseudo effect is changed. Decide and stop displaying.

In this case, if it is determined that the ball has already passed through the first gate 670 (if the predetermined condition is satisfied), the pseudo symbol is given as a stop display mode indicating that the variable probability state is given. 666" is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, "222" is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode indicating that it is not confirmed that the pseudo symbol is given a probability changing state. be.

In this way, in a gaming machine in which it is not possible to determine whether or not a variable probability state is provided after the end of a big win based only on the determination result of the special symbol, a pseudo performance using a pseudo symbol having a display mode similar to that of the third symbol is used. By performing, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in FIG. 137, the first pseudo effect period is set to four times of the pseudo effect, that is, 8 seconds, and the timing at which the final pseudo effect is started (pseudo effect processing (see FIG. 149) determines whether a predetermined condition is established. The timing for judging is set to be 6 seconds after the winning of the jackpot. This means that if a predetermined condition is satisfied within 6 seconds after winning the jackpot (if the ball passes through the first gate 670), the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a within the variable winning effective period. This is because it is determined that the ball will enter the ball.

Also, in the present embodiment, eight seconds is set as the first pseudo effect period. Although the jackpot game is started before the jackpot game is started, the first pseudo performance is continuously executed even if the jackpot game is started.

Even in such a case, since the opening period during the jackpot game is set to 6 seconds, in most cases, the first pseudo performance period ends before the start of the round game during the jackpot game. can be done.

In addition, the number of times of the simulated effect executed in the first simulated effect is set so that the ball passing timing to the first gate 670 that allows the ball to enter the specific general winning prize opening 630a during the variable winning valid period is long. It is set so that the number of times increases as the number of times increases, and the player is notified that the probability of obtaining a variable probability state increases as the number of times of pseudo performance increases.

In addition, in order to notify the player of the length of the ball passage timing to the first gate 670 that allows the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a during the variable winning prize valid period, the remaining number of pseudo effects may be configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player plays the game by anticipating the remaining time and eagerly trying to pass the ball through the first gate 670, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the duration of one pseudo-effect is fixed to 2 seconds, but pseudo-effect with different duration may be provided. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, whether or not the variable probability state is given to the player by the stop mode of the pseudo symbol of the final pseudo production is notified, but the variable probability state is given using the pseudo production other than the final pseudo production. It is also possible to make a notification suggesting the possibility of

For example, when the ball passes through the first gate 670 during the period in which the pseudo performance 1 is being executed, a pseudo symbol is provided as a mode that suggests the possibility that a probability variable state is given in the variations of the pseudo performance 2 and the pseudo performance 3. It is preferable to change the color of the background or the color of the background, or change the mode of variation. As a result, the player can play the game expecting that the variable probability state will be provided before the final pseudo effect is started.

Next, the second pseudo production will be explained. After the first pseudo performance is finished, the second pseudo performance informs that the ball enters the specific general prize winning opening 630a during the variable variable prize valid period, and that the variable variable state is given after the big win is completed. It is an effect, which is executed using the final round (8th round) of the jackpot game.

As with the first pseudo effect, the second pseudo effect also uses a pseudo symbol (see FIG. 140). When the jackpot game enters the final round, the third symbol display device 81 starts to change the pseudo symbols, and the pseudo symbols are stop-displayed in the stop mode determined by the round effect processing 5 (see FIG. 148).

As described above, the pseudo effect in the present embodiment is a game in which a ball enters the specific general winning prize opening 630a within the probability variable winning valid period during the jackpot game, and a probability variable is given after the jackpot game ends. Since it is possible to notify whether or not it is decided that the variable probability state is given at a plurality of timings in the machine, the player looks at the performance executed with interest, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to.

In addition, as a pseudo effect executed at a plurality of timings, a variable display using a pseudo pattern configured in the same manner as the third pattern is performed, so that the player can easily see the pseudo pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. By seeing the performance (variation performance of pseudo symbols), it can be made to think that the jackpot pattern ``222'' stopped at the time of winning the jackpot has been promoted to the probability variation pattern ``777''. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 has complicated game characteristics, it is possible to inform the player of the transition of the game state in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game. be.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the above-described pseudo effect is executed will be described. 138 to 140, for each display area displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the same reference numerals as those on the display screen shown in FIG. 5 of the first embodiment described above are used. , and the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 138(a), the display contents in the case of winning a big hit (determined as a big win) in the lottery of special symbols (determination of success/failure) will be described. FIG. 138(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 138(a), when the jackpot is won, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode "222" indicating that the jackpot has been won in the main display area Dm.

A small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds displays a game description for starting a jackpot game, and a small area Ds2 displays a schematic diagram of a location (first gate 670) targeted by the player. Furthermore, in the small area Ds3, a guide display is displayed to guide the player to play a right-handed game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the first pseudo effect of the pseudo effects is being executed will be described. FIG. 138(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 138(b), a third symbol display area Dmb in which the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm. be done. In the center of the main display area Dm, a pseudo symbol configured in the same manner as the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner of "341".

This state indicates a state in which the "pseudo effect 1" shown in FIG. 137 is finished, and the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode "341" indicating that the pseudo effect is continuously executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the final pseudo effect (see FIG. 137) of the first pseudo effect is executed will be described. FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the case of notifying that there is a high possibility that the variable probability state is given in the final pseudo effect of the first pseudo effect. There, FIG. 139(b) is an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the case of notifying that it is highly probable that the variable probability state is given among the final pseudo effects of the first pseudo effect. It is a schematic diagram showing. As shown in FIG. 139(a), in the main display area Dm, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode "666" indicating that the variable probability state is given with a high probability. A player can easily grasp that the variable probability state is provided after the jackpot game is completed by seeing the display mode of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in FIG. 139(b), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode "222" indicating that the variable probability state is not decided to be given to the main display area Dm. By seeing the display mode of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player recognizes that the variable probability state is not given after the end of the big win game at the present stage, and the variable probability state is given during the big win game. Therefore, the game will be played with a lot of motivation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the second pseudo effect (see FIG. 137) is executed among the pseudo effects will be described. FIG. 140(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content when the second pseudo effect is started, and FIG. 140(b) is an example of the display content when the second pseudo effect ends. It is a schematic diagram showing.

As shown in FIG. 140(a), the display area 714 displays "last round" as the current round game number, and the display area 717 displays "last replay" indicating that the second pseudo effect is being executed. Lottery Chance" is displayed. Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, there is displayed a guide display that guides the point (variable winning device) to be aimed during the jackpot game. Further, the pseudo pattern is variably displayed in the main display area Dm.

When the pseudo variation by the second pseudo effect is finished and the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed, "777" is stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 140(b).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. FIG. The fifth embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in that the control for executing a special symbol jackpot game is changed and the control for opening the reservoir valve 3600a is changed.

In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment, only the points changed from the above-described third embodiment will be explained, and the processes not changed from the third embodiment will be explained. , and the simple deletion of processing, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 141, the special symbol variation process 5 (S104) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 5 (S104). This special symbol variation processing 5 is different from the special symbol variation processing 3 of the above-described third embodiment in that when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), the processing executed is The only difference is the content. Since other processing is the same as the special symbol variation processing of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 5 (S104) is executed, the processes from S201 to S216 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process 3 of the third embodiment described above. In the processing of S216, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S216: No), the processing of S220 to S223 is executed in the same manner as the above-described special symbol variation processing 3, and a stop command is set ( S224), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big win (S216: Yes), the big win flag is set to ON (S271), and then a big win command is set (S272). Then, a stop command is set (S224), and this processing ends.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, the big win game is not executed thereafter, and the state in which the special symbol lottery result is a big win (jackpot game standby) state), a ball enters the first gate 670 to start a jackpot game.

Next, FIG. 142, which describes the main processing of main controller 110 with reference to FIG. In this main process, various processes executed by main controller 110 are performed. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as in the above-described third embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be given later.

As shown in FIG. 142, when the main process is executed, the processes from S1001 to S1003 are executed as in the third embodiment described above. Next, a jackpot type determination process is executed (S1051). By this jackpot type determination processing, a jackpot type is set when a ball passes through the first gate 670 in a state of winning a jackpot of a special symbol (with a jackpot flag 203t set to ON). A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG.

When the jackpot type determination process (S1051) ends, then the storage valve opening process (S1052) is executed. By this storage valve opening process (S1052), the storage valve 3600a of the third storage device 3600 is controlled to be opened based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG.

When the storage valve opening process (S1052) ends, the processes of S1004 to S1016 are executed in the same manner as the main process of the third embodiment described above, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the jackpot type determination process (S1051 in FIG. 142) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot type determination process (S1051). When the big hit type determination process (S1051) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203t is set to ON (S5201). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S5201: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5201: Yes), next, it is classified whether the ball has passed through the first gate 670 (S5202). If it is determined that the ball has not passed through the first gate 670 (S5202: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S5202, . If it is determined that the ball has passed through the first gate 670 (S5202: Yes), then the big hit flag 203t is set to OFF (S5203), and the first hit type is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. A jackpot type is selected from the selection table 202b (S5204). Specifically, it has a means for storing in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 the value of the first hit type counter C2 (see S301 in FIG. 27) acquired when the variation of the special symbol that has won the big hit is started. Then (not shown), the jackpot type corresponding to the stored value of the first winning type counter C2 is selected from the first winning type selection table 202b.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type selected when the ball passes through the first gate 670 is selected using the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol that wins the jackpot. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the first gate 670, and the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 may be used to select the jackpot type.

Also, in this embodiment, when the ball passes through the first gate 670, the jackpot type is selected. After it is determined (S216) and the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S271), a process of selecting the jackpot type may be performed.

In this way, when the special symbol jackpot is won, the type of jackpot to be executed by passing the ball through the first gate 670 can be grasped in advance. Based on the opening period set corresponding to the type, the player can be informed of the period during which the variable probability state that is advantageous to the player can be given.

Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game from when the special symbols are won until the ball passes through the first gate 670, thereby improving the interest in the game. .

In this case, in the jackpot type determination process shown in FIG. 143, only the process of setting the start of the jackpot based on the already selected jackpot type is performed, so the processing load of the jackpot type determination process can be reduced. .

Returning to FIG. 143, the description continues. When the process of S5204 is completed, next, based on the selected jackpot type and the game state (normal game state or probability variable (time reduction) game state) at the time of winning the jackpot, the opening scenario of the jackpot game is set ( S5205). Specifically, the release scenario is set based on the contents defined in the third release scenario setting table 202g (see FIG. 133).

It should be noted that the process of setting the opening scenario of this jackpot game may also be executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 141) in the same manner as the process of selecting the jackpot type described above.

Then, when the processing of S5205 is finished, the start of the jackpot is set (S5206), and the jackpot game is started. Next, a jackpot start command is set (S5207), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the storage valve opening process (S1052) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the contents of the storage valve opening process (S1052). When the storage valve opening process (S1052) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5208). Here, if the jackpot flag 203t is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S5208: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5208, if the jackpot flag 203t is set to ON (S5208: Yes), then it is determined whether the reservoir valve opening flag 203u is set to ON (S5209). Here, if the reservoir valve open flag 203u is not set to ON (S5209: No), the reservoir valve open flag 203u is set to ON (S5210), and an open counter value corresponding to the game state is set (S5211 ), the process ends.

Further, in the process of S5209, if the storage valve open flag 203u is set to ON (S5209: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203v is 0 (S5212). If it is determined that the value of the counter 203v is 0 (S5212: Yes), the retention device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 131) is set to ON (S5213), and the retention valve open flag 203u is set to OFF ( S5214), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5212 that the value of the open counter 203v is not 0 (S5212: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the open counter 203v (S5215), and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is not started only by winning the jackpot by the judgment (lottery) of the special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203t is turned on. set state), the ball passes through the first gate 670, which is a specific area, so that a jackpot game is executed.

A storage means (third storage device 3600) that opens after a predetermined period of time (for example, 16 seconds) has passed after winning the jackpot is arranged at a position where a ball that has passed through the first gate 670 can enter. A specific general prize winning opening 630a is arranged at a position where a ball can enter by opening the storage means (third storage device 3600).

This specific general prize winning port 630a is a privilege that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends by the ball entering within the probability variable prize valid period (from the start of the first round to the end of the final round) in the jackpot game. (probability variable state) is configured to be provided.

Thus, it is determined whether or not the variable probability state is provided after the end of the big win depending on the time required for the ball to pass through the first gate 670 after winning the big win. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game from winning the jackpot to passing the ball through the first gate 670 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) opened by the jackpot game is open, the specific general winning opening 630a is located at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball. , the balls shot during the jackpot game are difficult to enter the specific general prize winning opening 630a. As a result, there is an effect that the game from the winning of the big win to the passing of the ball through the first gate 670 can be played more enthusiastically so that the variable probability state is given after the end of the big win game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two variable winning devices are provided vertically (upstream and downstream in the ball flow direction) that are opened during the jackpot game. It suppresses the occurrence of balls that do not win any prizes in any of the variable prize winning devices in the interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent balls from frequently entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game (during the variable probability winning valid period).

In addition, depending on the jackpot type and the game state when winning the jackpot (normal game state or variable (short time) state), the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening period of the jackpot game (non-variable winning valid period) and the round interval period are made different in length. As a result, it is possible to set a big win to which the variable probability state is likely to be given after the big win game is over and a big win to which the variable probability state is less likely to be given after the big win game is over.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, between the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) opened during the jackpot game and the specific general winning port 630a, a plurality of falling balls Distributing members (first distributing member 3901 and second distributing member 3902) for distributing to the flow path are provided. As a result, during the jackpot game, the balls passing through the closed variable prize winning device are distributed to various channels in a timely manner, making it difficult to predict whether or not the ball will enter the specific general prize winning port 630a. becomes. Therefore, since the player will pay attention to the flow of the ball, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game during the big winning game.

Furthermore, the above-described distribution members (the first distribution member 3901 and the second distribution member 3902) are configured to be capable of regularly distributing balls to a plurality of flow paths. Therefore, by causing a predetermined number (for example, four) or more balls to flow down to the distribution member during the jackpot game, the balls can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

In addition, as a configuration of this distribution member (the first distribution member 3901 and the second distribution member 3902), by an action other than the action of distributing the ball (for example, the contact of the ball flowing down near the distribution member), It may be configured to be able to change the distribution destination of the balls. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping in advance the distribution state of the distribution member.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 149. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the content of the command determination process 5 (S1811) of the main process (see FIG. 145) is changed, the simulated effect process (S1854) is added, the accumulated state determination process (S1851 of FIG. ), display processing during time saving (S1852 in FIG. 114), and subtraction processing of the allowable time counter (S1853 in FIG. 114) are omitted, which is different from the above-described third embodiment. In the following, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, only the differences from the above-described third embodiment will be explained, and the same processes as in the third embodiment will be explained. Detailed descriptions of other processes are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 145, the main processing executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the contents of main processing executed in the fifth embodiment. This main process is different from the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the above-described third embodiment, except that the content of the command determination process 5 (S1811) is changed and a pseudo effect process (S1854) is added. The difference is that the storage state determination processing (S1851 in FIG. 114), the display processing during time saving (S1852 in FIG. 114), and the subtraction processing of the allowable time counter (S1853 in FIG. 114) are deleted. Since other processing is the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145, when the main process is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1812 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the third embodiment described above. Note that the command determination process 5 executed in S1811 differs in detail from the command determination process 3 (S1811 in FIG. 114) executed in the above-described third embodiment. will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the command determination process 5 (S1811) ends, next, the process of S1812 is executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 114) executed in the above-described third embodiment, and then the pseudo effect process (S1854). to run. This pseudo effect processing (S1854) is an effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot is won, and is an effect for informing whether or not a probability variable state is provided after the jackpot game ends. is. Details of this pseudo effect processing (S1854) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the pseudo effect processing (S1854) ends, the processing of S1813 to S1817 is executed in the same manner as the main processing (see FIG. 114) executed in the above-described third embodiment, and this processing ends.

Next, command determination processing 5 (S1811) executed in the main processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 5 (S1811). When the command determination process 5 (S1811) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1912 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 115) executed in the third embodiment described above.

In the processing of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not a command regarding a big win has been received (S5911). Here, commands relating to the jackpot include an opening command, a round number command, an ending command, etc. output from the main controller 110 .

In the process of S5911, when it is determined that a command related to the big win has been received (S5911: Yes), the big win related process is executed (S5912), and this process ends. This jackpot-related process (S5912) is a process executed when a command regarding a jackpot is output from main controller 110, and detailed description thereof will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5911, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S5911: No), then the command determination processing 3 of the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 115) as well as other A process (S1919) according to the command is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, similarly to the winning process 4 (S1111 in FIG. 126) executed by the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment described above, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set the probability variable passage command for output to, and as the processing executed in S1919, when the probability variable passage command is received, the processing of setting the probability variable passage flag 223p to ON is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the jackpot related process (S5912) executed in the command determination process 5 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5912). This jackpot related process (S5912) is a process for executing an effect during the jackpot game.

When the jackpot related process (S5912) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot command is received (S5301). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot command has been received (S5301: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223q is set to ON (S5302), the jackpot command for display is set (S5303), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5301, if it is determined that the jackpot command has not been received (S5301: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S5304). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S5304: Yes), the opening flag 223s is set to ON (S5305), the big hit flag 223h is set to ON (S5306), and the opening command for display is set (S5307 ), the process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S5304 that the opening command has not been received (S5304: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5308). Here, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5308: Yes), round effect processing 5 (S5309) is executed, the round number command for display is set (S5310), and this process ends.

This round effect processing 5 (S5309) is a process for determining the contents to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during each round of the jackpot game, and is the pseudo stop effect processing (second pseudo stop) in the final round. It is a process in which the content of the production of the production process) is determined. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 148 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5308 that the round number command has not been received (S5308: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S5311). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S5311: Yes), the jackpot medium flag 223h is set to OFF, and the permissible time counter is set to 1 second (S5312). Then, an ending command for display is set (S5313), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S5311, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5311: No), then processing according to other commands is executed (S5314), and this processing ends. In addition, as a command to be executed in S5314, for example, when a command indicating a currently open variable winning device is received during a jackpot game, the third symbol display device 81 is currently open variable A display command is set for displaying a guide to the winning device, and when a command indicating that the variable winning device has won more than a predetermined number (10) of balls (so-called over-winning) is received. , sets a command for outputting a notification sound to the audio output device 226 that an over-win has occurred.

Next, round effect processing 5 (S5309) executed in the jackpot related processing (S5912 in FIG. 147) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the contents of round effect processing 5 (S5309). This round effect processing 5 (S5309) is a process for determining the contents to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during each round of the jackpot game, and is the pseudo stop effect processing (second pseudo stop) in the final round. It is a process in which the content of the production of the production process) is determined.

When the round effect process 5 (S5309) is executed, first, the round number is extracted based on the received round number command (S5101). Then, it is determined whether the extracted number of rounds is the final round (S5151). If the extracted round number is not the final round (S5151: No), a display round command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S5103), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5151, if it is determined that the number of extracted rounds is the final round (S5151: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability passage flag 223p is set to ON (S5104). This variable probability passage flag 223p receives a command output when the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON from the main control device 110, that is, when it is determined that the variable probability state is given after the end of the jackpot game. This is set to ON in the process of S1919 of the command determination process 5 (S1811 in FIG. 146).

In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the variable probability passage flag 223p is set to ON (S5104: Yes), as shown in FIG. The display round command is set (S5152), and the variable probability passage flag 223p is set to OFF (S5106). Then, the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5104, if it is determined that the probability variable passage flag 223p is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S5104: No), the pseudo stop symbol is set to "222". A corresponding round command for display is set (S5153), and this processing ends.

By configuring in this way, the period during which the probability variable state can be given from the end of the first pseudo production executed when the jackpot is won to the start of the final round of the jackpot game (the probability variable winning valid It is possible to inform the player whether or not the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a during the period) and the variable probability state is given after the big win is completed, by the effect using the pseudo symbol.

Therefore, the player thinks that the jackpot pattern "222" stopped at the time of winning the jackpot has been promoted to the definite variable pattern "777" by watching the pseudo effect (variation effect of the pseudo pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can let Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 has complicated game characteristics, it is possible to notify the player of the transition of the game state in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to notify that the player is bored with the game. be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the pseudo effect processing (S1854) executed in the main processing of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the details of the pseudo effect processing (S1854). This pseudo effect processing (S1854) is the content of the pseudo effect (first pseudo effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81 from when the jackpot is won until the ball passes through the first gate 670. It is a process to decide.

When the pseudo effect processing (S1854) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo effect flag 223q is set to ON (S5401). This pseudo production flag 223q is a flag that is set to ON when a jackpot command is received in jackpot related processing (S5912 in FIG. 147). Here, when it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223q is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S5401: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223q is set to ON in the process of S5401 (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether the pseudo effect is being executed (during pseudo fluctuation) (S5402). . This determination is a process performed to prevent a new simulated effect from being started while the simulated effect is already being executed. Determine whether a medium flag (not shown) is set to ON.

If it is determined that the simulated effect is being executed (S5402: Yes), since a new simulated effect is not started, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo effect is not being executed (S5402: No), it is determined whether the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is 0 (S5403).

In the process of S5403, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo effect counter is 0 (S5403: Yes), the number of pseudo effects is set based on the pseudo effect frequency setting table 222c (S5404), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is not 0, that is, if the number of pseudo effects has already been set (S5403: No), then the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r reaches the upper limit. (S5405).

In the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is not the upper limit (S5405: No), the display effect command corresponding to the pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "341" is set (S5406 ), the pseudo effect counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S5407), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5405, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo effect counter is the upper limit (S5405: Yes), then it is determined whether the opening flag 223s is set to ON (S5408). This opening flag 223s is a flag that is set to ON when an opening command is received in the jackpot related process (S5912 in FIG. 147) of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 146).

Here, in the processing of S5408, if it is determined that the opening flag 223s is set to ON (S5408: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the pseudo effect in which the pseudo stop symbol is "777" is set. (S5409) and proceeds to S5411.

On the other hand, in the process of S5408, when it is determined that the opening flag 223s is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S5408: No), the pseudo stop symbol corresponds to the pseudo effect of "222". The effect command for display is set (S5410), and the process proceeds to S5411.

After completing the process of S5409 or S5410, the pseudo effect flag 223q is set to OFF (S5411), and the opening flag 223s is set to OFF (S5412). Then, the value of the pseudo effect counter 223r is reset to 0 (S5413), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is not started only by winning the jackpot by the judgment (lottery) of the special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203t is turned on. set state), the ball passes through the first gate 670, which is a specific area, so that a jackpot game is executed.

Storage means (third storage device 3600) which is opened after a predetermined period of time (for example, 16 seconds) has passed after winning the jackpot is arranged at a position where a ball that has passed through the first gate 670 can enter. A specific general prize winning opening 630a is arranged at a position where a ball can enter by opening the storage means (third storage device 3600).

This specific general prize winning port 630a is a privilege that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends by the ball entering within the probability variable prize valid period (from the start of the first round to the end of the final round) in the jackpot game. (probability variable state) is configured to be provided.

Thus, it is determined whether or not the variable probability state is provided after the end of the big win depending on the time required for the ball to pass through the first gate 670 after winning the big win. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game from winning the jackpot to passing the ball through the first gate 670 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) opened by the jackpot game is open, the specific general winning opening 630a is located at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball. , the balls shot during the jackpot game are difficult to enter the specific general prize winning opening 630a. As a result, there is an effect that the game from the winning of the big win to the passing of the ball through the first gate 670 can be played more enthusiastically so that the variable probability state is given after the end of the big win game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two variable winning devices are provided above and below (upstream and downstream in the ball flow direction) that are opened during the jackpot game. It suppresses the occurrence of balls that do not win any prizes in the variable prize-winning device during the interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent balls from frequently entering the specific general winning opening 630a during the jackpot game (during the variable probability winning valid period).

In addition, depending on the jackpot type and the game state when winning the jackpot (normal game state or variable (short time) state), the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening period of the jackpot game (non-variable winning valid period) and the round interval period are made different in length. As a result, it is possible to set a big win to which the variable probability state is likely to be given after the big win game is over and a big win to which the variable probability state is less likely to be given after the big win game is over.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, between the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) opened during the jackpot game and the specific general winning port 630a, a plurality of falling balls Distributing members (first distributing member 3901 and second distributing member 3902) for distributing to the flow path are provided. As a result, during the jackpot game, the balls passing through the closed variable prize winning device are distributed to various channels in a timely manner, making it difficult to predict whether or not the ball will enter the specific general prize winning port 630a. becomes. Therefore, since the player will pay attention to the flow of the ball, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game during the big winning game.

Furthermore, the above-described distribution members (the first distribution member 3901 and the second distribution member 3902) are configured to be capable of regularly distributing balls to a plurality of flow paths. Therefore, by causing a predetermined number (for example, four) or more balls to flow down to the distribution member during the jackpot game, the balls can be reliably entered into the specific general winning opening 630a.

In addition, as a configuration of this distribution member (the first distribution member 3901 and the second distribution member 3902), by an action other than the action of distributing the ball (for example, the contact of the ball flowing down near the distribution member), It may be configured to be able to change the distribution destination of the balls. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping in advance the distribution state of the distribution member.

In this embodiment, one area (first gate 670) through which the ball passes is provided in order to start the jackpot game after winning the jackpot, but a plurality of such areas may be provided. In this case, the content of the jackpot game to be executed when the ball is passed through each of the plurality of areas may be varied.

Specifically, a first area and a second area different from the first area are provided as a passing area for executing a jackpot game, and when the ball is passed through the first area, it is within the probability variable winning valid period. A jackpot with a substantial probability of 50% that the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is selected, and if the ball passes through the second area, the ball will enter the specific general winning opening 630a within the variable winning valid period. Either a jackpot with a low (20%) or high (80%) jackpot with a substantial probability of entering the ball may be selected. Furthermore, it is preferable to allow the player to select which region, the first region or the second region, the ball should pass through.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game with different game characteristics, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game. Also, the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be set differently between the big win when passing through the first area and the big win when passing through the second area.

In addition, the second distribution member 3902 in the first distribution member 3901 in this embodiment is in the right side area of the game board 13 through which the ball fired when the right-handed game in the variable probability (time reduction) state is executed Since it is provided, by executing a right-handed game (a game machine that makes a ball enter the second ball entrance 640) to win a special symbol jackpot, the first distribution member 3901 and Since the distribution situation of the second distribution member 3902 changes, special symbols are maintained while maintaining a state advantageous to the player (a state in which the next falling ball is distributed to the path passing through the first gate 670). can be prevented from changing.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning opening 630a is defined by providing the storage device 3600 for storing (holding) the ball that has passed through the first gate 670. The storage device 3600 may not be provided. In this case, the timing at which the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a becomes irregular, so the pachinko machine 10 can be provided in which it is difficult for the player to predict the outcome of the game, and the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress premature boredom with the game.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the above-described third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, a plurality of distribution members 900 to 902 are provided as a configuration for distributing balls flowing down inside the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths (1603 to 1608), It is configured such that a ball distributed to a specific route (seventh route 1607) out of a plurality of routes enters the specific general winning hole 630a.

On the other hand, in the modification of the third embodiment, a plurality of distribution members 4900 to 4902 are provided as a configuration for distributing the balls flowing down inside the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths (1603 to 1608). ing. The plurality of distribution members are buried in the game board 13 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 1 second) to guide the ball to a retracted position where the ball can pass through, and to protrude from the game board 13. It is configured to be variable between the guidance position (protrusion position) that allows the possible guidance state, and by varying the respective distribution members between the retracted position and the guidance position at different timings, the inside of the second storage device 1600 It is configured so that the falling balls can be distributed to a plurality of paths (1603 to 1608).

Next, the configuration of sorting devices 4900 to 4902 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the distribution devices 4900 to 4902 have the same configuration, only the configuration of the distribution device 4900 will be described here, and detailed description of the other distribution devices (4901 and 4902) will be omitted.

First, the sorting device 4900 turns on a solenoid (solenoid for the sorting device) (not shown) to change it to a protruding position protruding from the game board 13, and turns off the solenoid for the sorting device. , it is changed to the retracted position where it is buried in the game board 13 . The operation of this sorting device solenoid is controlled by the main controller 110, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the sorting device 4900 is changed to the induction position and the retracted position at intervals of one second. An operation signal is output from the main controller 110 to the sorting device solenoid.

As shown in FIG. 150, below the distribution member 4900, a rolling plate 4900a having a rolling surface inclined downward (inclined to the lower right from the viewpoint of FIG. 150) is provided so that the balls flow down the fourth path 1604. ing. The upper surface of the distribution member 4900 (the surface on which the ball can roll at the guidance position) is formed with a rolling surface that is inclined downward (inclined to the lower left from the viewpoint of FIG. 150) so that the ball flows down the third path 1603. .

As a result, the ball is guided to the third path 1603 when the distribution member 4900 is projected, and the ball is guided to the fourth path 1604 when the distribution member 4900 is retracted. Therefore, by switching the state of the distribution member 4900, it is possible to distribute the paths of the spheres to a plurality of paths, thereby simplifying the configuration for distributing the spheres.

Furthermore, in this modified example, three distribution members (4900 to 4902) are provided, and each distribution member is configured to be variable between the guided state and the retracted state at different timings. Specifically, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON, the distribution member 4900 is varied so that the retreat position (1 second) and the guidance position (1 second) are repeated, and the distribution member 4901 , after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON, the induction position (1.5 seconds) and the regulation position (1 second) are changed repeatedly, and the distribution member 4902 is at the retracted position (0.5 seconds). , the guidance position (0.5 sec) is varied so that it repeats.

The variable control of each distribution member described above is configured such that a constant operation is always performed regardless of the game state while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be on. Also, the variable timing for each distribution member is determined by a counter ( (not shown) is updated.

Next, referring to FIG. 150, the sphere flow inside the second storage device 1600 in this modified example will be described. First, the first flow path 1601 is formed so that the stored spheres flow down (pass through the open storage valve 1601a) at intervals of 0.5 seconds in the same manner as in the above-described third embodiment. , and the balls that have passed through the first channel 1601 flow down toward the sorting member 4900 . When the distribution member 4900 is changed to the retracted position, the ball drops onto the rolling plate 4900a, flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4900a, and flows down to the fourth flow path 1604. FIG.

The ball that has flowed down to the fourth channel 1604 flows down to the sorting member 4901 via the second channel 1602 . When the distribution member 4901 is in the retracted position (1 second in 2.5 seconds), it drops onto the rolling plate 4901a, flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4901a, and flows down the sixth flow path 1606. flow down to

On the other hand, when the distribution member 4901 is variable to the guiding position (1.5 seconds in 2.5 seconds), it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4901 to the fifth flow path 1605. . Then, the ball that has flowed down the fifth flow path 1605 enters the general winning hole 630b.

Next, when the distribution member 4900 is in the guidance position (1 second in 2 seconds), when the ball flows down from the first flow path 1601, it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4900 and becomes the third flow. It flows down to distribution member 4902 via path 1603 . When the distribution member 4902 is variable to the retracted position (0.5 seconds in 1 second), it flows down the rolling surface of the rolling plate 4902a provided below the distribution member 4902 to the eighth flow path. 1608 flows down. The ball that has flowed down the eighth flow path 1608 enters the general winning hole 630b.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 4902 is variable to the guidance position (0.5 seconds in 1 second), it flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4902 and flows down the seventh flow path 1607, The ball enters the winning hole 630a.

In this way, the second storage device 1600 of this modified example has a configuration for distributing balls to a plurality of paths, and the paths to which balls are distributed are switched by variable control (switched according to predetermined conditions). By providing members (4900 to 4902) and varying the timing (conditions) at which each distribution member switches the distribution destination path, the balls are distributed to a plurality of paths. When the ball flows down at the timing of flowing down the distribution member 4900 at the position and flowing down the distribution member 4902 at the guidance position, the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a.

With this configuration, unlike the configuration of the third embodiment (distribution members 900 to 902) described above, the number of balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 (the number of balls passing through the first flow path 1601 ) reaches a predetermined number (four in the third embodiment), it is not confirmed that the ball will flow into the specific general winning hole 630a. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

Further, in the configuration of the third embodiment (distribution members 900 to 902) described above, the ball passes through the distribution members 900 to 902, so that the path to which the next ball is distributed is determined. However, in the configuration of this modification (distribution members 4900 to 4902), the path to be distributed is determined by the timing at which the ball flows down, so the state that is advantageous to the player (the next ball is the specific general winning opening 630a It is possible to suppress the execution of a game while maintaining the state of the sorting member in which the ball is landed in (2).

Furthermore, in this modification, the storage valve 1601a is configured to allow four balls to be stored in the second storage device 1600, and the four balls are stored in the second storage device 1600. When the valve 1601a is opened (released), the four balls stored at 0.5 second intervals flow down toward the distribution member 4900. FIG. Then, the variable timing of the distribution members 4900 and 4902 is changed so that one ball out of the four balls will enter the specific general winning hole 630a by dropping four balls at intervals of 0.5 seconds. is set.

Specifically, since the distribution member 4900 is configured to alternately move between the retracted position and the restricted position at intervals of 1 second, when four balls continuously flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds, are distributed to the third path 1603 that can enter the specific general winning hole 630a. The two balls distributed to the third path 1603 flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds (continuous balls) or at intervals of 1.5 seconds (pattern of the first and fourth balls). Then, the balls flowing down the third channel 1603 at predetermined intervals (0.5 second intervals or 1.5 second intervals) reach the distribution member 4902 . Since the distribution member 4902 is configured to alternately move between the retracted position and the restricted position at intervals of 0.5 seconds, when the balls flow down at intervals of 0.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds, at least One ball flows down the rolling surface of the distribution member 4902, which is the guiding position, and enters the specific general winning hole 630a.

With this configuration, when balls are entered into the second storage device 1600 at irregular timings, it is difficult for the player to predict which ball will enter the specific general ball entrance 630a. By becoming a storage device 1600 and further storing balls in the second storage device 1600, a predetermined number (4) of balls flow down at regular timing (at intervals of 0.5 seconds), so that the balls are reliably delivered. , the ball can enter the specific general winning hole 630a.

Therefore, in the state where the storage valve 1601a is open (released), the game is actively executed in order to allow as many balls as possible to flow into the second storage device 1600, and the storage valve 1601a is closed. In this case, the player is motivated to accumulate the upper limit amount of balls, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play in any game state.

Furthermore, in this modified example, a plurality of nails (P2, etc.) provided in the right side area of the game board 13 make the inflow timing of the balls flowing into the second storage device 1600 irregular, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the timing (the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general winning device 630a) from being easily targeted.

In addition, in this modification, among the plurality of paths in the second storage device 1600, the path (seventh path) that is advantageous to the player is a solenoid (distribution member solenoid) that varies the plurality of distribution members. must be set to on. In other words, in a state in which the solenoid is not turned on due to disconnection, ie, in a state in which a problem occurs, the ball will not enter the specific general winning opening 630a. As a result, there is an effect that a fair game can be provided. In addition to this, when a route to the specific general winning opening 630a is configured using a plurality of distribution members, one distribution member flows down with the solenoid set to on, and the other distribution It may be configured such that the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a by flowing down the member with the solenoid set to OFF.

In addition, the configuration using the distribution members 4900 to 4902 used in this modification may be added to and combined with other embodiments (for example, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment), or the existing configuration It may be deleted and newly provided.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment described above, the sorting device 2600 is provided below the second variable winning device 650 as shown in FIG. This sorting device 2600 is provided with a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down, and the flow path allows the ball to enter the specific general winning opening (probability variable winning opening) 630a or the second ball entering device 640. had configured. On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 151, it is arranged directly below the second variable winning device 650.

With this configuration, the first variable winning device 65 which is in the closed state during the opening period when the jackpot game is executed (while the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is not open). And the ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 is in a round game (while the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is open), that is, during the variable winning effective period Specific general winning opening It is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball is entered into 630a.

Further, in this modified example, unlike the above-described fourth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 provided below is opened in the round game of odd-numbered rounds, and the first variable winning device 650 is opened in the round game of even-numbered rounds. An opening scenario of the variable winning device is set so that the variable winning device 65 is opened. With this configuration, the distance between the variable winning device (second variable winning device 650) that is opened in the first round and the specific general winning port 630a can be shortened, so that a jackpot game is executed. During the opening period (during the period in which the first variable prize winning device 65 or the second variable prize winning device 650 is not operated to open), the balls passing through the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 in the closed state will be round. During the game (during the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650), that is, the situation where the ball enters the specific general winning hole 630a during the variable winning effective period is further suppressed. can do.

In addition, between the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650, a nail for allocating the flow-down path of the balls is planted. It is possible to change the rate at which balls passing through the prize winning device 650 enter the specific general prize winning opening 630a.

In the third to fifth embodiments and their modifications described above, a plurality of distributing members (900, 1901, 3901) for alternately distributing balls to a plurality of paths are provided, and various paths are provided. However, other configurations may be used as long as the spheres are distributed to various paths.

For example, instead of the sorting member, the game board 13 may be provided with a guide member that can be sunk or protrude, and the path of the ball may be switched depending on the state of the guide member (sinking state or protruding state). In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of guide members and set the operation timing of each guide member to be different at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, the first guide member is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the ball, and the second guide member is provided on the downstream side thereof. After the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the first guide member is variably controlled so as to be variable between the protruded state and the retracted state at regular intervals of one second, and after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The second guide member is configured to be variably controlled so as to be variable between the protruded state and the retracted state at regular intervals of 0.5 seconds, and at a predetermined timing when both the first guide member and the second guide member are in the retracted state, It is preferable to configure so that a ball can enter the specific general winning hole 630a. By configuring in this way, the path (guidance mechanism) composed of the first guide member and the second guide member allows the ball to enter the specific general winning opening 630a for 0.5 seconds out of 2 seconds. possible period.

By using such a configuration instead of the distributing members (900 to 902) of the third embodiment described above, it is possible to distribute (guide) the balls flowing down the inside of the second storage device 1600 to a plurality of paths. In addition, unlike the case of using the distribution members 900 to 902, the state in which the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a cannot be maintained, so the ball can enter the specific general winning opening 630a. It is possible to make the playability to be made more complicated.

Further, when the storage valve 1601a is released (opened) in a state in which the upper limit amount (four) of balls is stored in the second storage device 1600, the stored balls are released to the second storage at intervals of about 0.5 seconds. Since it flows down inside the device, any one of the stored balls can enter the specific general winning hole 630a. Therefore, by storing the balls up to the upper limit in the second storage device 1600, the balls can be surely entered into the specific general prize winning opening 630a, so that there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of security. In other words, in order to play the jackpot game with peace of mind, the player can continue playing the game until the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the second storage device 1600, thereby enhancing the operation of the game. has the effect of being able to

In this embodiment, the number of balls that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 is the number that the stored balls can surely enter the specific general winning opening 630a. You can have three. Even with this configuration, three balls can flow down at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). It is possible to increase the probability of the ball entering the specific general winning hole 630a rather than letting it flow down.

Also, the number of particles that can be stored in the second storage device 1600 may be greater than four. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably enter the ball into the specific general winning hole 630a.

In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters each ball entrance (award winning opening), the number of prize balls is paid out according to the type of the ball entrance (award winning opening). , but not limited to these. For example, it can be applied to pachinko machines that do not give prize balls as game value, such as enclosed pachinko machines. It may be configured to increase the balance.

All or part of the above embodiments may be combined.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (A prize ball is given to the ball that entered the holding device at the time of the big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down; a ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter; a specific privilege imparting means for imparting a specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; A first distribution state in which the game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path compared with the first distribution state. and a setting means capable of setting the state of the channel distribution means to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the game state. A gaming machine A1 characterized by:

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, lottery is performed to determine whether a game ball will win or not based on the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole. In addition to the specific prize winning opening, there is known a game machine that is provided with a plurality of winning openings from which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. In this conventional game machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the game ball is ejected by the player by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning hole. There is (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-129177).

However, since the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the amount of prize balls that are paid out by winning into the winning opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific prize-winning hole that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep hitting the game ball in the same direction until it hits. Therefore, when the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to enter the same winning hole, and the number of winning balls to be paid out tends to be inconsistent. In other words, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. A specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the above is given by the predetermined privilege giving means. A first sorting state in which the game balls flowing into the specific channel are easily sorted to the first channel, and a second sorting state in which the game balls are more easily sorted to the second channel than in the first sorting state. and the channel distribution means are varied. The state of the channel distribution means is varied between at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, the game balls flow into the specific flow path, thereby making it easier to give the specific privilege, and the game is set to the second distribution state. Certain benefits are less likely to be granted in this state. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege given can be changed according to the game state, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. has the effect of

In the gaming machine A1, a normal ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined a game value imparting means for imparting a game value, wherein the specific privilege imparting means imparts a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the normal ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the game value imparting means gives a predetermined value based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means. A game value is given. A game value greater than a predetermined game value is given as a specific privilege by a specific privilege giving means.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, compared to the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the second distribution state. Easier to get value. Therefore, since the game value to be given can be varied according to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In a game machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery on the basis of establishment of a lottery condition, and a special privilege game in which the game state is advantageous to a player based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. game state setting means for setting a state, wherein the setting means changes the state of the channel distribution means to the first distribution state based on the fact that the game state setting means has set the bonus game state. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is set to .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is set to a privilege game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. is set to The state of the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means.

Thereby, when the game state is set to the privilege game state, in addition to being advantageous to the player due to the privilege game state, more game value is imparted by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. easier to be Therefore, the privilege game state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the privilege game state.

Variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first ball entry state in which a game ball can be entered and a second entry state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first ball entry state in the game machine A3. a specific value imparting means for imparting a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means; and variable control means for varying said variable ball entering means to said first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is established.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball-entering means is varied between a first ball-entering state in which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entering state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first ball-entering state. A specific game value is given by a specific value giving means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Based on the special game state being set by the game state setting means, the variable control means changes the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is established.

As a result, since the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means in the privilege game state, a specific game value can be obtained by hitting the ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Therefore, in the bonus game state, the player can obtain more game value, so there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be heightened.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined amount of game media as the predetermined game value when the game ball enters the normal ball entering means, The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the specific privilege granting means grants an amount of game media larger than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege when a game ball enters the ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the normal ball entry means, the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined amount of game media as a predetermined game value. When a game ball enters the ball-entering means, the specific privilege providing means provides game media in an amount larger than a predetermined amount as a specific privilege.

As a result, the player can play the game with the given game medium, so that the player can play the game for a longer period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means changes the variable ball-entering means from the second ball-entering state to the first ball-entering state based on the special game state being set by the game state setting means. The game state setting means sets the game state different from the privilege game state based on the fact that the variable ball entry means is changed the predetermined number of times by the variable control means. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means changes the variable ball-entering means from the second ball-entering state to the first ball-entering state a predetermined number of times based on the special game state being set by the game state setting means. A game state different from the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means based on the variable control means changing the variable ball entry means a predetermined number of times.

As a result, in the privilege game state 1, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player can obtain more specific game value. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game state can be further heightened.

A game machine A7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A4 to A6, the specific value giving means gives a specific amount of game media as the specific game value.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the specific value providing means provides a specific amount of game media as a specific game value. can be made to play. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game for a longer period of time, so that there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, a guide channel capable of guiding a game ball to the specific channel is provided, and the variable ball entry means selects the specific stream among the game balls flowing into the guide channel. The game machine A8 is characterized in that it is provided at a position where a game ball that has not flowed into the path can enter.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machines A4 to A7, the game balls are guided to the specific flow path by the guide flow path, and among the game balls flowing into the guide flow path, the game balls flow into the specific flow path. Since the variable ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has not flowed in can enter, the player can enter the specific passage and the variable entry simply by hitting the game ball into the guide passage in the privilege game state. Spheres can be flowed into the means. Therefore, in the bonus game state, it is possible to acquire a specific bonus and a specific game value, so that the player can get more merits in the bonus game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game state can be further heightened.

In any one of gaming machines A4 to A8, counting means for counting the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entering means is provided, and the variable control means controls at least the number counted by the counting means to be a predetermined number. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state based on the result, and the game state setting means is configured to change the special game state when a specific condition is established in the special game state. The setting means sets the game state different from the state, and the setting means changes the flow path distribution means to the first state for at least a predetermined period from when the special game state is set until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is set to a 1 sorting state.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is counted by the counting means. At least when the number of balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the variable control means changes the variable ball-entering means to the second ball-entering state. A game state different from the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means when a specific condition is established in the privilege game state. The channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means for at least a predetermined period from when the privilege game state is set until the specific condition is established.

As a result, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific game value can be limited until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, a game can be played during the privilege game state in hopes that more game balls will flow into the specific flow path before reaching the predetermined number and that the specified privilege will be given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the privilege game state can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, a ball entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means, and a ball entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the privilege game state. and notification means for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that a game ball has entered the game machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the entering ball detecting means detects that the game ball has entered the normal entering means, and the entering ball detecting means detects the bonus game. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the state, the notification means executes a predetermined notification, so that the channel distribution means is set to the privilege game state. When a problem occurs in which the first sorting state is not set, a predetermined notification can be made to make the player or the hall clerk aware of the problem. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem can be eliminated quickly.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path flow more easily than the second flow path, The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is configured to open the first flow path in the second distribution state. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is likely to be guided while the flow path is closed.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow in than the second flow path. The channel sorting means opens the first channel as the first sorting state and closes the first channel as the second sorting state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is likely to be guided while the first flow path is closed.

Thereby, it is possible to change the flow path through which the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path flows down depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be given, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. .

In the gaming machine A11, the channel distribution means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls on the upstream side of the closed position when the first channel is closed in the second distribution state. In the second flow path, in a state in which a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. A game machine A12, characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in based on the change in the flow direction.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first channel is closed as the second distribution state, the game balls are held upstream of the closed position up to a predetermined upper limit number by the channel distribution means. In a state in which a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held in the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path, and the flowing direction changes based on A second flow path is provided at a position that facilitates the inflow.

As a result, even if a game ball is continuously launched toward a specific flow path, a specific privilege may or may not be given, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. be.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A12, comprising display means for displaying an image, and display control means for controlling the display means to display an image corresponding to the state of the channel sorting means. Characterized game machine A13.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A12, the display control means controls the display means so that an image corresponding to the state of the channel distribution means is displayed. , there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the channel sorting means.

In the gaming machine A13, the display control means, based on the setting means setting the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state, displays the specific flow path when the game ball flows into the specific flow path. A gaming machine A14 characterized by displaying an image suggesting that a privilege is likely to be granted.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, based on the setting means setting the channel distribution means to the first distribution state, when the game ball flows into the specific channel, the specified The display control means displays an image suggesting that the privilege of is likely to be granted. As a result, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the advantage when the game ball flows into the specific flow path.

<Feature B group> (Switching the flow path of other balls with the ball held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. a first ball entering means for providing a first game value based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; and a game flowing down the second flow path. A second ball entering means provided at a position where a ball can enter, and the first game given by the first giving means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. a second imparting means for imparting a second game value different from the value; a second position at which a game ball that has flowed into said first flow path is less likely to be held on said first flow path compared to a position thereof; A switching means for switching from the first position to the second position is provided, and the variable means holds the game ball so that the held game ball can easily guide the game ball to the second flow path. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, lottery is performed to determine whether a game ball will win or not based on the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole. In addition to the specific prize winning opening, there is known a game machine that is provided with a plurality of winning openings from which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. In this conventional game machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the game ball is ejected by the player by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning hole. There is (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-129177).

However, since the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the amount of prize balls that are paid out by winning into the winning opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific prize-winning hole that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep hitting the game ball in the same direction until it hits. Therefore, when the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to enter the same winning hole, and the number of winning balls to be paid out tends to be inconsistent. In other words, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path branches into a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path. A first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the first giving means provides the first ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. of game value is given. In addition, a second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the first giving means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means A second game value different from the first game value to be given is given by the second giving means. a first position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path; The variable means is changed to a second position that is difficult to hold. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is more likely to be guided to the second flow path by the game ball held.

As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the specific flow path, the game ball entering the specific flow path enters depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. can be different. Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be varied between the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine B1, the first game value imparted by the first imparting means is larger than the second game value imparted by the second imparting means. Game machine B2 to play.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game value imparted by the first imparting means is configured to be larger than the second game value imparted by the second imparting means, It is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants the game ball to flow into the specific flow path in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In a game machine B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition and a privilege game state advantageous to a player are set based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. A game state setting means, and a variable ball entry state capable of changing between a first ball entry state in which a game ball can enter and a second ball entry state in which a game ball is difficult to enter compared with the first ball entry state. means, specific value imparting means for imparting a specific game value based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means, and the privilege game state set by the game state setting means. and variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the switching means is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the above.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is set to a privilege game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. is set to A variable ball-entering means is varied between a first ball-entering state in which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entering state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first ball-entering state, and the variable ball-entering means is changed. A specific game value is given by a specific value giving means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first ball entry state by the variable control means until a predetermined condition is established.

As a result, the player can acquire a specific game value by entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means in the privilege game state, and in addition, by entering the game ball into the first ball entering means A player can obtain a first gaming value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the merits of the player in the special game state, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the special game state can be further heightened.

In the gaming machine B3, a guide channel capable of guiding a game ball to the specific channel is provided, and the variable ball entry means controls the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a ball can be entered.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific flow path by the guidance flow path. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter.

As a result, the player can cause the ball to flow into the specific flow path and the variable ball entry means simply by hitting the game ball into the guide flow path in the privilege game state. Therefore, in the bonus game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be obtained, so that the player's merits in the bonus game state can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game state can be further heightened.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, a third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a position where a game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter A third game value different from the second game value imparted by the second imparting means based on the provided third ball entering means and the entry of a game ball into the third ball entering means. a third imparting means for imparting a game value, wherein the variable means causes the held game ball to cause the game ball to enter the second flow path and the third flow path by holding the game ball; A game machine B5 characterized in that it facilitates guidance.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. A third channel is provided as one of the plurality of branched channels in the specific channel. A third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter. Based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, the third giving means gives a third game value different from the second game value given by the second giving means. By holding the game ball by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held game ball.

As a result, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can enter either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. Become. That is, since the player can obtain one of the second game value and the third game value which are different from each other, the game value obtained by the player can be given randomness. . On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path enters the first ball entering means, and the first game value is given by the first giving means. Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5, the third game value imparted by the third imparting means is larger than the first game value imparted by the first imparting means. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the third game value imparted by the third imparting means has more game value than the first game value imparted by the first imparting means. Since the configuration is such that the game ball is held by the variable means, it can be expected that the game ball flows down the third flow path. Therefore, it is possible for the player to more interestingly observe the traveling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine B5 or B6, when the game balls are held on the first flow path, the variable means arranges the held game balls so that at least the game balls flowing into the specific flow path are arranged in the second flow path. It is characterized in that it can be held in a first arrangement in which it is easier to be guided to the flow path and in a second arrangement in which it is easier to be guided to the third flow path than in the first arrangement. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5 or B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, the arrangement of the held game ball is such that at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to be guided to the second flow path. 1 position and a second position where it is more likely to be guided to the third flow path than in the first position.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can determine the flow path into which the game balls are likely to flow simply by confirming the arrangement of the game balls.

In the gaming machine B7, a determining means for determining whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and an effect for executing a specific effect indicating the result of determination by the determining means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by comprising an execution means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means determines whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and a specific effect indicating the result of determination by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means. , there is an effect that the player can more easily determine the flow path into which the game balls tend to flow.

Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is characterized by comprising adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path to flow into the second flow path and the third flow path, respectively. Gaming machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Since it is adjusted, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy to give the second privilege or to make the gaming machine easy to give the third privilege depending on the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the game machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B9 is provided with operating means operable by the player and detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means, and the switching means detects an operation on the operating means by the detecting means. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the detection.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B9, the following effects are produced. That is, the detection means detects an operation on the operation means. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the detecting means detecting an operation on the operating means.

As a result, it is possible for the player to switch whether or not to allow the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path to flow down to the first ball entering means, so that each player can choose whether or not to allow the game ball to flow down to the first ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be set to the state.

The game machine B11 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B10, the variable means can hold only one game ball on the first flow path.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B10, only one game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, so that the variable means is changed to the first position. When the player quits the game at , the game balls remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he or she has lost money when quitting the game.

<Characteristic group C> (Variable probability ratio by adjusting the ratio of balls entering the holding device)
A specific flow path that branches into at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a first ball entry provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. means, a first privilege granting means capable of imparting a first privilege based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. A second privilege different from the first privilege is given based on a second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can be entered and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. an adjustment means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, lottery is performed to determine whether a game ball will win or not based on the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole. In addition to the specific prize winning opening, there is known a game machine that is provided with a plurality of winning openings from which prize balls are paid out when the ball wins. In this conventional game machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the game ball is ejected by the player by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning hole. There is (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001-129177).

However, since the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the amount of prize balls that are paid out by winning into the winning opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific prize-winning hole that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to keep hitting the game ball in the same direction until it hits. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the ball is shot in the same direction, the ball will continue to enter the same winning hole, and the number of awarded balls will not change. there was a case. In other words, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous.

According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path through which game balls can flow down. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the first privilege giving means 1 bonus is given. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the second privilege is different from the first privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. The adjusting means adjusts the ratio at which the game ball flowing down the specific flow path flows into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.

Accordingly, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make the gaming machine more likely to provide the first privilege or to make the gaming machine more likely to provide the second privilege. Therefore, even if the machine is the same model, it is possible to realize different playability by changing the degree of adjustment by the adjusting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In a game machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery on the basis of establishment of a lottery condition, and a privilege game for giving a privilege game advantageous to a player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific lottery result. A granting means, a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result by the lottery means being the specific lottery result is high, and a second lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is lower than that of the first lottery state. A settable lottery state setting means is provided, and the first privilege granting means controls such that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege. Gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game is played when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. A privilege game advantageous to a player is imparted by a privilege game imparting means. A lottery state setting means sets a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result by the lottery means being a specific lottery result is high and a second lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being a specific lottery result is lower than that of the first lottery state. . It is controlled by the first privilege granting means so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege.

Thereby, the easiness of shifting to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, according to the business policy of the hall, the first lottery state is easily set and the privilege game state is easily set, or the first lottery state is difficult to be set and the second privilege is easily given. You can adjust whether Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the game machine C3 is characterized in that the second privilege giving means gives a predetermined amount of game media as the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the predetermined amount of game media is provided as the second privilege by the second privilege providing means, so the predetermined amount of game media is easily provided. can be adjusted by the adjustment means. Therefore, it is possible to adjust whether a game property in which a predetermined amount of game media is likely to be provided or a game property in which the first privilege is likely to be provided according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, there is provided a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means compared to the first position. and a variable control means for varying the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is established, based on the fact that the privilege game is granted by the privilege game imparting means. A gaming machine C4 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, it is variable by the variable means between a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means compared to the first position. be done. The variable control means changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is established based on the fact that the privilege game is granted by the privilege game imparting means.

As a result, the first privilege is more likely to be granted in the privilege game state, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be heightened.

In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position at least based on the lapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on the lapse of a predetermined time after at least the variable means was changed to the first position. Since it is variable, the opportunity for the player to acquire the first privilege can be limited until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the rarity value of the first privilege can be increased, the importance of adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when a player selects a game machine for playing a game, the game machine can be selected by considering the adjustment condition of the adjusting means, so there is an effect that the enjoyment of selecting the game machine can be given. .

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific ball entry means for imparting a specific game value based on the entry of a game ball, and a specific game value higher than the specific game value based on the entry of a game ball. a low-value ball entry means for imparting a low game value, wherein the second flow path includes a specific flow path for flowing the game ball to the specific ball-entry means, and a low-value ball entry means. and a low value flow path for flowing down, and at least one game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can be held on the specific flow path, and at the first variable position A gaming machine C6 characterized by comprising: a second variable position at which a game ball that has flowed into said specific flow path is less likely to be retained on said specific flow path.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is imparted based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering means, and the gaming machine enters the low value ball entering means. A game value less than a specific game value is awarded based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path for causing the game ball to flow down to the specific ball-entering means and a low-value flow path for causing the game ball to flow down to the low-value ball-entering means. A first variable position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into a specific flow path can be held on the specific flow path, and a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is held on the specific flow path in comparison with the first variable position. The position variable means is varied to the second variable position where it is difficult to change the position.

As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the second flow path, the ball entry means for entering the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path according to the variable position of the position variable means is provided. can be different. Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine C6 comprises holding control means for controlling to vary the position varying means to the second variable position based on the award of the privilege game by the privilege game imparting means; is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is more likely to flow in compared to the low value flow path, and the position varying means holds the game ball by holding it. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that it facilitates guiding the game ball to the low-value flow path by the game ball being played.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position varying means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means based on the award of the privilege game by the privilege game imparting means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is more likely to flow compared to the low value flow path. By holding the game ball by the position variable means, the game ball is guided to the low-value flow path by the game ball held.

Thereby, the variable position of the variable position means and the ball entry means for entering the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path can be differentiated according to whether or not the game ball is held by the variable position means. . Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine C9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position variable means are constructed by one member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C6 to C8, since the variable means and the position variable means are composed of one member, the position and position of the variable means can be varied by one control. The positions of the means can be switched at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means increases the rate at which the game ball flowing down to the specific flow path flows into the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second entering means. When the ratio of game balls flowing into the ball means is reduced and the ratio of game balls flowing into the first ball entering means is reduced, the ratio of game balls flowing into the second ball entering means is increased. A gaming machine C10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means, the game can be played. The rate at which spheres enter the second channel is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path into the first flow path is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the second flow path is increased.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably make it easier for game balls to flow into the channel on the side where the ratio is increased.

<Characteristic D group> (Increase probability variation expectation during normal game)
A game area in which a ball can flow down, a ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a discrimination means for performing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entering means, and the discrimination. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the result of discrimination by the means is a predetermined discrimination result, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing balls; variable means for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state for releasing the storage state; In this case, a specific ball entry means is provided in a specific game area where the ball stored in the storage means can flow down, and the ball can enter the specific ball entry means, and when the ball enters the specific ball entry means, a privilege is provided. wherein the variable means changes the storage means to the released state when the result of determination by the determination means is the predetermined determination result. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened during a privilege game (such as a jackpot game), and a game state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing balls. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (variable probability, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-174874). In this case, during the bonus game, the ball can be won by winning the ball in the variable prize winning device, and furthermore, there is a possibility that the game state that is advantageous to the player can be obtained. was intended to improve However, in the pachinko machine described above, only the game executed during the privilege game affects the result of whether or not the game state that is advantageous to the player is obtained. During the period, there was a problem that the player's desire to play decreased.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the ball enters the ball entering means provided in the game area where the ball can flow down, the determination means executes determination, and if the determination result is a predetermined determination result, A privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. The game area is provided with storage means for changing from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released by the variable means when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result. be done. When the storage means is in a released state, a specific ball entry means for allowing the ball stored in the storage means to enter is provided, and when the ball enters the specific ball entry means, a privilege is given after the privilege game is finished. be. Thus, by changing the storage means to the released state while the ball is stored, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will enter the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play in the game other than during the privilege game.

The game machine D2 is characterized in that, in the game machine D1, the storage means is configured to be able to store a plurality of balls.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, since the storage means is configured to be able to store a plurality of balls, by causing the storage means to store a plurality of balls, the balls can be delivered to the specific ball entry means. You can increase your chances of hitting the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continue to play the game with motivation until the predetermined determination result is determined by the determining means.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a plurality of paths through which a ball can flow down are provided in the specific game area, and a ball that has flowed down one of the plurality of paths can enter the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of paths through which a ball can flow down are provided in the specific game area, and a ball that has flowed down one of the paths is entered into the specific ball entry means. As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played while enjoying whether or not the ball flowing down the specific game area will enter the specific ball entering means.

In addition, in the case of having the configuration of the game machine D2, since the storage means is configured to be able to store a plurality of balls, it is possible to increase the possibility that the balls stored in the storage means enter the specific ball entry means. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that a distribution means for distributing the ball to one of the plurality of paths is provided in the specific game area.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the ball is distributed to any one of the plurality of paths provided in the specific game area by the distribution means, so the ball is reliably distributed to the plurality of paths. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D4, the distribution means distributes the balls to the plurality of paths in a predetermined order, and the storage means is necessary for the distribution means to distribute the balls to the one path. The game machine D5 is characterized in that it is possible to store balls equal to or greater than the number of balls.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the balls are distributed in a predetermined order to the plurality of paths by the distribution means. Then, the number of balls larger than the number of balls required for the distribution means to distribute the balls to the first path can be stored in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to allow the balls to enter the specific ball entering means by storing a plurality of balls in the storing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game to store the balls in the storage means.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, an end condition setting means for setting an end condition, and when the end condition set by the end condition setting means is established, the storage means is changed from the released state to the storage state. A gaming machine D6 characterized by having a second variable means for varying to.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the termination condition set by the termination condition setting means is established, the second variable means changes the storage means from the released state to the storage state. Thus, by setting the termination condition, it is possible to set a period during which a ball can be entered into the specific ball-entering means and a period during which balls that can be entered into the specific ball-entering means are stored. Become. Therefore, since the player executes the game according to the state of the storage means, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The end condition set by the end condition setting means may be, for example, a predetermined time (four times as a sufficient time for all the balls stored in the storage means to flow down) after the storage means is released by the variable means. seconds) as the end condition, or when executing a privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is changed between the allowable state and the restricted state a plurality of times, the variable ball entry means is set to the allowable state a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). The end condition may be the timing changed to , or the end condition may be the timing at which the privilege game ends. Further, it is preferable that a plurality of termination conditions can be set by the termination condition setting means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a plurality of periods during which a ball can be entered into the specific ball-entering means and a period in which the balls that can be entered into the specific ball-entering means are stored. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of.

In the game machine D6, the end condition setting means sets a timing at which the privilege game ends as the end condition.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the end condition setting means sets the timing at which the privilege game ends as an end condition, so that a game aiming at the specific ball entry means is executed during the privilege game. There is an effect that it becomes possible to play the game, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, for example, when a variable ball entry means is provided that changes the ball into a permissible state when a privilege game is executed, a specific ball entry means is provided in the vicinity of the variable ball entry means. By doing so, the player can simultaneously play a game aiming at the variable ball-entering means and a game aiming at the specific ball-entering means during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Here, the timing at which the privilege game ends means the timing at which the variable ball entry means changed to the allowable state by the privilege game changes to the restricted state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the allowable state, or the timing at which the privilege game ends. The timing at which the ending period executed after the variable ball-entering means, which has been changed to the permitted state by the game, is changed to the restricted state can be considered.

In the game machine D6 or D7, the game machine D8 is characterized in that the end condition setting means sets a predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed as the end condition.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6 or D7, the termination condition setting means sets the predetermined timing when the privilege game is executed as the termination condition. Then, it becomes possible to store the balls in the storage means. As a result, the period in which the storage means is in the storage state can be lengthened, so that the balls can be easily stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

Here, as the predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed, it is conceivable to set the timing after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 10 seconds have elapsed) after the privilege game is executed. In this case, it is preferable to set a sufficient time for all the balls stored in the storage means to flow down the game area. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the period during which the storage means is in the released state, and it is possible to make the storage means easily store the balls.

Further, as the predetermined timing at which the privilege game is executed, for example, when the privilege game (for example, 8 round jackpot) that changes the variable ball entry means to the allowable state a plurality of times (for example, 8 times) is executed, The predetermined timing may be set in the middle of the privilege game (for example, the fourth round). By doing so, it is possible to execute a game in which a ball is entered into the specific ball-entering means during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines D6 to D8, the end condition setting means can set a plurality of the end conditions, has a selection means for selecting one end condition from the plurality of end conditions, and A game machine D9 characterized in that the second variable means changes the storage means to the storage state based on the end condition selected by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D6 to D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one of a plurality of termination conditions set by the termination condition setting means is selected by the selection means, and the storage means is changed to the storage state by the second variable means based on the selected termination condition. variable. This makes it possible to vary the timing at which the storage means changes to the storage state. Therefore, a period in which a game in which a ball can be entered into the specific ball-entering means can be performed and a period in which a game in which a ball can be entered in the specific ball-entering means can be played are set at a plurality of timings. is possible, it is possible to provide a complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D10, variable ball entry means provided separately from the specific ball entry means and capable of being changed between an allowable state for allowing the entry of a ball and a restricted state for restricting the entry of a ball. wherein the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means changes the variable ball entry means to the allowable state, and the privilege granting means is provided while the privilege game is being executed A gaming machine D11 is characterized in that a second privilege different from the privilege can be given when a ball enters the specific ball-entering means in the second step.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened during a privilege game (such as a jackpot game), and a game state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing balls. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (variable probability, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-174874). In this case, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by causing the ball to enter the variable prize winning device during the bonus game, and furthermore, it is possible to obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was meant to improve. However, in the pachinko machine described above, the balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls. There is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a variable ball entry means is provided separately from the specific ball entry means for changing from a restricted state of restricting the entry of a ball to a permitted state of allowing the entry of a ball by executing a privilege game, A second privilege is granted when a ball enters a specific ball entering means while a privilege game is being executed. As a result, when a ball enters the specific ball-entering means during the privilege game, the second privilege can be awarded. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game in which a ball is entered into the specific ball-entering means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

<Feature E group> (The ball that flows down a specific route wins the V winning prize opening)
A variable ball-entering means that can be changed between an allowable state for allowing a ball to enter and a restricted state for restricting the ball-entering, and the variable ball-entering means is changed to the allowable state based on establishment of a specific condition. a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that changes the value of the ball, a ball entry means that is provided separately from the variable ball entry means and that can enter a ball, and a ball entering the ball entry means; and privilege granting means for granting a first privilege, wherein the privilege granting means gives the first privilege when a ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is capable of imparting a different second privilege.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened during a privilege game (such as a jackpot game), and a game state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing balls. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (variable probability, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-174874). In this case, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by causing the ball to enter the variable prize winning device during the bonus game, and furthermore, it is possible to obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was meant to improve. However, in the pachinko machine described above, the balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls. There is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege game executing means changes the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the allowable state for allowing the entry of the ball and the restricted state for restricting the entry of the ball to the allowable state. Game is executed. A ball-entering means is provided separately from the variable ball-entering means and capable of imparting a first privilege by entering a ball. Then, when the ball enters the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed, the second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege giving means. As a result, when a ball enters the ball entering means other than the variable ball entering means during the privilege game, the second privilege different from the first privilege can be awarded. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game using a ball that has not entered the variable ball-entering means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

The gaming machine E1 has setting means capable of setting a first state in which a ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second state in which the ball-entering means is more difficult to enter than the first state. A gaming machine E2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the setting means selects a first state in which a ball is likely to enter the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed, and a second state in which a ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering means than in the first state. state is set. As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed and a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball-entering means. The game is played while expecting that the second privilege will be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the setting means has a plurality of paths through which a ball can pass, and distribution means for distributing the balls to the plurality of paths, and the distribution means uses at least the setting means to determine the first Put the ball on either the first path through which the ball can pass when the state is set, or the second path through which the ball can pass when the second state is set. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being a sorting machine.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sorting means selects a first path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set, and a second path through which the ball can pass when the second state is set. The ball is distributed to the path. Thereby, a state in which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball can be set depending on the path through which the ball passes. As a result, the player can keep an eye on the flow of the balls, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine E3, the plurality of paths have a third path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set, in addition to the first path. Path 1 allows the ball to enter the ball entering means in a shorter period of time than path 1, and the sorting means, when the first state is set, A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it is possible to distribute balls to the first path and the third path.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first state is set, the plurality of paths include a third path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set, in addition to the first path. The ball is distributed to the first path or the third path by the distribution means. Thereby, when the first state is set, the timing at which the ball enters the ball entering means can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine E5 in the gaming machine E3 or E4 is characterized in that the distribution means distributes the balls in a predetermined order to the plurality of paths.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E3 or E4, the distribution means distributes the balls in a predetermined order to a plurality of paths. By causing the ball to flow down to the sorting means, it is possible to reliably enter the ball into the ball-entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game while the privilege game is being executed.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, there is provided a game area into which game balls can flow, a shooting means capable of shooting balls toward the game area, and a shooting intensity adjusting means capable of adjusting the shooting intensity of the shooting means. , wherein the variable ball entry means and the ball entry means are provided in a predetermined game area in which a ball fired at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing intensity adjusting means can flow down. Machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entering means is provided in a predetermined game area where the ball can flow down when the shooting intensity of the shooting means capable of shooting the ball toward the game area is adjusted to a predetermined shooting intensity by the shooting intensity adjusting means. A ball entry means is provided. As a result, while the privilege game is being executed, the game of entering the ball into the variable ball entering means and the game of entering the ball into the ball entering means can be performed simply by shooting the ball at a predetermined shooting intensity. can be executed. Therefore, since the player can play a plurality of games at the same time, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, there is provided a game area into which game balls can flow, a shooting means capable of shooting balls toward the game area, and a shooting intensity adjusting means capable of adjusting the shooting intensity of the shooting means. , wherein the variable ball entry means is provided in a predetermined game area where a ball fired at a predetermined firing strength by the firing strength adjusting means can flow down, and the ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength by the firing strength adjusting means. The game machine E7 is characterized in that the ball-entering means is provided in a game area where it is difficult for the ball to flow down.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is provided in a predetermined game area where the ball can flow down when the firing intensity of the shooting means capable of shooting the ball toward the game area is adjusted to a predetermined firing intensity by the shooting intensity adjusting means. A ball entry means is provided in a game area where it is difficult for a ball shot with a predetermined shot intensity to enter. As a result, while the privilege game is being executed, a game is executed in which the ball is shot with a predetermined firing intensity and the ball is entered into the variable ball entry means, or the ball is shot with a shooting intensity other than the predetermined shooting intensity. The player can decide whether to execute a game in which the ball is shot and enters the ball-entering means by operating the shooting intensity adjusting means. Therefore, since the player can actively play the game while the privilege game is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

<Feature F group> (Change the winning rate to the V winning opening with the attacker opening and closing pattern)
a variable ball-entering means that can be changed between an allowable state for allowing a ball to enter and a restricting state for restricting the ball-entering and passing the ball to the downstream side; and variable control means for variably controlling the variable ball-entering means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the variable control means alternately varies the variable ball entry means between the allowable state and the restricted state based on the establishment of a specific condition; and the variable ball entry means. a ball entering means provided separately from a ball entering means, and a privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means; means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege when a ball enters the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed; As the variable control pattern of the means, either a first variable pattern that allows a ball to enter the ball entering means or a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for a ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a variable pattern setting means for setting the .

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened during a privilege game (such as a jackpot game), and a game state that is provided in the variable winning device and is advantageous to the player by passing balls. A pachinko machine capable of imparting (variable probability, etc.) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-174874). In this case, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by causing the ball to enter the variable prize winning device during the bonus game, and furthermore, it is possible to obtain a game state that is advantageous to the player. It was meant to improve. However, in the pachinko machine described above, the balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game become useless balls. There is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine F1, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the variable ball entry means is controlled by the variable control means to be in the allowable state in which the ball is allowed to enter and in the restricted state to regulate the ball in. and are varied alternately. Then, separately from the variable ball-entering means, a ball-entering means capable of imparting the first privilege by the privilege imparting means when a ball enters is provided. When a ball enters the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege giving means. Furthermore, as the variable control pattern of the variable control means, either a first variable pattern that allows ball entry by the ball entry means or a second variable pattern that is more difficult to enter than the first variable pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. be done. As a result, when a ball enters the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed, the second privilege different from the first privilege can be awarded. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game using a ball that has not entered the variable ball-entering means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved. Further, the variable pattern setting means sets the variable control pattern of the variable control means to either a first variable pattern in which the ball easily enters the ball-entering means or a second variable pattern in which the ball hardly enters the ball-entering means. can be set, the player can play the game while enjoying whether or not to enter the ball into the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

In the game machine F1, the game machine F2 is characterized in that the ball entering means can enter a ball that has passed through the variable ball entering means in the restricted state.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the ball entry means is provided so that the ball that has passed through the variable ball entry means in the regulated state can be entered. The easiness of the ball entering the ball entering means can be reliably set based on the variable control pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entering means at an unintended timing, and it is possible to provide an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the variable pattern setting means sets the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern by varying the period during which the variable ball entering means is in the restricted state. A gaming machine F3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are set by differentiating the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the restricted state. There is an effect that the ease with which a ball can be entered into the ball entering means can be easily changed.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable pattern setting means causes the variable control means to start varying control of the variable ball-entering means at different timings, thereby setting the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern. A gaming machine F4 characterized by setting a variable pattern.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern can be changed by differentiating the timing at which the variable control of the variable ball entry means is started. Since it is set, there is an effect that the ease with which a ball can be entered into the ball entering means can be easily changed.

In addition, when the game machine has the configuration of F3, the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the regulated state and the timing at which the variable control of the variable ball entering means is started are made different from each other, so that the ball entering the ball entering means is controlled. There is an effect that the easiness of playing can be made more complicated, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, there is provided, in addition to the variable ball entry means, a variable entry state that allows a ball to enter and a regulation state that the ball entry is restricted and passed downstream. It has two variable ball-entering means, and the variable control means controls the variable ball-entering means so that a ball that has passed through the variable ball-entering means in the regulated state enters the second variable ball-entering means. and the second variable ball entry means are variably controlled.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in addition to the variable ball-entering means, the second variable ball-entering means is variable between an allowable state for allowing the ball to enter and a restricted state for restricting the ball from entering and allowing it to pass downstream, The variable control means variably controls the variable ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means so that a ball passing through the variable ball-entering means in the regulated state enters the second variable ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entering means at an unintended timing while the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided.

The configuration of the gaming machine F5 is more effective when the following privilege game is executed. For example, as a privilege game, the period in which the variable ball entry means is opened is regarded as one game, and when a predetermined number of games are continuously played, one game is completed and the next game is played. The variable ball-entering means is changed to the regulated state until the game is started. In this case, if a ball that has passed through the variable ball-entering means enters the ball-entering means, there is a problem that a plurality of balls enter the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed. . According to the gaming machine F5, the game in which the variable ball-entering means is opened is finished, and the ball passing through the variable ball-entering means in the regulated state is variably controlled to enter the second variable ball-entering means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball entering means at an unintended timing.

<Characteristic group G> (Provide advantages and disadvantages in V gate passage timing)
A variable ball-entering means that can be changed between an allowable state that allows the ball to enter and a restricting state that restricts the ball-entering, and the variable ball-entering means is changed to the allowable state based on the establishment of a specific condition. Granting condition establishing means for establishing a granting condition for granting a variable privilege game; a specific region through which a ball can pass; In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on passing, a ball entering means provided separately from the variable ball entering means and capable of allowing a ball to enter, and the privilege a privilege granting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when a ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed by the game execution means; and a period for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area. A gaming machine G1, characterized by comprising period setting means for setting an advantageous period during which the privilege is easily granted and a disadvantageous period during which the privilege is less likely to be granted than the advantageous period.

Here, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a pachinko machine in which a jackpot game is started by passing a ball through a specific area after winning a jackpot by lottery of special symbols (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013. -233181). In this case, after winning the jackpot by lottery of special patterns, the jackpot game is started by executing the game of passing the ball through a specific area, so that the pachinko machine full of interest is provided. However, in the pachinko machine described above, the game of passing the ball through the specific area after winning the jackpot was only a game for starting the jackpot game, so there has been a demand for further improvement of interest.

According to the gaming machine G1, the granting condition for granting the privilege game is established by the granting condition establishing means based on the establishment of the specific condition. When this granting condition is satisfied, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means by passing the ball through the specific area. Further, a ball entry means is provided for giving a privilege advantageous to the player by a privilege giving means by entering a ball while the privilege game is being executed. Then, as the period during which the ball is allowed to pass through the specific area, an advantageous period during which the ball is likely to enter the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed and a disadvantageous period during which the ball is more difficult to enter than the advantageous period are set. set by means. As a result, an advantageous period and a disadvantageous period can be provided in the period during which the ball is passed through the specific area, so that the player can be motivated to play the game in which the ball is passed through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the period setting means sets a predetermined period of time after the granting condition is satisfied by the granting condition establishment means as the advantageous period.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the period setting means sets a predetermined period of time after the granting conditions are established by the granting condition fulfillment means to be an advantageous period. When the granting condition is satisfied, the player enthusiastically plays the game in order to pass the ball through the specific area as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 is characterized by comprising advantageous period changing means capable of changing the length of the advantageous period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, since the length of the advantageous period is changed by the advantageous period changing means, the advantage is likely to be awarded by the privilege providing means, and the advantage is difficult to be awarded. There is an effect that it is possible to set a game and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the case of having the configuration of the game machine G2, since the timing at which the advantageous period ends after the granting condition is established is changed, it is possible to determine whether the timing at which the ball is passed through the specific area is during the advantageous period. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend.

Any one of the game machines G1 to G3 has a distribution means for distributing balls to a plurality of paths, and the balls distributed to one of the plurality of paths by the distribution means pass through the specific area. The game machine G4 is characterized in that

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the ball is distributed to a plurality of paths by the distribution means, and the ball distributed to one of the paths passes through the specific area. Therefore, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area differs depending on the sorting result of the sorting means. Therefore, since the ball passes through the specific area at various timings, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the privilege granting means imparts, as the privilege, a high-probability state in which the probability that the specific condition is satisfied after the privilege game is finished is set higher than usual. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a high-probability state in which the probability that the specific condition is satisfied after the privilege game is finished is set higher than usual by the privilege providing means. Since it is provided, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, a determination means for determining whether the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area is the advantageous period, and a notification is given based on the fact that the determination means has determined that it is the advantageous period. a game machine G6 comprising:

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines G1 to G5, when the judgment means judges that the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area is in the advantageous period, the notification means informs the result of the judgment. Notification is made based on As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the timing at which the ball passed through the specific area was the advantageous period.

In the case of the game machine G5 having the configuration, since it takes a long period of time from when the ball passes through the specific area to when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the player can feel at ease by notifying the player with the notification by the notifying means. A privilege game can be executed.

<Characteristic H group> (You can win a prize at the V winning prize opening during the jackpot)
A variable ball-entering means that can be changed between an allowable state for allowing a ball to enter and a restricted state for restricting the ball-entering, and the variable ball-entering means is changed to the allowable state based on establishment of a specific condition. a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that changes the value of the ball, a ball entry means that is provided separately from the variable ball entry means and that can enter a ball, and a ball entering the ball entry means; A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege or a second privilege more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, and a ball entering the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed. and a determining means for determining that, the privilege granting means, when it is determined by the determining means that a ball has entered the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, the first 2, a variable means that can be changed between an allowable position that allows the ball to flow down into the ball entry means and a restrictive position that restricts the flow of the ball from the allowable position; and variable control means for varying the variable means to the allowable position based on the satisfaction of a condition.

<Feature I group> (V probability expectation is set by the jackpot type determined when passing through the V gate)
The granting condition is satisfied by granting condition establishment means for establishing a granting condition for granting a privilege game to a player based on establishment of a specific condition, a specific area through which a ball can pass, and the granting condition establishment means. In this case, based on the ball passing through the specific area, a privilege game type setting means for setting the type of the privilege game to be given to the player, and the privilege game set by the privilege game type setting means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on the type, a ball entering means capable of entering a ball is provided separately from the variable ball entering means, and the privilege game executing means. and a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player when a ball enters the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, and the privilege game type setting means is at least A first privilege game type in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entering means while the privilege game is being executed, and the entering while the privilege game is being executed more than the first privilege game category. The game machine I1 is characterized in that one of the second privilege game types in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball means is set.

In any one of game machines A1-A14, B1-B11, C1-C10, D1-D11, E1-E7, F1-F5, G1-G6, H1, and I1, the game machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1-A14, B1-B11, C1-C10, D1-D11, E1-E7, F1-F5, G1-G6, H1, and I1, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1-A14, B1-B11, C1-C10, D1-D11, E1-E7, F1-F5, G1-G6, H1 and I1, the game machine comprises a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable prize winning device that is opened during a privilege game (winning game, etc.), and a game state (variable probability) that is provided in the variable prize device and is advantageous to the player when the ball passes through. etc.) can be given (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-174874).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced due to the frequent occurrence of balls that do not win the variable winning device during the bonus game.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player's desire to play.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes variable ball entry means that can be changed between an allowable state for allowing the entry of a ball and a restricted state for restricting the entry of a ball; A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable ball entry means to the allowable state based on the fact that it is established, and a ball entry means provided separately from the variable ball entry means and capable of entering a ball. and privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, wherein the privilege granting means performs the ball entry while the privilege game is being executed. When a ball hits the means, a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein a first state in which a ball can enter the ball-entering means and a second state in which a ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state are provided. It has a setting means capable of setting the state.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the setting means has a plurality of paths through which balls can pass, and distribution means for distributing balls to the plurality of paths, The sorting means has at least a first path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set by the setting means, and a first path through which the ball can pass when the second state is set by the setting means. It distributes the ball to either of the possible second paths.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the plurality of paths allow the ball to pass when the first state is set separately from the first path. and the first route allows the ball to enter the ball entering means in a shorter period of time than the third route, and the sorting means includes the When the first state is set, the balls can be distributed to the first path and the third path.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3 or 4, wherein the sorting means sorts the balls in a predetermined order with respect to the plurality of paths.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the privilege game executing means allows the variable ball entry means to be variable between the allowable state for allowing the entry of the ball and the restricted state for restricting the entry of the ball. A privilege game that changes to is executed. A ball-entering means is provided separately from the variable ball-entering means and capable of imparting a first privilege by entering a ball. Then, when the ball enters the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed, the second privilege different from the first privilege is given by the privilege giving means.
As a result, when a ball enters the ball entering means other than the variable ball entering means during the privilege game, the second privilege different from the first privilege can be awarded. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game in which a ball is entered into the ball entering means other than the variable ball entering means during the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the setting means selects a first state in which a ball is likely to enter the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed, and a second state in which a ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering means than in the first state. state is set.
As a result, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the ball-entering means while the privilege game is being executed and a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball-entering means. The game is played while expecting that the second privilege will be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sorting means selects a first path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set, and a second path through which the ball can pass when the second state is set. The ball is distributed to the path.
Thereby, a state in which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering means and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball can be set depending on the path through which the ball passes. As a result, the player can keep an eye on the flow of the balls, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the first state is set, the plurality of paths include a third path through which the ball can pass when the first state is set, in addition to the first path. The ball is distributed to the first path or the third path by the distribution means.
Thereby, when the first state is set, the timing at which the ball enters the ball entering means can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 3 or 4, the distribution means distributes the balls to a plurality of paths in a predetermined order. By causing a plurality of balls to flow down to the sorting means while the game is being played, the balls can be reliably entered into the ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game while the privilege game is being executed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a first specific winning port (variable ball entry means)
13 game board (game area)
64 1st ball entrance (part of ball entry means)
601 general prize gate (second ball entry means)
602 general prize gate (first ball entry means)
607a reservoir valve (variable means)
630a Specific General Winning Gate (Specific Ball Entry Means)
640 Second ball entrance (part of ball entry means)
650a 2nd specific winning port (variable ball entry means)
701 general winning entrance (first ball entry means)
703d general prize-winning entrance (second ball entry means)
704a reservoir valve (variable means)
900 first distribution member (distribution means)
901 second distribution member (distribution means)
902 Third distribution member (distribution means)
1600 second storage device (storage means)
1601a storage valve (variable means)
S216 determination means
S218 variable game executing means
S305 determination means
S1004 Privilege game executing means S1110 Privilege granting means

Claims (1)

A first state is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter, and the game ball can enter , and a second state makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. variable entry means; and
a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition ;
variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means; , in a game machine with
a first ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter;
A first position at which a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter the first ball entering means, and a game ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entering means than at the first position. a variable means variable to a second position ;
a second ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, and which is different from the first ball-entering means;
By performing specific processing that is not performed when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, the advantage degree when the game ball enters the first ball entering means is set to a high advantage degree. and means for causing
Said second ball-entering means has said variable means changed to said second position more than a game ball that has flowed down in the direction of said variable means while said variable means has been changed to said first position. is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down in the direction of the variable means is more likely to be guided,
The variable means is varied to the first position while the variable ball-entering means is varied to the second state during execution of the variable game, and the variable ball-entering means is variable to the first state. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a configuration that can be varied to the second position while the second position is being held.